JP6702403B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. It is known that these gaming machines are equipped with a display device having a display unit, such as a liquid crystal display device. In the gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit using the image data read from the memory ( For example, see Patent Document 1).

Further, a configuration including moving image data as image data is also known. The data amount of moving image data tends to be larger than that of still image data, and may be stored in a compressed state in a memory for image data.

JP, 2004-208830, A

Here, in order to increase the player's interest in the display effect, the display effect using the moving image data is preferable, but the increase in the data amount is not preferable.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably performing a display effect while suppressing an increase in the amount of moving image data. It is what

The present invention is
Display means having a display part;
Display storage means for storing image data in advance,
Display control means for displaying an image on the display section using image data stored in the display storage means;
A winning means for opening the game ball so that it can be accepted when the game state is advantageous to the player
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means stores compressed moving image data used to reproduce a moving image,
The display control means,
Expanding means for expanding any of the moving image data in the expansion area to create still image data,
By using the still image data expanded by the expanding means, display effect executing means for executing a display effect of displaying a moving image of an image corresponding to the moving image data for a predetermined display period,
Equipped with
The display effect executing means,
A first means capable of executing a specific effect by displaying a predetermined insertion image on the display unit;
Second means capable of displaying, on the display unit, a moving image based on the first moving image data displayed before the specific effect by the first means and a moving image based on the second moving image data displayed after the specific effect. When,
Equipped with
By the first means and the second means is capable of executing a series of display effect corresponding to one round game to be executed by an open state the winning unit,
The data amount assigned to the first moving image data is compressed so as to be larger than the data amount assigned to the second moving image data,
The insertion image may be displayed so as to overlap with a moving image based on the second moving image data.

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably perform a display effect while suppressing an increase in the amount of moving image data.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of (a)-(j) symbol display device. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for win/win lottery. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing performed in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the normal processing performed in the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing performed with a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the change start processing performed by the main controller. 6 is a flowchart showing a main process which is another mode of the process configuration of the main control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process which is another form of the process configuration of the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the display CPU. It is a flow chart which shows V interruption processing performed by a display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the task process performed by a display CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of (a)-(c) drawing list. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by VDP. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a situation in which drawing data is created in accordance with execution of drawing processing. It is a flow chart which shows hidden surface processing using a Z buffer performed by VDP. It is a flow chart which shows the calculation processing for masks performed by the display CPU. (A), (b) It is an explanatory view for explaining the specific contents of the first mask display. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific content of (a)-(d) 2nd mask display. It is a flow chart which shows the calculation processing for masks performed by the display CPU. It is a flow chart which shows operation generation command corresponding processing performed by a display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for a display mode background performed by a display CPU. It is a flowchart showing a symbol calculation process executed by the display CPU. 7 is a flowchart showing background setting processing executed by VDP. 7 is a flowchart showing background drawing data creation processing executed by VDP. 7 is a timing chart showing a timing at which separate storage data for the first display mode and separate storage data for the second display mode are created. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a), (b) connection object. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the connection object performed by a display CPU. It is the flowchart which shows the setting processing for connection object production which is executed with VDP. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a)-(c) connection object production. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining an object for particle dispersion, (b) is an explanatory view for explaining a texture for particle dispersion, and (c) to (e) are for explaining key data. FIG. (A) is a flowchart showing a calculation process for a connected object executed by the display CPU, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a blending table. It is the flowchart which shows the setting processing for the particle dispersion production which is executed with VDP. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a particle dispersion production, (b-1) and (b-2) are for demonstrating simply what kind of locus|trajectory each particle single image displaces. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows another form of the setting process for particle dispersion production performed by VDP. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining a sea surface object, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining normal line map data. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the method of applying a pair of normal line map data to the object for sea surfaces. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how to apply the change data with respect to each surface data of (a)-(c). (A) is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for sea surface display performed by a display CPU, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the animation data for sea surfaces. It is a flowchart which shows the setting processing for sea surface display performed by VDP. 8 is a flowchart showing a normal parameter setting process executed by VDP. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the method of setting color information to each surface data of (a)-(c). (A) is a flowchart showing a sea surface display color information setting process executed by VDP, and (b) is a flowchart showing a sea surface adjustment process executed by VDP. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the sea surface display, and (b) is an explanatory view for simply explaining the setting mode of the color information of the area where the sea surface display is performed. 9 is a flowchart showing another mode of the sea surface display color information setting process executed by the VDP. It is the flowchart which shows the production arithmetic processing in opening and closing execution mode which is executed with the indicatory CPU. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining each area of the VRAM used for adjusting the focus in the VDP, and (b) is a flowchart showing a drawing data synthesizing process executed in the VDP. (A) is a flow chart which shows the adjustment processing for focus production performed by VDP, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining a focus range and each blurring range. (A) is a flowchart showing a blurring generation process executed in VDP, and (b-1) and (b-2) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a unit area extraction mode in the blurring generation process. .. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining a state in which focus display is not performed, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining a state in which focus display is performed. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining a special object, (b-1) to (b-3) are explanatory views for explaining a first partial texture, and (c-1) to (c). -4) is an explanatory view for explaining the second partial texture. It is a flow chart which shows the calculation processing for special characters performed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the texture mapping process for special characters performed by VDP. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of (a), (b) pattern change display. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure of round moving image data. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content by round moving image data, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content by insertion image data. It is the flowchart which shows the calculation processing for the round production which is executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the decoding process by a moving image decoder. It is the flowchart which shows the setting processing for the round production which is executed with VDP. It is the flowchart which shows the round production mapping processing which is executed with VDP. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of (a)-(d) round production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure of the round moving image data in another form. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the compression aspect of 1st round moving image data, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the compression aspect of 2nd round moving image data, (c) Each round moving image 6 is a graph for explaining a bit rate of image data. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for round effects in another form. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for round effects in another form, and (b) It is a flowchart which shows the mapping process for round effects in another form. It is a time chart for explaining an execution mode of a round effect. (A), (b) It is an explanatory view for explaining each object used for displaying a beach background image. It is an explanatory view for explaining each texture used for displaying a beach background image. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the change of a perspective by changing a viewpoint. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting aspect of each object at the time of creating a production background image. It is a flowchart which shows the beach background calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation processing for backgrounds of (a) sandy beach dash production, and (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the distance from the viewpoint of each object, and the relative speed with respect to the said viewpoint. It is the flowchart which shows the calculation processing for production of the sandy beach dash production. (A) It is explanatory drawing which shows the display surface in which the beach background image was displayed, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of sandy beach dash production. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the refraction object, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating 1st modification, (c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating 2nd modification, (D) It is an explanatory view for explaining α data for refraction. It is a flow chart which shows distortion production calculation processing. (A) It is an explanatory view for explaining the 1st coordinate mapping data, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the 2nd coordinate mapping data. It is a flow chart which shows the drawing processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for distortion production. It is a flowchart which shows the texture mapping process for distortion production. It is a flow chart which shows fusion processing for distortion production. It is an explanatory view for explaining the situation of distortion production. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a base object and a partial object, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a base texture, (c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each partial texture. It is a flow chart which shows calculation processing for blink production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state of blink production.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in a forward direction. .. The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown), a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame, and a back pack unit (not shown) arranged behind the inner frame.

The inner frame of the gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions being the support side. A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame, and is rotatable forward with one of the left and right side portions being the support side. A back pack unit is rotatably supported on the inner frame, and is rotatable rearward with one of the left and right side portions being the support side.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) at its rotating front end, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. In addition, it has a function of locking the front door frame 14 against the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

A game board 20 is mounted on the inner frame. The game board 20 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. A general winning opening 21, a variable winning device 22, an upper operating opening 23, a lower operating opening 24, a through gate 25, a variable display unit 26, a main display portion 33, and a accessory display portion 34 are provided in each opening. ing.

When a ball enters the general winning opening 21, the variable winning device 22, the upper working opening 23, and the lower working opening 24, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the back side of the game board 20, A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection result. In addition, an outlet 27 is provided at the bottom of the game board 20, and game balls that have not entered various winning openings are discharged from the game area through the outlet 27. Further, on the game board 20, a large number of nails 28 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a wind turbine are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the aspect of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharging from the game area after passing through the opening. The mode which is not performed is also included. However, in the following description, in order to be clearly distinguished from the game ball entering the outlet 27, the game ball entering the variable winning device 22, the upper operating port 23, the lower operating port 24 or the through gate 25. Is also referred to as a prize.

The upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24 are unitized as a working port device and installed on the game board 20. Both the upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24 are open upward. Further, the two working ports 23, 24 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper working port 23 faces upward. The lower working port 24 is provided with an electric accessory 24a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) of the electric accessory 24a, the game ball cannot enter the lower working opening 24, and the electric working object 24a is in the open state (supported or guided state) so that the lower working opening is reached. It is possible to win 24 prizes.

The variable winning device 22 is provided with a big winning opening 22a that leads to the back side of the game board 20, and an opening/closing door 22b that opens and closes the big winning opening 22a. The opening/closing door 22b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won or is difficult to win, and when the shift to the open/close execution mode is won in the internal lottery, it is switched to a predetermined open state in which the game balls are easily won. It is like this. Here, the open/close execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when the jackpot is won. The opening/closing execution mode will be described later in detail. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 22, the variable winning device 22 is repeatedly opened with a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. There is a mode.

The main display portion 33 and the accessory display portion 34 are provided on the lower side of the game area. On the main display portion 33, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the upper operating opening 23 or the lower operating opening 24 as a trigger, and as a result of the stop of the variable display, the winning of the upper operating opening 23 or the lower operating opening 24 is achieved. The result of the internal lottery performed based on this is clearly displayed. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the winning of the upper working opening 23 and the winning of the lower working opening 24 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and the winning is performed based on the winning of the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24. The result of the extracted internal lottery is clearly shown on the main display section 33 which is a common display area. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the upper operating opening 23 or the lower operating opening 24 is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening/closing execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the main display unit 33. After it is displayed and the variable display is stopped, the mode is changed to the open/close execution mode.

The main display unit 33 is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be configured by another type of display device such as a CRT or a dot matrix. In addition, as the pattern variably displayed on the main display unit 33, a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or a plurality of types are used. A configuration in which the colors of the seeds are switched and displayed can be considered.

On the accessory display unit 34, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the through-gate 25 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through-gate 25 is displayed as the stop result of the variable display. It is specified by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning in the through gate 25 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric role open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 34 and the variable display is displayed. After the power supply is stopped, the state changes to the electric power release state. In the electric role open state, the electric accessory 24a provided in the lower operation port 24 is opened in a predetermined manner.

The variable display unit 26 is provided with a symbol display device 31 that variably displays a symbol, which is a type of symbol. Further, the variable display unit 26 is provided with a center frame 32 so as to surround the symbol display device 31. An upper portion of the center frame 32 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game sphere is prevented from falling in front of the display surface of the symbol display device 31, and there is no inconvenience that the visibility of the display surface is lowered due to the fall of the game sphere. ..

The symbol display device 31 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 31 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

In the symbol display device 31, variable display of symbols is started based on winning in the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24. That is, when the variable display is performed on the main display unit 33, the variable display is performed on the symbol display device 31 accordingly. Then, for example, in the game times when the game result is a big hit result, the symbols of a predetermined combination are stopped and displayed on the activated line set in advance in the symbol display device 31.

The display contents of the symbol display device 31 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. 2 is a diagram showing individually the symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 31, and FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display surface G of the symbol display device 31.

As shown in FIGS. 2(a) to 2(j), a design, which is a kind of design, is composed of nine types of main designs to which the numbers "1" to "9" are respectively attached, and a shell-shaped design. It is composed of sub-patterns. More specifically, the numbers of "1" to "9" are respectively added to nine types of character designs such as octopus to constitute the main design.

As shown in FIG. 3A, on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31, as a plurality of display areas, three symbol rows SA1, SA2, and SA3 in the upper, middle, and lower rows are set. Each symbol row SA1 to SA3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol array SA1, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row SA3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending order of the numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row SA1 and the lower symbol row SA3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row SA2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". The main symbols of "4" are additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of the main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row SA2, 10 main symbols are arranged and constituted by 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface G, the symbols in these symbol columns SA1 to SA3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 3B, on the display surface G, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3×3 are stopped and displayed. It is like this. Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right downward line L4, and a right upward line L5 are set on the display surface G. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row SA1, the lower symbol row SA3, and the middle symbol row SA2, and all symbol rows SA1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same numeral on any of the activated lines is formed. When the variable display of SA3 is finished, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of a normal jackpot result or a 15R certainty variation jackpot result described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is equivalent to the "specific symbol", and if the 15R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbol The combination is stopped and displayed. Further, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) are equivalent to "non-specific symbols", and when a normal jackpot result occurs, the same non-specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed. It

Further, in the case of an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result described later, the variable display of all the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 ends in a state where a predetermined symbol combination different from the same symbol combination is formed, and thereafter, An explicit video is displayed.

The manner of variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary, and the number of symbol columns, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the picture variably displayed on the picture display device 31 is not limited to the above-mentioned picture, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the picture.

Also, based on the winning of any one of the operation ports 23, 24, the variable display is started on the main display section 33 and the symbol display device 31, and a predetermined stop result is displayed until the variable display is stopped. It is equivalent to one game.

In the upper left portion on the front surface side of the center frame 32, a first display light emitting portion 35 corresponding to the main display portion 33 and the symbol display device 31 is provided. The maximum number of game balls that have won in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the first reserved light emitting unit 35.

In the upper right portion of the center frame 32, a second holding light emitting portion 36 corresponding to the accessory display portion 34 is provided. The number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 25 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reservations is displayed by turning on the second reserved light emitting unit 36. The functions of the hold light emitting units 35 and 36 may be performed by the display in a partial area of the symbol display device 31.

A rail portion 37 is attached to the game board 20, the guide rail is configured by the rail portion 37, and the guide rail is launched from a game ball launching mechanism (not shown) mounted below the game board 20 in the inner frame. The game ball is designed to be guided to the upper part of the game area. The game ball launching mechanism launches a game ball by operating the launch handle 41 provided on the front door frame 14.

A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 42 that allows the substantially entire game area to be viewed from the front. The window 42 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel (not shown) is fitted therein. The window panel is made of glass to be colorless and transparent, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be made of synthetic resin to be colorless and transparent.

A light emitting means is provided around the window 42. A display light emitting section 44 is provided above the window section 42 as a part of the light emitting means. Further, speaker units 45 are provided on the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 44 to output a sound effect or the like according to the game state.

Below the window portion 42 of the front door frame 14, an upper bulge portion 46 and a lower bulge portion 47 that bulge toward the front side are arranged in parallel vertically. An upper plate 46a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 46, and a lower plate 47a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging part 47. The upper plate 46a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls dispensed from a dispenser described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower plate 47a has a function of storing game balls that have become redundant in the upper plate 46a. The game balls paid out from the payout device mounted on the back pack unit are discharged to the upper plate 46a and the lower plate 47a.

In the area of the upper bulging portion 46 that faces the front of the pachinko machine 10, a performance operation device 48 including an operation portion that is manually operated by the player is provided. The operation unit of the effect operation device 48 is manually operated by the player so that the effect content on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31 or the like becomes a predetermined effect content.

A main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, as described above, the back pack unit is provided on the back surface of the inner frame, and the back pack unit includes a payout mechanism section including a payout device, a payout control device, a power supply and a firing control device. Is installed. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described below.

<Electrical structure of the pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the basic electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Main controller 50>
The main controller 50 includes a main control board 51 that controls the main game. In the main controller 50, a trace means for leaving a trace of the opening is provided or a trace structure for leaving a trace of the opening is provided to the substrate box that accommodates the main control substrate 51 and the like. You can Examples of the trace means include a structure of a joint portion (a caulking portion) that requires inseparable joining of a plurality of case bodies that form a substrate box and requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer that is peeled off to attach an adhesive layer. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace that it has been peeled off by being left behind is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. In addition, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to a boundary between a plurality of case bodies forming the substrate box can be considered.

An MPU 52 is mounted on the main control board 51. The MPU 52 includes a ROM 53 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 52 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 53 is executed. A RAM 54, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

As the ROM 53, a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that can be randomly accessed when reading the control program or the fixed value data and does not require external power supply for storage is used. In addition, the configuration in which the control/calculation unit, the ROM 53, and the RAM 54 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions may be included as separate chips. It may be configured to be mounted.

The MPU 52 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power supply and firing control device 57 is connected to the input side of the MPU 52. The power supply and launch control device 57 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the operating power necessary for each is generated for the main control board 51, and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the operating power is supplied not only to the main control board 51, but also to other devices such as a payout control device 55 and a display control device 130 described later.

A power failure monitoring board may be provided on the power path between the MPU 52 and the power supply/launch control device 57. In this case, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed, a power failure signal is transmitted to the MPU 52, so that the MPU 52 executes the processing for a power failure. It becomes possible to do.

Various sensors (not shown) are connected to the input side of the MPU 52. As a part of the various sensors, a detection sensor provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the winning portion corresponding to the winning portion, such as the general winning opening 21, the variable winning device 22, the upper working opening 23, the lower working opening 24 and the through gate 25. This is included, and the MPU 52 makes a prize determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry portion. In addition, the MPU 52 executes the jackpot occurrence lottery and the jackpot result type lottery based on the winning of the upper operation mouth 23 and the lower operation mouth 24, and also executes the reach occurrence lottery for each game time and the determination lottery of the display continuation period.

Here, a configuration for performing various lottery in the MPU 52 will be described.

The MPU 52 uses various counter information during the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the main display unit 33, symbol display setting of the symbol display device 31, display setting of the accessory display unit 34, and the like. , Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, jackpot random number counter C1 used for jackpot occurrence lottery, jackpot type counter C2 used when determining jackpot type such as probability variation jackpot result or normal jackpot result, and a symbol Reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery when the display device 31 fluctuates and deviates, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of the jackpot random number counter C1, and fluctuations in the main display portion 33 and the symbol display device 31. The fluctuation type counter CS that determines the display time is used. Further, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 24a of the lower operation port 24 is in the power open state is used.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 54a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 54. Of these, in the lottery counter buffer 54a, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is obtained information storage when a winning is generated in the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b as a means.

The reserve ball storage area 54b includes a reserve area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and according to the winning history of the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24. Numerical value information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 54a are stored in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

In this case, in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the winnings to the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24 occur successively a plurality of times, the first holding area RE1→the second holding area RE1. Numerical information is stored in time series in the order of RE2→third holding area RE3→fourth holding area RE4. Since the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 are provided in this way, the winning history of the game balls to the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24 can be held and stored up to a maximum of four. Further, the holding area RE is provided with a holding number storage area NA, and in order to specify the holding number storage area NA, the number of the winning history stored in the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24 is held and stored. Information is stored.

Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, and may be another number such as two, three, or five or more, or may be a single number.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the main display portion 33, and at the start of one game time. Based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE, the judgment of win/fail is made.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 599, for example, and then returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The big hit random number counter C1 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24.

The value of the random number that is a big hit is stored as a win/loss table in a win/loss table storage area as a win/loss information group storage unit in the ROM 53. As the win/loss table, a win/loss table for the low probability mode and a win/loss table for the high probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode are set as the lottery modes in the win/loss lottery means.

In the gaming state in which the win/loss table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that is a big hit is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the high probability mode win/loss table is referred to in the above-mentioned lottery, the number of random numbers to be a big win is 20. If the winning probability in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 29, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plural jackpot results are (1) a mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 22 in the opening/closing execution mode, (2) a lottery mode in the winning/losing lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode, and (3) a bottom after the opening/closing execution mode. A plurality of jackpot results are set by differentiating three conditions of the support mode in the electric accessory 24a of the operation port 24.

As an aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 22 in the opening/closing execution mode, the high frequency is set so that the frequency of winning the variable winning device 22 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the special winning opening 22a is opened and closed 15 times (high-frequency use number) from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is 30 seconds (high-frequency time). ) Has elapsed or until the number of winnings to the special winning opening 22a reaches 10 (high frequency number). On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the special winning opening 22a is opened and closed twice (the number of times of low frequency use) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is 0.2 sec (low frequency time). Is continued or until the number of winnings to the special winning opening 22a becomes 6 (the number of low-frequency winnings).

In this pachinko machine 10, when the firing handle 41 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 58 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area in 0.6 sec. .. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one big winning opening 22a is 0.2 sec as described above. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the special winning opening 22a once is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

The number of times the special winning opening 22a is opened/closed in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time limit for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are different in the high-frequency winning mode from the low-frequency winning mode. The value is not limited to the above value as long as the frequency of winning the variable winning device 22 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is high. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of opening and closing times than the low-frequency winning mode, and if the opening limit time for one opening is long or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. Good.

However, in order to clarify the difference in privilege between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the winning of the variable winning device 22 does not substantially occur. It is good to have a configuration. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the product of the game cycle of the game ball and the opening limit number is set to be shorter than the opening time limit for one opening, while in the low frequency winning mode, the one time opening is performed. The product of the game cycle of the game ball and the release limit number may be set to be longer than the release limit time. Also, even if the interval between shooting game balls and the opening time of one big winning opening 22a is not the above, in the low frequency winning mode, by setting the latter to be shorter than the former, It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which substantially no prize is won in the variable winning device 22.

As a support mode of the lower working port 24 in the electric accessory 24a, when compared in a situation where the game balls are continuously emitted in a similar manner to the game area, the electric working object 24a in the lower working port 24 is Low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) so that the frequency of the open state per unit time is relatively high or low. And are set.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the electric role open state wins in the electric role open lottery using the electric role open counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). However, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 24a is in the open state when the electric role is released is set to be larger than in the low frequency support mode, and one more opening is performed. The time is set long. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric power open state is won, and the electric accessory 24a is opened a plurality of times, it is closed from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, the high-frequency support mode is shorter than the low-frequency support mode in that the minimum secured time required for the next electric accessory release lottery after one electric accessory release lottery is performed is shorter. Is set to be selected.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will be awarded to the lower working opening 24 than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the upper working opening 23 is higher than in the lower working opening 24, but in the high frequency support mode, the winning in the lower working opening 24 is higher than that in the upper working opening 23. The probability of winning a prize increases. Then, when a prize is given to the lower working opening 24, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls that he holds. be able to.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high frequency support mode being in the electric role open state per unit time is higher than that of the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-mentioned one. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability of winning the electric role open state in is increased. In addition, a securing time that is secured when the next electric accessory release lottery is performed after one electric accessory release lottery is performed (for example, in the accessory display unit 34 based on the winning of the through gate 25). In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter securing time is easier to select or the average securing time is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. It may have been done. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is increased, and the securing time that is secured when the next electric accessory release lottery is performed after one electric accessory release lottery is performed (that is, , Shortening one time variable display time on the accessory display 34), shortening the average time of the securing time and increasing the winning probability, any one condition or a condition of any combination is applied. Therefore, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area as distribution information group storage means in the ROM 53. Then, the normal jackpot result, the explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result, and the 15R certainty variation jackpot result are set as the distribution destinations.

The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/winning lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. However, the high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result of shifting the game state to the normal jackpot state (low probability corresponding special game state).

The explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/winning lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. .. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the winning/winning lottery is a big hit state winning and the big hit state is brought about. In other words, the explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result is a jackpot result of shifting the gaming state to the explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot state (explicit high probability corresponding gaming state).

The 15R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/winning lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the winning/winning lottery is a big hit state winning and the big hit state is brought about. In other words, the 15R certainty variation jackpot result is a jackpot result of shifting the gaming state to the 15R certainty variation jackpot state (high probability corresponding special gaming state).

The normal game state in relation to each of the above-mentioned game states means a state in which the winning/winning lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” correspond to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 14” correspond to the explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result. "15-29" corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

As described above, since the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is set as the probability variation jackpot result, the manner of the probability variation jackpot result is diversified. That is, when comparing two types of probability variation jackpot results, the degree of advantage for the player is that the 15R probability variation jackpot result is the highest in the high-frequency winning mode in the opening/closing execution mode and the high frequency support mode in the support mode. In the support mode, which is the low-frequency winning mode, the high-frequency support mode is the high-frequency support mode. As a result, the monotony of the game can be suppressed, and the attention of the game can be increased.

As a kind of probability variation jackpot result, the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/loss lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode is maintained to the previous mode. The non-explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result (the result of the non-explicit high probability corresponding game result or the latent probability variation state) may be included. In this case, the probability variation jackpot result is further diversified.

Furthermore, as a kind of the miss result in the win/win lottery, a special miss result which does not occur in the win/win lottery mode and the support mode after the transition to the opening/closing execution mode of the low frequency winning mode may be included. .. In the configuration in which both the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the special outlying result are set as described above, the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the low frequency winning mode, and the support mode is maintained to the previous mode. It is common to be done, but because the transition mode of the win/loss lottery mode is different, for example, when one of the implicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result or special outlier result occurs in the normal gaming state, It is possible to make the player predict which result actually corresponds to.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured such that the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 31. The expected effect is provided with a symbol display device 31 capable of performing variable display of symbols, and in the game times in which the open/close execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, the stop display result after the variable display is the special display result. In the above, in the stage before the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 31 is started and before the stop display result is derived and displayed, the display state for making the player think that the variable display state is likely to be the special display result is displayed. Say.

Two types of expected display are set: the reach display and a notice display for expecting the reach display or the special display result in a stage before the reach display occurs.

In the reach display, the symbols are stopped and displayed for a part of the plurality of symbol columns displayed on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31, so that a combination of the jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high frequency winning mode. A combination of reach symbols that may be satisfied is displayed, and in that state, a display state in which the symbols are variably displayed in the remaining symbol columns is included. In addition, while displaying the combination of reach symbols as described above, while performing variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol columns, and displaying the predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image, the reach effect is performed. , A combination of reach patterns is reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface to provide a reach effect.

Regarding the reach display related to the variable display of the symbols, specifically, as a pre-stage for ending the variable display of the symbols, on the preset effective line in the display surface of the symbol display device 31, the occurrence of the high frequency winning mode is generated. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the reach symbol combination in which the corresponding jackpot symbol combination may be established, and the variable display of the symbol is displayed by the final stop symbol row in the situation where the reach line is formed. Is to do.

Explaining the display contents of FIG. 3 concretely, first, the variable display of symbols is ended in the upper symbol row SA1, and the variable display of symbols is further ended in the lower symbol row SA3. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols having the same numbers on the lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the variable display of the symbols is displayed in the middle symbol row SA2. Reach display will be given. Then, when the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and in the middle symbol row SA2. The variable display of symbols is ended.

In the notice display, in a situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns SA1 to SA3 after the variable display of the symbols is started on the display surface of the symbol display device 31, or a part of the symbol columns. In a situation in which the symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol columns, a mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol columns SA1 to SA3 is included. Further, a background image having a predetermined mode different from the previous modes and a pattern on the symbol arrays SA1 to SA3 having a predetermined mode different from the previous modes are also included. Such advance notice display can occur in both game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the reach display is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with a probability.

The reach display is executed irrespective of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game time of shifting to the open/close execution mode which is the high frequency winning mode, and the reach random number in the game time of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode of the low frequency winning mode. It is not executed regardless of the value of the counter C3. Further, in the game time that does not shift to the open/close execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display by referring to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 53. Is executed if On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to display the advance notice is made not by the main controller 50 but by the sound emission controller 60.

The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS is used when the MPU 52 determines the fluctuation display time on the main display portion 33 and the fluctuation display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 31. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired when the fluctuation display is started on the main display portion 33 and the fluctuation pattern is determined by the symbol display device 31 at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol. When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area of the ROM 53 is referred to.

The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured so that, for example, it is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and is stored in the electric accessory holding area 54c at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 25. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed on whether or not the electric accessory 24a is controlled to the open state by the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4.

On the output side of the MPU 52, a payout control device 55 is connected, and a power supply and firing control device 57 is connected. To the payout control device 55, for example, a prize ball command is transmitted based on the result of the prize determination to the prize-corresponding ball portion. The payout control device 55 causes the payout device 56 to perform payout control of prize balls and loan balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 50. A firing permission command is transmitted to the power supply and firing control device 57 based on the operation of the firing handle 41. The power supply and launch control device 57 drives the game ball launching mechanism 58 to launch the game ball toward the game area based on the launch permission command received from the main control device 50.

Further, the main display unit 33 and the accessory display unit 34 are connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and the display control of the main display unit 33 and the accessory display unit 34 is directly performed by the MPU 52. That is, at each game time, the display control of the main display unit 33 is executed in the MPU 52. Further, when the lottery result indicating whether or not the electric accessory 24a is to be opened is specified, the display control of the accessory display unit 34 is executed in the MPU 52.

Further, the output side of the MPU 52 is connected to a variable winning a prize driving unit that opens and closes the opening/closing door 22b of the variable winning device 22, and an electric auditors product driving unit that opens and closes the electric auditors product 24a of the lower working port 24. .. That is, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 52 executes the drive control of the variable winning drive unit so that the special winning opening 22a is opened and closed. When the electric accessory 24a is in the open state, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the electric accessory driving unit so that the electric accessory 24a is opened and closed.

Further, an audio emission control device 60 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and various production commands are transmitted to the audio emission control device 60.

<Processing executed by MPU 52 of main controller 50>
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 52 will be described.

The MPU 52 repeatedly executes a predetermined game progression process after the power is turned on. In the pachinko machine 10, as the game progression process, a normal process that is repeatedly executed in a first cycle and a second cycle that is shorter than the first cycle are activated, and the normal process is interrupted and executed. Timer interrupt processing is set.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. It should be noted that this processing is activated by the MPU 52 periodically (for example, in a cycle of 2 msec).

First, in step S101, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, the states of the various winning detection sensors are read, the states of these various winning detection sensors are determined, and the processing of saving the winning detection information is executed. When the winning detection sensor corresponding to the generation of the winning balls detects the winning of the game balls, it sets a winning ball command for instructing the payout controller 55 to pay out the winning balls.

In a succeeding step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

In a succeeding step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when they reach their maximum values, they are cleared to 0.

In a succeeding step S104, a through winning process associated with winning of the through gate 25 is executed. In the through winning process, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 described above is changed to the electric role, provided that the number of the accessory holding storages stored in the electric role holding area 54c is less than 4. It is stored in the holding area 54c.

After that, in step S105, the winning process for the working openings associated with the winning of the working openings 23, 24 is executed. In the winning process for the working opening, when a winning is generated in the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24, the number of starting pending memories stored in the pending ball storage area 54b is the upper limit number (for example, " 4”), the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 is stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 54b. .. In this case, it is stored in the first holding area among the empty holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE, that is, in the holding area corresponding to the current starting holding storage number. After the processing of step S105 is executed, the timer interrupt processing ends.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing normal processing. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process started when the power is turned on is executed. As an outline, the processing of steps S201 to S209 is executed as a processing of a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of steps S210 and S211 is executed in the remaining time.

In step S201, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence/absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 55. If a predetermined effect command is set, it is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60.

In a succeeding step S202, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

In a succeeding step S203, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In this game time control processing, jackpot determination, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 31, display control of the main display unit 33, and the like are performed.

Then, in step S204, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. In the game state transition processing, when the game times corresponding to the jackpot winning have been completed, the transition processing to the opening/closing execution mode is executed, and the opening/closing processing of the variable winning device 22 is started. It should be noted that various commands for the open/close execution mode are transmitted to the sound emission control device 60 when the open/close execution mode is started, during the open/close execution mode, and when the open/close execution mode is ended. In addition, when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the shift of the win/loss lottery mode or the shift of the support mode is executed in correspondence with the jackpot type related to the game times that triggered the start of the mode.

In a succeeding step S205, a demo display process is executed. In the demo display process, a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 0.1 sec) for demonstrating without a new game time being started after the game time is ended in a situation where the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress The determination process of whether or not it is performed is executed. In addition, since the power supply to the MPU 52 is started or the pachinko machine 10 is reset, a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 seconds) for starting the demo is elapsed without the game time being newly started. The determination process of whether or not it is performed is executed. When it is determined that the time has elapsed, a command for demonstration display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60.

The demo display means a start waiting effect displayed on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31 when a predetermined start waiting period has elapsed. In the demo image, an image in which the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol arrays SA1 to SA3 are performing a predetermined operation is displayed, but the image is not limited to this, and, for example, the symbol performs a predetermined operation. After the image is displayed, or instead of it, a maker name, a model name, or a moving image of a predetermined character may be displayed. Further, in the configuration in which the demo display is performed by the animation of the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol columns SA1 to SA3, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the last game may be used as the symbol. In this case, the demo display can be diversified.

In a succeeding step S206, an electric role support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 24a provided in the lower operation port 24 is executed. In the electric power support process, the information stored in the electric power holding area 54c of the RAM 54 is used to determine whether to open the electric accessory 24a, the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 24a, and the accessory use. The display of the display unit 34 is controlled.

Then, in step S207, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 58 is excited once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply and the launch control device 57. .. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

In a succeeding step S208, it is determined whether or not the power interruption flag is stored in the RAM 54. The power failure flag is a flag that is stored when the occurrence of power failure is confirmed, and is erased in the next main process.

If the power interruption flag is not stored, it means that the last process of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed has been completed, so whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process is reached in step S209, that is, It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the normal processing. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process.

That is, in step S210, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Further, in step S211, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach their maximum values, they are cleared to 0.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S207 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process changes rather than being constant. Therefore, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be updated at random by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, and in the same manner. The fluctuation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S208 that the power failure flag is stored, it means that power shutoff has occurred, and therefore, the processing at the time of power failure after step S212 is executed. That is, in step S212, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited, after that, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in step S213, and the access to the RAM 54 is prohibited in step S214. Continue infinite loop until can no longer be executed.

Next, the game number control process of step S203 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the game time control process, first in step S301, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in effect. If it is in the open/close execution mode, the present game number control processing is ended without executing the processing of step S302 and thereafter. That is, in the open/close execution mode, the game game is not started regardless of whether or not a prize has been paid to the operating ports 23, 24.

When it is not in the open/close execution mode, it is determined in step S302 whether or not the main display unit 33 is in the variable display. If the main display portion 33 is not in the variable display, the process proceeds to the game times start process of steps S303 to S305.

In the game game starting process, first in step S303, it is determined whether or not the number N of balls to be reserved for starting is "0". The case where the number N of starting reserved balls is "0" means that the reserved information is not stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b. Therefore, this game time control processing is ended as it is.

If the number N of starting reserved balls is not "0", a data setting process for setting the data stored in the reserved area RE of the reserved ball storage area 54b for variable display is executed in step S304. Specifically, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE is shifted to the execution area AE. After that, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4 are sequentially shifted to the lower area side. After that, the variation start process is executed in step S305, and then the present game number control process is ended.

The fluctuation start process of step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S401, a win/loss determination process for determining whether or not the pending information corresponding to the current variation start process corresponds to the jackpot win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won by referring to the numerical information relating to the jackpot random number counter C1 among the holding information shifted to the execution area AE and the winning/losing table corresponding to the current winning/winning lottery mode. To do.

In a succeeding step S402, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won. If the jackpot is won, type determination processing is executed in step S403. In the type determination process, the jackpot type is specified by referring to the numerical information relating to the jackpot type counter C2 of the pending information shifted to the execution area AE and the distribution table.

In a succeeding step S404, a stop result setting process corresponding to the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, in the game time related to the current fluctuation start, the information of the mode of the picture finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 33 is specified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 53, The specified information is stored in the RAM 54. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the type of the mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the main display unit 33 is set to be different for each type of the jackpot result, and in step S404, the type is specified in step S403. The RAM 54 stores information on the form of the pattern according to the type of the jackpot result.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S402 that the jackpot has not been won, in step S405, a stop result setting process for out-of-coupling is executed. Specifically, the information of the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 33 in the game time related to the start of fluctuation is specified from the stop result table for the time of dislocation stored in the ROM 53 in advance, The specified information is stored in the RAM 54. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

After the process of step S404 or step S405 is executed, the variable display time setting process is executed in step S406.

In this process, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 54a of the RAM 54 is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated on the symbol display device 31 at the current game time. Specifically, when the number of game times related to the variation start this time is a jackpot result, it is determined that the reach display is generated. Further, even when the result is not the big hit result, it is determined that the reach display is generated when the numerical value information regarding the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is the numerical value information corresponding to the occurrence of the reach.

When it is determined that the reach display is generated, the reach display variable display time table stored in the ROM 53 is referred to, the change display time information corresponding to the value of the present change type counter CS is acquired, and the change is obtained. The display time information is set in the variable display time counter provided in the RAM 54. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the variable display time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach display table for reach non-occurrence stored in the ROM 53. Then, the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter. Incidentally, the fluctuation display time that can be acquired by referring to the reach display variable display time table is different from the fluctuation display time that can be acquired by referring to the reach generation fluctuation display time table.

The variable display time information when the reach is not generated is set such that the variable display time becomes shorter as the number of starting pending balls increases. In addition, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, compared with the case where the support frequency is the low-frequency support mode, the reach non-reach time is selected so that a shorter variable display time is selected, compared with the case where the number of hold information is the same. The variable display time table for generation is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the variable display time does not vary depending on the number of balls to be held for start-up and the support mode may be adopted, and the above relationship may be reversed. Further, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when the reach occurs. Further, the variable display time table may be set individually for each of the various jackpot results, the case of the out-reach, and the case of the non-reach occurrence.

After the variable display time setting process is executed in step S406, the variation command and the type command are set in step S407. The variation command includes information on the variation display time. As described above, the fluctuation display time acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence variable display time table is different from the fluctuation display time acquired by referring to the reach occurrence variable display time table. Even if the use command does not include the information about the presence or absence of the reach occurrence, the voice emission control device 60 which is the sub-side control device can identify the presence or absence of the reach occurrence from the information of the variable display time. In this respect, it can be said that the variation command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. It should be noted that the variation command may include information directly indicating whether or not the reach has occurred.

Further, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes, as the game result information, any one of the normal jackpot result information, the explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result information, the 15R certainty variation jackpot result information, and the outlier result information.

The variation command and the type command set in step S407 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 60 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 7). After executing the process of step S407, the variable display of the pattern is started on the main display unit 33 in step S408. Then, this fluctuation start process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the game number control process (FIG. 8 ), when the main display section 33 is in the variable display, the processes of steps S306 to S309 are executed. In the process, first, in step S306, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game time has elapsed.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S307. In the variable display process, the display mode on the main display unit 33 is changed. Then, this game time control processing is ended.

If the variation display time has elapsed, variation end processing is executed in step S308. In the fluctuation ending process, the information stored in the RAM 54 in the process of step S404 or step S405 is specified, and the main display unit 33 is displayed so that the pattern mode corresponding to the information is displayed on the main display unit 33. Display control.

In a succeeding step S309, a fluctuation end command is set. The fluctuation end command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 7). The sound emission control device 60 ends the effect in the game time based on the received variation end command. Further, a command corresponding thereto is transmitted from the voice emission control device 60 to the display control device 70, and the display control device 70 finalizes and displays the final stop symbol combination in the game time (final stop display). Then, this game time control processing is ended.

<Another Mode of Processing Configuration in MPU 52 of Main Controller 50>
The processing configuration executed by the MPU 52 is not limited to the above, and may be the following processing configuration. 10 and 11 are flowcharts for explaining another mode of the processing in the MPU 52, FIG. 10 shows the main processing executed when the supply of operating power is started, and FIG. 11 shows the main processing. A timer interrupt process that is periodically interrupted and activated is shown.

As shown in FIG. 10, in the main process, first, in step S501, a startup process associated with power-on is executed. In the following step S502, access to the RAM 54 is permitted. Then, in step S503, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch provided in the power supply and firing control device 57 is turned on, and in subsequent step S504, it is determined whether or not the power interruption flag is stored in the RAM 54. In step S505, the RAM determination value is calculated, and in the subsequent step S506, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off, that is, the validity of the stored and held data.

If the RAM erase switch is not turned on, and the power interruption flag is stored and the RAM determination value is normal, the power interruption flag is erased from the RAM 54 in step S507 and the RAM is determined in step S508. Delete the judgment value. After that, the interrupt permission is set in step S509, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S510, and the fluctuation type counter CS is updated in step S511. Then, after executing the processes of steps S509 to S511, the process returns to step S509, and the processes of steps S509 to S511 are repeated.

Note that the configuration may be such that the interrupt prohibition setting is performed immediately after the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S509. In this case, the timer interrupt processing described later may be configured to wait for execution until the next interrupt enable setting is made when the start timing comes in a situation where the interrupt disable setting is made. ..

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to steps S512 to S513. Also, when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the abnormality of the data stored and held is confirmed by the RAM determination value, the process similarly proceeds to steps S512 to S513.

In step S512, the used area of the RAM 54 is cleared to "0", and in step S513, the RAM 54 is initialized. After that, the process proceeds to steps S509 to S511.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process in the another mode.

In the timer interrupt process, in steps S601 to S605, the same processes as steps S101 to S105 are executed.

After that, in step S606, the variation type counter CS is updated, in step S607 game time control processing is executed, in step S608 game state transition processing is executed, and in step S609 demo display processing. Then, in step S610, electric power combination support processing is executed, in step S611 a game ball launch control processing is executed, and in step S612 external output processing is executed. After that, this timer interrupt processing ends. The detailed content of each of these processes is the same as the content described with reference to FIGS.

<Voice emission control device 60>
Next, the sound emission control device 60 will be described.

The sound emission control device 60, as shown in FIG. 4, includes a sound emission control board 61 on which an MPU 62 is mounted. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs executed by the MPU 62 and fixed value data are stored, and a memory for temporarily storing various data in executing the control programs stored in the ROM 63. A RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are built in.

As the ROM 63, a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that can be randomly accessed when reading a control program or fixed value data and that does not require external power supply for storage is used. In addition, the configuration in which the control/calculation unit, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip. It may be configured to be mounted.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The operation device 48 for production and the main control device 50 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62, and the various light emitting parts 35, 36, 44, the speaker part 45 and the display control device 130 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. There is.

The MPU 62 receives the variation command transmitted from the main control device 50, recognizes that it is necessary to start the game game effect, and executes the game game effect start process. Further, by receiving the end command transmitted from the main control device 50, it recognizes that it is necessary to end the game use effect, and executes the game use effect ending process. Further, by receiving various commands for the jackpot effect transmitted from the main control device 50, it recognizes that the jackpot effect needs to be started or progressed, and the jackpot effect processing is executed. Further, by receiving the demo display command transmitted from the main control device 50, it recognizes that it is necessary to start the demo display, and executes the demo display process.

Note that receiving a command from the main control device 50 in the MPU 62 is not limited to a configuration in which the command is directly received from the main control device 50, and includes a configuration in which a command relayed to the relay board is received.

In the game time production start process, based on both the variation command and the type command, the variation display time grasping process for grasping the variation display time of the corresponding game time and the reach display grasping process for grasping the presence or absence of the reach display And a jackpot result occurrence grasping process for grasping the presence or absence of the jackpot result and a jackpot type grasping process for grasping the jackpot type when the jackpot result occurs. Also, based on the grasping result in the reach display grasping process, the jackpot result occurrence grasping process, and the jackpot type grasping process, the symbol for determining the type of the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31 in this game time. Execute the type recognition process. Then, based on the result of each of the grasping process, a variation pattern command including information on the variation display time and information on the type of display effect, and a symbol designating command including information on the type of symbol to be finally stopped and displayed. To 130.

Further, in the game reproduction effect starting process, in addition to the above-described grasping processes, a notice display lottery process for performing a notice display is executed. In this case, in the lottery process, the type of lottery for the notice display is also executed. Then, when the advance notice display has been won, the advance notice command including the information of the type of the advance notice display is transmitted to the display control device 130.

Further, in the game turn effect start process, the display light emitting table for game turn and the voice table for game turn are read from the ROM 63 based on the processing result of each of the above processes. The display light emission table for game times defines the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 44 in the course of progress of the corresponding game time. In addition, the voice table for game times defines the output mode from the speaker unit 45 in the progress process of the corresponding game times.

In the game game effect ending process, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 and the voice output control of the speaker unit 45 in the current game time are ended. Further, in the game turning effect ending process, an end command including information for ending the game turning effect is transmitted to the display control device 130.

In the jackpot performance process, based on the received various commands for jackpot performance, it grasps the production mode at the time of opening, each round, between each round, and ending, and the jackpot performance corresponding to the grasped result. Is transmitted to the display control device 130. Further, based on the grasped result, the display light emission table for the big hit effect and the sound table for the big hit effect are read from the ROM 63, and the light emitting mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output mode from the speaker unit 45 during the big hit effect. Stipulate.

In the demo display process, the presentation mode of the demo display is grasped based on the received demo display command, and the demo display command corresponding to the grasped result is transmitted to the display control device 130. Further, based on the grasped result, the display light emission table for demonstration display and the voice table for demo display are read out from the ROM 63, and the light emission mode of the display light emission unit 44 and the voice output mode from the speaker unit 45 during the demo display. Stipulate.

The processing executed by the MPU 62 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 50 is not limited to the above processing, but includes processing for controlling the light emission of the first holding light emitting unit 35 and the second holding light emitting unit 36. included.

Further, the MPU 62 recognizes that the effect operation device 48 has been operated by receiving an operation signal transmitted from the effect operation device 48 based on the operation unit of the effect operation device 48 being operated. Then, the operation corresponding process is executed. Further, even when the operated state is released, it is recognized by the fall of the operation signal and the operation handling process is executed.

Here, as a part of the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect operation device 48, an effect in which the display mode is changed is executed based on the operation of the effect operation device 48. The display mode is a state in which the type of the standby image displayed until the game time is started and the type of the game time image displayed in the situation where the game time is being executed are set to a predetermined type. The display mode of is set. The detailed contents of the display mode and the processing configuration for switching the display mode based on the operation of the effect operation device 48 will be described in detail later.

<Display control device 130>
The hardware configuration of the display control device 130 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 4, the display control device 130 includes a display control board 136 on which a display CPU 131, a work RAM 132, a memory module 133, a VRAM 134, and a video display processor (VDP) 135 are mounted. .

The display CPU 131 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 130, and reads, interprets, and executes a control program and the like. Specifically, the display CPU 131 is connected to an input port 137 mounted on the display control board 136 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 131 via the input port 137. To be done. Note that the reception of a command from the voice emission control device 60 in the display CPU 131 is not limited to the configuration of directly receiving the command from the voice emission control device 60, and includes the configuration of receiving the command relayed to the relay board. Be done.

The display CPU 131 is connected to the work RAM 132, the memory module 133, and the VRAM 134 via a bus, and based on the command received from the voice light emission control device 60, various data stored in the memory module 133 is stored in the work RAM 132 or the VRAM 134. Send a transfer instruction. Further, the display CPU 131 is connected to the VDP 135 via a bus, and based on a command received from the sound emission control device 60, a drawing instruction for causing the symbol display device 31 to display a three-dimensional image (3D image). To do. The memory module 133, the work RAM 132, the VRAM 134, and the VDP 135 will be described below.

The memory module 133 is a storage unit that stores control data including a control program and fixed value data in advance, and various image data for displaying a three-dimensional image in advance. The memory module 133 has a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require external power supply for storage. Incidentally, although the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is executed well. Further, the memory module 133 is used as a non-writing and read-only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The various image data stored in the memory module 133 includes image data for objects such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 31, image data for texture attached to the object, and one frame worth. Image data for the back surface that constitutes the rearmost image.

Here, the object is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in a world coordinate system, which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space, and is three-dimensional information composed of a plurality of polygons. A polygon is a polygonal plane defined by a plurality of three-dimensional coordinate vertices. In order to apply a surface model, for example, to the image data for an object, vertex coordinate information of each polygon is set with the reference coordinates preset for each object as the origin. That is, in the image data for each object, the relative position (that is, direction and size) of each polygon is three-dimensionally defined in the self-contained local coordinate system.

The texture is an image attached to each polygon of the object, and by attaching the texture to the object, an image corresponding to the object, for example, a display image including a design, a character, etc. is generated. The method of holding the image data for texture is arbitrary, but for example, it includes at least a combination of bitmap format data and a color palette table that is referred to when determining a display color at each pixel of the bitmap image. There is.

The image on the backmost surface constitutes a two-dimensional image (2D image). The method of holding the image data for the back side is arbitrary, but for example, it is stored and held as JPEG format data in a state in which two-dimensional still image data is compressed. Incidentally, when the image data for the back surface is arranged in the world coordinate system, a plate polygon is used.

The work RAM 132 is a storage unit for temporarily storing the control data read from the memory module 133 and transferred, and also temporarily storing a flag and the like. The work RAM 132 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storage and, in detail, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the RAM is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. Note that the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is satisfactorily executed. Further, the work RAM 132 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Based on the data transfer instruction from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133, the control data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132. Then, the display CPU 131 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 132 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

The VRAM 134 is a storage unit for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the symbol display device 31. The VRAM 134 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply to retain the memory, and in detail, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the RAM is not limited to SDRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM, or dual port RAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 2 Gbits, the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is well executed. Further, the VRAM 134 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The VRAM 134 includes a development buffer 141, and image data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the development buffer 141 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133. In this case, the image data is transferred in advance before the execution timing of the process in the VDP 135 using the image data. Further, the VRAM 134 is provided with a frame buffer 142 in which drawing data (generation data) is created by the VDP 135. Further, the VRAM 134 is provided with a Z buffer 143, a screen buffer 144 and a mode buffer 145, the details of which will be described later.

The VDP 135 is an image generation device that draws on the symbol display device 31 by specifically processing the data stored and held in the expansion buffer 141 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 131. It is a kind of drawing circuit that operates the image processing device 31b incorporated to drive and control the liquid crystal display unit 31a in the symbol display device 31. Since the VDP 135 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and the substance thereof should be called a microcomputer chip containing a drawing-specific firmware.

More specifically, the VDP 135 includes a geometry calculation unit 151, a rendering unit 152, a register 153, a display mode control unit 154, and a display circuit 155. Further, these circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and also connected to the I/F 156 for the display CPU 131 and the I/F 157 for the VRAM 134.

The I/F 156 for the display CPU 131 causes the register 153 to store the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 131. The geometry calculation unit 151 arranges the object designated as the arrangement target in the world coordinate system based on the drawing list stored in the register 153. In addition, the geometry calculation unit 151 executes various coordinate conversion processes when and after placing the object in the world coordinate system. Then, finally, the object is clipped in correspondence with the three-dimensional space corresponding to the screen coordinates of the display surface G.

The rendering unit 152 adjusts the light source and pastes the texture on each clipped object based on the drawing list stored in the register 153, and determines the appearance of the object. In addition, the rendering unit 152 projects each object onto a predetermined two-dimensional plane to create two-dimensional data, and also performs various adjustments based on the depth information to render one frame of drawing data, which is two-dimensional data, into a frame buffer. 142. The drawing data for one frame means the data required to display the image at one update timing in the configuration in which the image on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say.

Note that all the control programs for operating the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be provided by the drawing list. A memory in which the control program is stored in advance is incorporated in the VDP 135, and the control program and the drawing list are included. The geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be configured to execute processing depending on the contents of the above. Further, the control program may be read in advance from the memory module 133. Further, the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be configured to execute the process only by the operation of the hardware circuit corresponding to the drawing list without using the program.

Here, the frame buffer 142 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 142a and 142b. Specifically, a first frame area 142a and a second frame area 142b are provided. Each of these frame areas 142a and 142b is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame regions 142a and 142b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 31a (that is, the display surface G) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is displayed. More specifically, the full color system is adopted, and it is possible to set 256 colors for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Correspondingly, 1 byte (8 bits) is assigned to each RGB color in each unit area. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

The storage capacity is not limited to the full-color method. For example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed in each dot, the storage capacity required to store color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

Since the frame buffer 142 is provided with the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b, in the situation where drawing is executed on the symbol display device 31 using drawing data created in one frame area. The drawing data to be used in the future is created for other frame areas. That is, the double buffer method is adopted as the frame buffer 142.

The display circuit 155 generates an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 31a based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 142a or the second frame area 142b, and the image signal is displayed in the display circuit 155. It is output to the symbol display device 31 via the connected output port 138. Specifically, the drawing data is transferred from the output target frame areas 142a and 142b to the display circuit 155. The transferred drawing data is subjected to resolution adjustment by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the pattern display device 31, and converted into gradation data. Then, based on the gradation data, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 31 is generated and output. The display circuit 155 also outputs a synchronizing signal such as a horizontal synchronizing signal or a vertical synchronizing signal.

In addition, the display mode control unit 154 executes a predetermined process based on the drawing list stored in the register 153 when displaying an image corresponding to the display mode. The predetermined process will be described later.

<Basic processing in display CPU 131>
Next, basic processing in the display CPU 131 will be described.

<Main processing>
First, the main process that is started when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 131 is started or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the main processing.

In the main process, first, in step S701, an initial setting process is executed.

In the initial setting process, a scaler initial adjustment process of the display circuit 155 is executed. In the initial adjustment processing, when the image signal is output based on the drawing data created in each of the frame areas 142a and 142b of the VRAM 134, the image signal is output corresponding to the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a. As described above, the resolution initial adjustment command is transmitted to the VDP 135. The initial adjustment value is adjusted at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the adjustment result is set as a resolution initial adjustment command.

By transmitting the resolution initial adjustment command to the VDP 135, numerical information corresponding to the initial adjustment value is stored in the scaler resolution adjustment area in the register 153 of the VDP 135. Thereby, when the image signal is output from the VDP 135 to the symbol display device 31, the image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output in a state adjusted to the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a.

Further, in the initial setting process, an initial adjustment process of the background color is executed. In the initial adjustment process, a ground color initial adjustment command is transmitted to the VDP 135 so that the numerical information set as the initial value in the unit area of each of the frame areas 142a and 142b of the VRAM 134 becomes the initial numerical information. This initial numerical value information is adjusted at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the adjustment result is set as a ground color initial adjustment command.

The VDP 135 stores the initial numerical value information in the area for ground color adjustment in the register 153 of the VDP 135 by transmitting the ground color initial adjustment command. As a result, the ground color is displayed at the dots corresponding to the unit areas for which the initial numerical value information was not updated when the drawing data was created. Although black is set as the initial ground color in the pachinko machine 10, it is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

After executing the initial setting process in step S701, various interrupts are permitted in step S702. This allows the display CPU 131 to execute command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing. Then, in the main process, the process of step S702 is repeated.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interruption process will be described.

The command interruption process is a process that is activated with the highest priority when a strobe signal is received from the sound emission control device 60, whatever the process is being executed at that time. In the command interrupt processing, the command received at the input port 137 is transferred to the command buffer provided in the work RAM 132, and a flag indicating that a command has been newly received is set in the corresponding area. After that, the command interrupt process is terminated, and the process before the activation of the command interrupt process is restored.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The V interrupt process is repeatedly activated in a predetermined cycle, specifically, a 20 msec cycle.

When the VDP 135 outputs the image signal for one frame to the symbol display device 31, it starts outputting the image signal from the dot in the upper left corner portion of the display surface G, and on the horizontal line including the dot at one end. The image signals are sequentially output to the aligned dots, and the image signals are sequentially output to the dots from left to right for each horizontal line. Then, the image signal is finally output to the dots in the lower right corner portion of the display surface G. In this case, the VDP 135 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display CPU 131 at the timing of outputting the image signal for the last dot, and causes the display CPU 131 to recognize that the update of the image for one frame is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec. In this respect, the V interrupt processing can be regarded as being activated in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, if 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was started, the V interrupt process is newly started.

In the V interrupt process, first, in step S801, a command analysis process is executed. Specifically, the contents of the command stored in the command buffer of the work RAM 132 are analyzed. In the following step S802, it is determined based on the analysis result of step S801 whether a new command is received. If a new command has been received, command corresponding processing is executed in step S803.

In the command handling process, the data table for executing the program corresponding to the received command is read from the memory module 133. The data table is defined as the processing required to display an image for one frame at each image update timing when a moving image corresponding to the received command is displayed on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31. It is an information group.

Here, as the commands that the display CPU 131 receives from the sound emission control device 60, there are a fluctuation pattern command, a symbol designating command, and a notice command, as already described. When these commands are received, the data table necessary for executing the game rendition corresponding to each of these commands on the symbol display device 31 is read. Further, as the command to be received, there is an end command, and when the command is received, the data table necessary for finally stopping the currently playing game diversion effect is read. Further, as the command to be received, there are various commands for jackpot performance, and when the command is received, the data table necessary for executing the jackpot performance is read. Further, as the command to be received, there is a command for demo display, and when the command is received, the data table necessary for executing the demo display is read. Further, based on the read data table, other program data necessary for executing the processing is also read.

After executing the command corresponding process in step S803, the pointer updating process is executed in step S804. In the pointer update processing, the pointer information set in the data table is updated so as to advance by one frame. As a result, it becomes possible for the display CPU 131 to grasp the processing required to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of this time.

In the following step S805, task processing is executed. In the task processing, in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of this time, the parameters necessary for giving a drawing instruction to the VDP 135 are calculated. Details of the task processing will be described later.

In a succeeding step S806, a drawing list output process is executed. In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of the current processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 135. In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is the drawing target, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The VDP 135 creates drawing data in the frame areas 142a and 142b of the VRAM 134 according to this drawing list. The processing in the VDP 135 will be described later in detail. Then, this V interrupt process is completed.

<Task processing in display CPU 131>
Here, the task processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the task process, first, in step S901, a control start setting process is executed. In the setting process for control start, a process for setting an individual image for newly starting control (calculation) in the display CPU 131 at the current processing time is executed. The individual image is a two-dimensional image defined by still image data such as image data for the back surface, or a three-dimensional image defined by a combination of image data for an object and image data for a texture. It is an image.

Regarding the setting process for control start, specifically, it is first determined based on the currently set data table whether or not there is an individual image to be the control start target in the current process. If it exists, it searches the work RAM 132 for a free buffer area for performing various calculations in controlling the individual image, and makes a one-to-one correspondence with the individual image grasped as the control start target. To secure a free buffer area. Further, the initialization process is executed for all the secured free buffer areas, and the control start parameters corresponding to the individual images are set in the initialized free buffer areas.

In a succeeding step S902, the control update target is grasped. This control update target is an individual image for which the control start processing has been completed and which may be included in the image for one frame after the current processing.

In a succeeding step S903, background calculation processing is executed. In the background calculation process, the coordinates of the background image that forms the background image and the characters for the background, coordinates in the world coordinate system, rotation angle, scale, light information for adding and contrasting light, and projection A process for calculating and deducing various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list such as camera information for performing and a Z test designation is executed.

In a succeeding step S904, effect calculation processing is executed. In the effect calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the various parameters described above is executed for individual images to be displayed in various effects such as reach display, notice display, and jackpot effect.

In a succeeding step S905, symbol calculation processing is executed. In the symbol calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the various parameters described above is performed for the image of the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner in each game.

By the way, in each process of steps S903 to S905, a process of updating the control start parameter set in step S901 is executed. Further, in each processing of steps S903 to S905, animation data set so as to change various parameters of the individual image according to a specific pattern each time the image update timing is reached is used. This animation data is stored in advance in the memory module 133 and is determined according to the type of individual image.

After that, in step S906, the process of grasping the arrangement target in the world coordinate system is executed, and then this task process is ended. In the grasping process of the arrangement target in the world coordinate system, a process of grasping the individual image to be set as the drawing target in the current drawing list among the individual images which are the control update targets by the processes of steps S903 to S905. To execute. The grasping is performed based on the currently set data table. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list.

That is, since the number of individual images to be controlled by the display CPU 131 is set to be larger than the number of individual images to be controlled by the VDP 135, the adjustment is performed in step S906. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the individual image to be controlled by the display CPU 131 and the individual image to be controlled by the VDP 135 may be the same, and in this case, the process of step S906 is executed. There is no need.

In the setting process for control start in step S901, the control start timing of each individual image may be set in a dispersed manner so as to disperse the processing load of the display CPU 131.

<Basic processing in VDP135>
Next, the basic processing executed by the VDP 135 will be described.

In the VDP 135, a process of setting the value of the register 153 based on the command transmitted from the display CPU 131, a process of creating drawing data in the frame areas 142a and 142b of the frame buffer 142 based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131, At least a process of outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 31 is executed based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 142a and 142b.

Of the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 153 is executed each time a command is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I/F 156 for the display CPU 131. Further, the process of creating the drawing data is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 20 msec) by the cooperation of the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152. The process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 155 at a predetermined image signal output start timing.

Hereinafter, the process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail. Prior to the description of the process, the content of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 will be described. 15A to 15C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, target buffer information, which is information indicating which one of the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b is to be created, is set for the image for one frame related to the drawing list. There is. Further, various designation information is set in the header information. The contents of various designation information will be described later. When moving image data is included as the image data handled by the VDP 135, the presence or absence of decoding designation and the information of the address where the moving image data to be decoded is stored in the memory module 133 is included in the header information. It may be set.

In the drawing list, in addition to the above header information, a plurality of types of image data to be placed in the world coordinate system at the time of creating the drawing data this time are set, and further information on the drawing order of each image data, The parameter information of each image data is set. Specifically, the drawing order information is set so as to be serially-numbered numerical information, and the parameter information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information.

In the drawing list of FIG. 15A, the back image data is set as the first drawing target, the background object A is set as the second, the background object B is set as the third, and so on. There is. Further, the image data for effect is set as an order after the image data for background, for example, the object A for effect is set as the m-th, the object for effect B is set as the m+1-th, and so on. There is. Further, as the order after the image data for these effects, the image data for symbols is set, for example, the object A for symbols is set as the nth, the object for symbols B is set as the n+1th, and so on. There is.

The order in which each image data is set in the drawing list is not limited to the above order, and the set order may be the reverse of the above order. Image data for production or image data for background may be set after the data, and image data for symbols is set in the order between predetermined image data for production and image data for other production. It may have been done.

Parameter information P(1), P(2), P(3),..., P(m), P(m+1),..., P(n), P(n+1),. Has multiple types of parameters set. Regarding the back side image data parameter P(1), specifically, as shown in FIG. 15B, the address information of the area where the back side image data is stored in the memory module 133 and the back side image data are stored. Information (X-value information, Y-value information, Z-value information) indicating the position in the world coordinate system when setting the image data of, and the world coordinate system when setting the back-side image data Angle information that indicates the rotation angle inside, and scale information that indicates the magnification when setting the world coordinate system for the scale that is set as the initial state of the image data for the back side, and the image for the back side Information of a uniform α value indicating the entire transparent information (or transparent information) when setting data is set.

Here, the coordinate information is individually set for all vertices of the image data for the object. Further, this coordinate information is set for the image data for the object, but is not set for the image data for the texture. In the image data for texture, the coordinate value of each pixel is predetermined in association with each vertex of the image data for object. This coordinate value is a UV coordinate value different from the coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is stored in the memory module 133 in a state of being attached to a combination of object image data and texture image data. This UV coordinate value is referred to by the VDP 135 when performing texture mapping.

In the parameter (P1), the camera information including the coordinate and orientation information of the virtual camera when the back image data is projected on the virtual two-dimensional plane for drawing, and the back image data are rendered. And light information including information on the position and orientation of the virtual light source that determines the shadow at.

In the parameter (P1), Z test designation information indicating whether or not the Z buffer method, which is a kind of hidden surface erasing method, is applied is set. The Z-buffer method is each pixel (or each voxel, each pixel, each polygon) arranged on the Z-axis when many objects and two-dimensional images are overlapped in the depth direction (Z-axis direction) in the world coordinate system. Is sequentially referred to the distance from the viewpoint, and the numerical information set to the pixel closest to the viewpoint is set to the corresponding unit area in the frame areas 142a and 142b. When applying the Z buffer method, the Z buffer 143 provided in the VRAM 134 is used. A specific processing configuration of the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer 143 will be described later.

In addition to the Z-buffer method, the Z-sort method is set as a method for performing the hidden surface removal. The Z sort method is a processing method for depth adjustment in which, for each pixel arranged on the Z axis, the numerical information set for each pixel is sequentially set in the corresponding unit area in the frame regions 142a and 142b. When the Z sorting method is applied, the α value set for each pixel is referred to, and the corresponding α value is applied to the numerical information corresponding to the color information of each pixel arranged on the Z axis. In this state, the addition processing of these numerical information and the calculation processing for fusion are executed. The description of the specific processing configuration of the hidden surface processing by Z sort is omitted, but it is activated when the effect image is displayed.

The parameter (P1) includes α data designation information indicating whether or not α data is applied and an application target, fog designation information indicating whether fog is applied or not, and a background created to display a background image. Information for specifying separate saving indicating whether or not separate saving is performed for drawing data for an image is set.

Here, the α value is the transmission information of the corresponding pixel. As a method of setting the α value on the drawing list, there are a method of designating the uniform α value and a method of designating α data. The uniform α value is transparency information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 131. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transparency information applied to each pixel of two-dimensional still image data and texture image data, and is stored in the memory module 133 in advance as image data. The α data can have different transparency information for each pixel within the range of the same still image data or the image data for the same texture. This α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting a uniform α value.

By uniformly setting the α value and the α data as described above, the transparency of the two-dimensional still image data or the image data for texture is not controlled finely in pixel units, but is uniform for all pixels. In the situation where it is only necessary to control with .alpha., it is possible to reduce the required data capacity by being able to deal with a uniform .alpha. value, and it is also possible to finely control the transparency in pixel units by applying .alpha. data.

The fog is information for adjusting the degree of brightness with respect to a position in a predetermined direction in the world coordinate system, specifically, the Z-axis direction. Fog is used to represent fog and the inside of a cave. Here, a single fog may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, fog is applied to the image for one frame in a fixed manner. Alternatively, a plurality of fogs may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, if a fog similar to other objects is applied to an object arranged on the back side in the Z-axis direction, the fog is too dark to give a texture, and another fog is set for the object. It is good to have a configuration. Accordingly, it is possible to obtain the effect of setting the fog while preventing the above texture from being impaired.

The separate saving means that the once created drawing data for the background image is written and saved in the mode buffer 145 provided separately from the frame areas 142a and 142b so that it can be used as it is in the subsequent frames. As shown in FIG. 4, the mode buffer 145 is provided with a first mode area 145a and a second mode area 145b so as to correspond to each display mode on a one-to-one basis. The specific content of this separate storage will be described later in detail.

For other parameters such as the parameter P(2), as shown in FIG. 15C, of the various information shown in FIG. 15B, the information of the object and the texture are replaced in place of the information of the image data for the back surface. Information and are set. As these pieces of information, information on addresses of areas in which objects and textures are stored in the memory module 133 is set.

Drawing processing in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the following description, how drawing data is created as the drawing process is performed will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether a new drawing list is received from the display CPU 131. If a new drawing list has been received, background setting processing is executed in step S1002.

In the setting process for the background, out of the image data designated in the drawing list this time, the image data for the back face for displaying the background image and the object for the character are grasped. Then, it is determined whether or not the image data and the character object are already arranged in the world coordinate system.

If not arranged, a free buffer area to be referred to for arrangement in the world coordinate system is searched for each image data, and if a free buffer area is secured, initialization processing of that area is executed. After that, the memory module 133 grasps and reads the address where the image data is stored, and at the same time, the coordinate value of the local coordinate system for the image data is set so that the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale are designated in the drawing list. The world conversion processing for converting the coordinate value into the coordinate value of the world coordinate system is executed, and is set in the secured buffer area.

If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters set in the already secured buffer area is executed. Further, in the background setting process, a control ending process is executed to erase the background image data not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

In a succeeding step S1003, effect setting processing is executed. In the setting process for effect, the object for displaying the effect image is grasped from the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If they are not arranged, the process for starting the arrangement is executed as in the case described in the background setting process. If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters is executed. Further, in the setting process for effect, a control ending process for deleting the image data for effect which is not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

In a succeeding step S1004, a setting process for symbols is executed. In the design setting process, the object for displaying the design is grasped in the image data specified in the drawing list this time. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If they are not arranged, the process for starting the arrangement is executed as in the case described in the background setting process. If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters is executed. Further, in the symbol setting process, a control end process is executed to erase the image data for symbols not designated in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

As a result of the processing in steps S1002 to S1004 being executed, as shown in FIG. 17, it is designated as an arrangement target by the drawing list in the world coordinate system defined by the X axis, Y axis, and Z axis. The setting of the scene in which the rearmost image PC1 and the various objects PC2 to PC10 are arranged at the coordinates, rotation angles, and scales that are also designated by the drawing list is completed.

It should be noted that FIG. 17 simply shows a state in which the rearmost image PC1 and various objects PC2 to PC10 are arranged. Further, the backmost image PC1 does not need to have the coordinates in the Z-axis direction set to the back side with respect to all of the various objects PC2 to PC10. For example, the backmost image PC1 is bent or tilted. By arranging in, the coordinates in the Z-axis direction may be on the front side of some objects. However, the area of the backmost image PC1 in which the coordinates in the X-axis direction and the coordinates in the Y-axis direction are the same as those of some of the objects, the coordinates in the Z-axis direction are behind the object, The object is in a state where it is not covered by the rearmost image PC1.

In the following step S1005, conversion processing to the camera coordinate system (camera space) is executed. In the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and the direction of the viewpoint are determined based on the information of the camera specified by the drawing list, and the world coordinate system is used as the origin of the viewpoint based on the coordinates and the direction of the viewpoint. Convert to camera coordinate system (camera space). As a result, as shown in FIG. 17, the viewpoint PC11 indicated by the camera shape is set, and the coordinate system corresponding thereto is set.

Here, the camera information is set for each individual image (the backmost image PC1 and various objects PC2 to PC10), and in reality, a camera coordinate system exists for each individual image. By setting the camera coordinate system for each individual image in this way, viewpoint switching can be performed individually, and the degree of freedom in creating drawing data is increased. However, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 17 shows a state in which all individual images are set to a single viewpoint.

In a succeeding step S1006, conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system (visual field space) is executed. In the conversion processing into the visual field coordinate system, each of the camera coordinate systems described above is converted into a visual field coordinate system corresponding to the visual field (viewing angle) from the viewpoint. As a result, for each individual image, if it is included in the visual field of the corresponding viewpoint, it is extracted, the individual image near the viewpoint is enlarged, and the individual image far from the viewpoint is reduced.

In a succeeding step S1007, clipping processing is executed. In the clipping process, each individual image extracted in step S1006 is recognized with the corresponding viewpoint as a common origin. Then, in this state, the space corresponding to the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 17) corresponding to the drawing target frame areas 142a and 142b (that is, the display surface G of the symbol display device 31) is used as a reference for extraction in step S1006. Clip each clipped individual image.

In a succeeding step S1008, a lighting process is executed. In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and direction of the virtual light source are determined based on the light information specified by the drawing list, and the shadows, reflections, etc. of each object extracted by the clipping process are calculated based on the virtual light source. ..

In a succeeding step S1009, a color information setting process is executed. In the color information setting process, the appearance of each object is determined by setting the color information for each object extracted by the clipping process in pixel units (that is, polygon units) or vertex units. In the color information setting process, basically, a texture mapping process for attaching a texture corresponding to each object extracted by the clipping process is executed. Further, depending on the situation, processing such as bump mapping and transparency mapping is executed.

Then, in steps S1010 and S1011, each individual image extracted in step S1007 and further subjected to the lighting process and the color information setting process is projected onto the screen area PC12 that is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, perspective projection). Or parallel projection) to create drawing data.

Specifically, first, in step S1010, background drawing data creation processing is executed. In the drawing data creation process for the background, the drawing data for the background is created by projecting the backmost image and the object set as the background image onto the screen area PC12 while performing hidden surface removal.

Here, the VRAM 134 is provided with a screen buffer 144 as shown in FIG. 4, and a background buffer in which the drawing data for the background is written in the screen buffer 144 and the drawing data and the design for the effect. The effect and the pattern buffer in which the drawing data for writing are collectively written are set. An area having the same number of dots as the number of pixels of the screen area PC12 is set in the background buffer and the effect and symbol buffer. The background drawing data created in step S1010 is written in the background buffer. If the image data for the background is not specified in the drawing list, the drawing data for the background is not created.

In the following step S1011 a drawing data creation process for effect and design is executed. In the rendering data creation process for the effect and the pattern, the object set as the effect image and the object set as the pattern are projected onto the screen area PC12 while the hidden surface is erased, and thus the screen buffer is created. In the buffer for effect and symbol in 144, drawing data for effect and symbol is created. If the image data for effects and symbols is not specified in the drawing list, the drawing data for effects and symbols is not created.

After that, in step S1012, the drawing data composition process is executed, and then the present drawing process is ended. In the drawing data synthesizing process of step S1012, the background drawing data and the drawing data for the effect and the pattern created individually in the screen buffer 144 by the processes of step S1010 and step S1011 are combined, and The composition result is written in the drawing target frame areas 142a and 142b as drawing data for one frame.

In this case, the writing order is defined such that the drawing data for the background, the drawing data for the effect, and the drawing data for the design are arranged in order from the back side to the front side. Therefore, in the drawing target frame areas 142a and 142b, the drawing data for the background is first written, and then the drawing data for the effect and the pattern is written. At this time, if the completely transparent α value is set for the pixel for which drawing is performed, the image on the back side is used as is, and if the semi-transparent α value is set, the α value is set. The image on the back side and the image on the front side are fused at the standard ratio, and when the opaque α value is set, the image on the front side is overwritten on the image on the back side. Then, the fusion operation is executed.

Here, the fusion calculation will be described in more detail. The RGB numerical value information of each dot in the drawing target frame areas 142a and 142b is set to the pixel that is the drawing target in the rendering data for effect and design. Based on the α value
R: “R value of back side image”×(“1”−“α value”)+“R value of front side image”דα value”
G: “G value of back side image”×(“1”−“α value”)+“G value of front side image”דα value”
B: “B value of the back side image”×(“1”−“α value”)+“B value of the front side image”דα value”
Becomes

By the way, although each drawing data is defined to have an area for one frame, an α value of complete transparency is set for a blank portion that is not projected in the drawing data for effect and design.

The drawing data for one frame is created so as to be completed within the range of 20 msec cycle. Further, an image signal is output from the display circuit 155 to the symbol display device 31 based on the created drawing data, but since the double buffer method is adopted as already described, the output of the image signal is the output. This is performed in parallel with the creation of drawing data for one frame after that frame. Further, the display circuit 155 has a selector circuit which alternately switches the frame regions 142a and 142b to be referred to each time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed. The frame areas 142a and 142b, which are drawing targets, are regulated so as not to be output targets for outputting image signals.

Note that steps S1002 to S1007 described above are processes executed by the geometry calculation unit 151, and steps S1008 to S1012 described above are processes executed by the rendering unit 152.

<Mask display using Z buffer 143>
Next, the mask display using the Z buffer 143 will be described.

As described above, the Z buffer 143 is used when performing hidden surface removal by the Z buffer method. Now, the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The hidden surface process using the Z buffer is activated in each drawing data creation process of step S1010 and step S1011 in the drawing process (FIG. 16) when the Z test is designated in the drawing list. Further, when the Z test is designated, the display CPU 131 sets the Z axis of the screen area PC12, which is the reference in the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer, so as to be parallel to the Z axis of the world coordinate system. A pixel to be displayed is determined between pixels arranged in a direction parallel to the Z-axis direction.

In the background drawing data creation process of step S1010, the back image and the background object are targets of the hidden surface process, and in the rendering and design drawing data creation process of step S1011, the rendering object and the design object are used. Object is the target of hidden surface treatment. Further, in the hidden surface process in the drawing data creation process for the effect and the design, the completely transparent α value is set for the blank portion in which neither the effect object nor the design object is set.

Only one Z buffer 143 is set, and it has an area with the same number of dots as the background buffer in the screen buffer 144 and an area with the same number of dots as the effect and symbol buffer. is doing.

First, in step S1101, an individual image included on the Z axis of the current projection target dot in the screen region PC12 (see FIG. 17) is set as a target pixel of the individual image that is the current test target. Understand the set Z value. In a succeeding step S1102, the Z value set in the area of the dot corresponding to the drawing target dot in the Z buffer 143 is grasped.

In a succeeding step S1103, it is determined whether or not the Z value of the individual image grasped in step S1101 corresponds to the front side in the Z axis direction with respect to the Z value of the Z buffer 143 grasped in step S1102. If it corresponds to the front side, the process proceeds to step S1104, and the Z value grasped in step S1101 is overwritten in the dot area referred to in step S1102 in the Z buffer 143. In the following step S1105, the numerical value information for drawing such as the color information set in the pixel referred to in step S1101 is overwritten in the area of the projection target dot of this time in the drawing target buffer in the screen buffer 144. Then, it progresses to step S1106.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1103 that the front side is not supported, the process proceeds to step S1106 without executing the processes of steps S1104 to S1105. That is, when the Z value of the pixel to be tested is the same as the Z value already set for the target dot of the Z buffer 143 or is on the far side in the Z axis direction, the Z buffer 143 is updated. At the same time, the already set numerical information for drawing is retained as it is. On the other hand, when the Z value of the test target pixel is on the front side in the Z axis direction from the Z value already set for the target dot of the Z buffer 143, the Z buffer 143 is updated. , Numerical information for drawing is also updated.

In step S1106, it is determined whether the Z test is completed for all target pixels included on the Z axis with the projection target dot as a reference. If not completed, the process returns to step S1101 and a Z test is performed on a new target pixel.

If it is completed, it is determined in step S1107 whether the Z test is completed for all the dots in the screen area PC12. If not completed, the projection target dot is updated in step S1108 and then the process returns to step S1101 to perform the Z test on the new projection target dot. If it is completed, this hidden surface processing is ended.

By performing the hidden surface processing as described above, even if a plurality of individual images are arranged on the Z axis, only the individual image closer to the viewpoint is displayed. Here, in the present embodiment, masking (that is, partial display) of the character for the background is executed by using the hidden surface processing. Then, this mask is performed by setting the Z value of the object for the mask in the display CPU 131.

The masking calculation process executed by the display CPU 131 will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. It should be noted that the mask calculation process is the same as the background calculation process of step S903 in the task process (FIG. 14) when it is indicated in the data table that the mask reference process should be executed. Is executed.

First, in step S1201, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not the current processing time corresponds to the first mask display. Here, the first mask display and the second mask display are set as the mask display. The first mask display is a display mode in which a state in which a character is partially displayed is maintained for a plurality of frames, and the second mask display is in a state in which pixels to be masked are displayed in a plurality of frames from the state in which the entire character is displayed. It is a display mode that gradually increases over time and finally disappears.

If it corresponds to the first mask display, the object to be masked is grasped based on the currently set data table in step S1202. In the following step S1203, the pixels to be masked are grasped in the object grasped in step S1202 based on the currently set data table.

After that, after the Z value setting process is executed in step S1204, the present calculation process is ended. In the Z value setting process, the pixel that is the mask target in the object is set so that the Z value is on the back side of the rearmost image, and the pixel that is not the mask target is set as follows. The Z value is set so as to correspond to the position that should be originally displayed, which is on the front side of the rearmost image.

The masking arithmetic process is executed as described above, and the drawing list including the object with the Z value set as a drawing target is transmitted to the VDP 135, so that the VDP 135 uses the Z buffer as the hidden surface process. The hidden surface processing (FIG. 18) is executed, and finally the first mask display is performed on the display surface G. The specific contents of the first mask display will be described with reference to FIG. Note that, for convenience of explanation, in FIG. 20, the three-dimensional image is shown as a two-dimensional image.

FIG. 20A shows a case where the character CH1 is displayed as usual without performing the first mask display. Further, FIG. 20(a-1) is an image diagram of the Z value designated in the display CPU 131 for each pixel of the object PC 13 corresponding to the character CH1, and FIG. 20(a-2) is the display surface G. A display mode is shown. In this case, as shown in FIG. 20(a-1), the Z value is set to each pixel so as to be closer to the front side than the rearmost image. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 20(a-2). The entire character CH1 is displayed.

FIG. 20B shows a case where the first mask display is performed. Further, FIG. 20(b-1) is an image diagram of the Z value designated by the display CPU 131 for each pixel of the object PC 13 corresponding to the character CH1, and FIG. 20(b-2) is on the display surface G. A display mode is shown. In this case, as shown in FIG. 20(b-1), the Z value is set so that a part of each pixel is on the front side of the image on the back surface, but the remaining pixels are on the back surface. The Z value is set to be on the back side of the image. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 20(b-2), the character CH1 is displayed only at the portion corresponding to the pixel for which the Z value is set so as to be on the front side.

A plurality of Z value setting patterns corresponding to the first mask display for the same character CH1 may be set by the control program of the display CPU 131. In this case, it is possible to set a plurality of first mask display modes for the same character CH1.

Returning to the description of the calculation processing for masks (FIG. 19), if it is determined in step S1201 that the current processing time does not correspond to the first mask display, the current processing time is the second mask display. Since it means that the display is supported, the process advances to step S1205. In step S1205, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the second mask display based on the currently set data table.

If it is the start timing, in step S1206, the object to be masked is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S1207, the dedicated mask table is read based on the currently set data table. This mask dedicated table is stored and held until the second mask display this time is completed. In a succeeding step S1208, the pixel set as the initial erasing target in the mask dedicated table is grasped.

After that, after the Z value setting process is executed in step S1209, the present calculation process is ended. In the Z value setting process, in the above-mentioned object, with respect to the pixel grasped as the initial erasing target in step S1208, the Z value is set so as to be on the back side of the rearmost image, and the pixel is set as the initial erasing target. For pixels that are not formed, the Z value is set so as to correspond to the position on the front side of the rearmost image and should be originally displayed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1205 that it is not the start timing, the process proceeds to step S1210. In step S1210, the erase target counter set in the work RAM 132 is updated. In the following step S1211, the data corresponding to the value of the erase target counter updated in step S1210 is confirmed in the currently read mask dedicated table, and the pixel to be erased is grasped.

After that, the Z value setting process is executed in step S1212, and then the present calculation process is ended. In the Z value setting process, in the above-described object, the pixel that is recognized as the deletion target in step S<b>1211 is set so that the Z value is on the back side of the rearmost image and is the deletion target. For a pixel that does not exist, its Z value is set so as to correspond to a position on the front side of the rearmost image and which should be originally displayed.

The masking arithmetic process is executed as described above, and the drawing list including the object with the Z value set as a drawing target is transmitted to the VDP 135, so that the VDP 135 uses the Z buffer as the hidden surface process. The hidden surface processing (FIG. 18) is executed, and finally the second mask display is performed on the display surface G. The specific contents of the second mask display will be described with reference to FIG. For convenience of explanation, the three-dimensional image is shown as a two-dimensional image in FIG.

FIG. 21(a) shows an image diagram of information set in the mask dedicated table, and FIG. 21(b) shows the case where the character CH2 is displayed as usual without the second mask display. Is shown. As shown in FIG. 21A, the object PC14 corresponding to the character CH2 has a plurality of pixels, and in the dedicated table for the mask, the plurality of pixels are grouped into a plurality of groups and each group is divided into groups. On the other hand, the frame order to be erased is set. Specifically, the group shown as “a1” is set as the initial deletion target, and thereafter, the group shown as “a2”→the group shown as “a3”→the group shown as “a4”→shown as “a5” It becomes a deletion target in the order of the group.

In the frame in which the second mask display is started and the group indicated by “a1” is the deletion target, as shown in FIG. 21C, the pixel portion corresponding to the group of “a1” is missing. The character CH2 is displayed. Further, in the subsequent frame, when the group indicated by “a2” is to be erased, as shown in FIG. 21D, in addition to the group of “a1”, the pixel corresponding to the group of “a2” is added. The character CH2 is displayed in a state where the part is missing. Then, the character CH2 is not displayed in the frame in which the group finally indicated as "a5" is the deletion target.

As described above, the Z buffer 143 can be used to mask an object. Further, according to this configuration, it is only necessary to perform the masking operation on the program of the display CPU 131, and it is not necessary to set the mask data which is a kind of image data in the VDP 135. Therefore, the mask display can be performed without increasing the storage capacity required for storing the image data.

Further, since the display CPU 131 only needs to adjust the Z value of each object, the mask display can be performed without significantly increasing the processing load of the display CPU 131. In addition, a plurality of types of mask displays such as the first mask display and the second mask display can exhibit the excellent effects as described above.

In addition, a Z value on the back side of the backmost image is set in the hidden portion. The rearmost image is an image that always forms the rear surface in any frame, and thus serves as an absolute reference as a position on the Z axis (depth direction). By setting the Z value of the part to be hidden based on this, it becomes possible to make the setting mode of the Z value in the case of non-display uniform, and the process related to the setting of the Z value. The processing load of is reduced.

Note that only one of the first mask display and the second mask display may be set. Further, in the second mask display, instead of erasing every plurality of pixels, the erasing may be performed for each pixel, and the erasing target pixel may be set as the display target again. May be

By setting the Z value in reverse, the characters are not sequentially erased over the display period for a plurality of frames, but are displayed so that the characters sequentially appear over the display period for a plurality of frames. It may be configured to be.

<Another mode of mask processing using Z buffer 143>
Another mode of mask display using the Z buffer 143 will be described.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing another form of the masking arithmetic processing executed by the display CPU 131.

First, in step S1301, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not it is the start timing. When it is the start timing, in step S1302, the object to be masked is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in step S1303, based on the currently set data table, the initial setting is performed. Read the mask table.

In a succeeding step S1304, mask lottery processing is executed. In the mask lottery process, the numerical information currently set in the lottery counter provided in the work RAM 132 is read, and the information to be erased corresponding to the numerical information is extracted from the initial mask table read in step S1303. ..

The lottery counter is configured to be updated each time the process of step S702 is executed in the main process (FIG. 12), for example, and when the counter value makes one round, the initial value is randomly selected. It is configured to be. In addition, in the initial masking table, the information to be erased is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the respective counter values of the lottery counter, and the information to be erased is all the pixels that make up the object to be masked. Of these, a plurality of pixels are set as one group and each group has a one-to-one correspondence.

In the following step S1305, the pixel to be erased is grasped from the information to be erased acquired in step S1304. After that, after the Z value setting process is executed in step S1306, the present calculation process is ended. In the Z value setting process, in the above object, the pixel that is grasped as the erasure target in step S1305 is set so that the Z value is on the back side of the rearmost image and is the erasure target. For a pixel that does not exist, its Z value is set so as to correspond to the position that should be originally displayed, which is on the front side of the rearmost image.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1301 that it is not the start timing, the process proceeds to step S1307. In step S1307, the mask table is rewritten so that the erase target information already set as the erase target is excluded from the already read initial mask table. For example, the counter value corresponding to the information to be erased that has already been set as the erase target is rewritten so that the counter value is redundantly assigned to other information to be erased. This allocation may be performed randomly, or may be configured to be allocated to the information to be erased corresponding to the counter value immediately below in the table.

After that, the mask table rewritten in step S1307 is used to execute the processes of steps S1304 to S1306, and then the present calculation process is ended.

As described above, according to this another mode, the pixels to be erased are randomly selected, so that the mask display mode can be diversified.

The mask display using the Z buffer 143 may be applied not to the background character but to the effect character or the design. For example, when applied to a character for production, the hidden surface processing is executed collectively for the image data for the background and the image data for the presentation, so that the backmost surface is processed in the same manner as the above-mentioned configuration. The Z values of the display target and the non-display target may be distributed based on the Z value of the image. Further, when applied to the design, the hidden surface processing is executed collectively for the image data for the background, the image data for the effect, and the image data for the design, so that similar to the above configuration. The Z values of the display target and the non-display target may be distributed based on the Z value of the rearmost image.

Further, even when the hidden surface processing is performed individually for the background, the effect, and the design, it is determined that the pixel for which the Z value on the back side of the rearmost image is set in the VDP 135 is not the drawing target. If so, the Z values of the display object and the non-display object may be distributed with reference to the Z value of the rearmost image, as in the above configuration.

Further, the Z values of the display target and the non-display target are not distributed based on the Z value of the rearmost image, but a Z value in front of the viewpoint is set as the Z value of the non-display target, for example. The Z value on the back side of the viewpoint may be set as the Z value to be displayed.

The hidden surface processing using the Z buffer 143 may be performed not based on the Z axis of the world coordinate system but based on the direction in which the viewpoint is directed.

<Structure for switching display modes>
Next, a configuration related to switching of display modes will be described.

As described above, the display mode is a state in which the type of the standby image displayed until the game time is started or the type of the game time image displayed when the game time is being executed is set to a predetermined type. That is, a plurality of display modes are set. Specifically, the first display mode and the second display mode are set.

The display mode of the background image and the display mode of each symbol are different between the first display mode and the second display mode. Specifically, when comparing the symbols with the same number, the outer shapes and shapes of the symbols are the same in the first display mode and the second display mode, but the colors and the patterns are different. Regarding the background image, the type of the backmost image is different between the first display mode and the second display mode, and the number and types of characters displayed in front of the backmost image are different. The number of characters to be displayed is set to be larger in the first display mode than in the second display mode.

The switching of the display mode is performed based on the operation of the effect operation device 48. Specifically, the display mode can be sequentially switched by operating the production operating device 48 in a situation where the game time and the opening/closing execution mode are not executed. In addition, switching is performed based on the operation device 48 for effect being operated under a predetermined condition in the situation where the game time is being executed.

A specific processing configuration for switching the display mode will be described.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the operation generation command handling process executed by the display CPU 131. The operation occurrence command handling process is executed by the command handling process of step S803 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 13).

First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not an operation generation command for mode switching is received from the sound emission control device 60. If it has not been received, this operation command handling process is terminated as it is, and if it has been received, the process proceeds to step S1402.

In step S1402, it is determined whether it is the first switchable period. The first switchable period is a period during which neither the game times nor the opening/closing execution mode is executed. Information for specifying whether it is the first switchable period is set in the data table, and in step S1402, it is determined whether the first switchable period is based on the currently set data table. . If it is the first switchable period, in step S1403, the first switch execution flag is set in a predetermined area provided in the work RAM 132.

On the other hand, if the period is not the first switchable period, the process advances to step S1404 to determine whether it is the second switchable period. The second switchable period is a period from the start timing to a predetermined reference timing in the middle of execution in the situation where the game game is being executed. Specifically, when the game diversion effect is executed on the symbol display device 31, variable display of symbols in all symbol columns SA1 to SA3 is started→High speed variable display in all symbol columns SA1 to SA3→Low velocity fluctuation It includes a display flow of sequentially stopping each symbol sequence SA1 to SA3 via the display. In this case, the second switchable period is a period from the start of the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol columns SA1 to SA3 to the timing at which the high-speed variable display in all the symbol columns SA1 to SA3 ends.

In addition, the mode of variable display of the symbols starts the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol columns SA1 to SA3 → the acceleration period of all the symbol columns SA1 to SA3 → the high speed variable display in all the symbol columns SA1 to SA3 (the high speed is constant. The display flow may be a sequential stop of each of the symbol arrays SA1 to SA3 via a speed)→low speed fluctuation display (low speed is a constant speed). In this case, the second switchable period may be a period during which the high-speed variable display in all the symbol arrays SA1 to SA3 is being executed.

Further, a middle speed fluctuation display may be included between the high speed fluctuation display and the low speed fluctuation display. In other words, the mode of variable display of symbols is arbitrary as long as it is switched in a plurality of stages such as 2 stages, 3 stages or 4 stages or more. In this case, the second switchable period may be a period of a low discriminating stage in which the player's symbol discriminating property is low among the stages.

Further, in the flow of the variable display of the symbols, the specific variable mode is arbitrary as long as it includes the state of the variable display in the relatively low identification mode → the variable display in the high identification mode, for example, any mode. Even though the speed of change is the same, the variable display in the low identification mode displays the pattern as transparent, semitransparent, hollow or partially removed, and the variable display in the high identification mode displays the entire pattern. It may be configured to be displayed. In this case, the second switchable period may be the period during which the variable display is performed in the low identification mode.

Information for specifying whether it is the second switchable period is set in the data table, and in step S1404, it is determined whether it is the second switchable period based on the currently set data table. .. If it is determined that it is not the second switchable period, the operation corresponding to the operation generation command is ended as it is, and if it is the second switchable period, a predetermined area provided in the work RAM 132 in step S1405. The second switching execution flag is set for.

After performing the processing of either step S1403 or step S1405, the process proceeds to step S1406. In step S1406, the display mode counter is updated.

The display mode counter is a counter for the display CPU 131 to specify the current display mode, and is provided in the work RAM 132. A counter value is set in the display mode counter in a one-to-one correspondence with each display mode. In the present embodiment, since two types of display modes, the first display mode and the second display mode, are set as described above, the counter value is “0” corresponding to the first display mode and the second display mode. The numerical value of "1" corresponding to the mode is set. In this case, since the initial value of the display mode counter is set to “0”, the first value is set when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 131 is started or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset. 1 display mode is set.

In step S1406, the display mode counter is updated so that the display mode is sequentially switched according to a predetermined order each time the effect operation device 48 is operated once. Specifically, when the process of step S1406 is executed in a situation where the display mode counter is “0” and the first display mode is set, the second display mode counter is set to “1”. When the process of step S1406 is executed in the situation where the display mode counter is "1" and the second display mode is set while switching to the display mode, the display mode counter is set to "1". 1 Switch to display mode. After the processing of step S1406 is executed, the processing corresponding to this operation generation command is ended.

Next, the calculation processing for the display mode background executed by the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The display mode background calculation process is executed in the background calculation process of step S903 in the task process (FIG. 14). In addition, when performing a jackpot effect, the background image corresponding to the display mode is not displayed, so the calculation processing for the display mode background is not executed, and when the standby image is displayed or when the game time effect is executed. For example, the calculation processing for the display mode background is executed.

First, in step S1501, the display mode counter provided in the work RAM 132 is referenced to determine whether or not the display mode is the first display mode. In the case of the first display mode, in step S1502, the first rearmost image to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S1503, various parameters of the grasped first rearmost image are calculated to update the control information. In subsequent step S1504, an object corresponding to the first display mode, which is an object to be updated for the background, is grasped based on the currently set data table. In subsequent step S1505, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated to update the control information.

On the other hand, in the case of the second display mode, in step S1506, the second rearmost image to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In subsequent step S1507, various parameters of the grasped second backmost image are calculated to update the control information. In the following step S1508, the object corresponding to the second display mode, which is the object to be updated for the background, is grasped based on the currently set data table. In subsequent step S1509, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated to update the control information.

At the execution timing of the process of step S1502, the control start setting process (step S901) for the first background image and the background object corresponding to the first display mode is completed. At the execution timing of the process of step S1506, the control start setting process (step S901) for the second background image and the background object corresponding to the second display mode is completed.

After executing the processing of step S1505 or step S1509, it is determined in step S1510 whether the first switching execution flag or the second switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132. If any of the switching execution flags is set, it is determined in step S1511 whether the processing load is large.

The situation where the processing load is large means that when the geometry calculation and the rendering for the image data specified in the rendering list this time are both executed by the VDP 135, the processing load of the VDP 135 is large or the processing load is high enough to cause processing loss. This is a situation in which the processing load on the VDP 135 is relatively large even before the drop occurs. Information regarding whether or not the processing load is large is defined in the data table, and the determination in step S1511 is performed based on the information.

When the processing load is not large, it is determined in step S1512 whether or not the background image corresponding to the current display mode has been separately saved. Here, the separate storage means that the drawing data for the background for displaying the background image corresponding to each display mode is individually saved and the saved state is maintained. For another storage, the mode buffer 145 provided in the VRAM 134 is used (see FIG. 4).

In the mode buffer 145, in order to display the first mode area 145a in which drawing data for the background for displaying the background image corresponding to the first display mode and the background image corresponding to the second display mode are displayed. A second mode area 145b in which drawing data for the background is written. Further, the VDP 135 has a function of writing the drawing data for the background into either the first mode area 145a or the second mode area 145b, and reading the written background drawing data into the screen buffer 144. A display mode control unit 154 having a writing function is provided.

If it has not been separately saved, the execution designation information of separately saved is stored in step S1513, and then this operation processing is ended. If it is already saved separately, this operation processing is ended as it is.

When the calculation processing for the display mode background is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing includes the background display corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode. The information of the instruction to use the image data is set. If the process of step S1513 is being executed, the separately designated execution designation information is set. The separately-storing execution designation information includes information indicating that the separately-storing should be executed, and also includes information on the address of the separately-storing destination.

On the other hand, when the processing load is large (step S1511: YES), it is determined in step S1514 whether the background image of the display mode of the switching destination has been separately saved. If it has not been stored separately, this operation processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has already been stored separately, in step S1515, the use designation information of the separately stored data is stored, and then the present arithmetic processing ends.

When the calculation processing for the display mode background is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing includes the background display corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode. The information of the instruction to use the image data is set. If the process of step S1515 is being executed, the use designation information of the separate storage data is set. The separate storage data use designation information includes information indicating that the separate storage data should be used, and also includes information on the address where the separate storage data is stored.

Next, the symbol calculation process executed by the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The symbol calculation process is executed in step S905 of the task process (FIG. 14).

First, in step S1601, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not it is necessary to execute the control update process for the symbol. The case where the jackpot effect is executed is included as a case where it is not necessary to execute, and the case where the effect for game play is executed and the case where the standby image is displayed are included as a case where it is necessary to execute. When it is not necessary to execute, the symbol calculation process is terminated as it is, and when it is necessary to execute, in step S1602, based on the currently set data table, is the game time being executed? Determine whether or not.

If the game game is not being executed, it is determined in step S1603 whether or not the first switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132. If the first switching execution flag is set, in step S1604, the symbol to be controlled is changed corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination. Specifically, while holding the information for the parameters of each free buffer area secured for controlling the symbols in the work RAM 132, the information of the symbols to be controlled (for example, the information of the stored addresses) Rewrite only the information corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination. The processing of steps S1603 and S1604 may be configured to be executed by the control start setting processing (step S901) in the task processing (FIG. 14). In addition, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1603, the first switching execution flag is cleared.

If a negative determination is made in step S1603 or the processing of step S1604 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605, the object of the symbol to be controlled is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in the following step S1606, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. After that, the calculation process for this symbol ends.

When the symbol calculation process is executed as described above, in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process, the image data for the pattern corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode. Information of the usage instruction of is set.

When the game times are being executed (step S1602: YES), in step S1607, based on the currently set data table, whether or not high speed fluctuation display is being performed in all the symbol columns SA1 to SA3. judge. When the high speed fluctuation display is being performed in all the symbol columns SA1 to SA3, it is determined in step S1608 whether or not the second switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132.

If the second switching execution flag is set, it is determined in step S1609 whether or not the symbol to be controlled can be changed corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination. This is because when the drawing process (FIG. 16) corresponding to the drawing list this time is executed by the VDP 135 and the pattern to be controlled is changed in accordance with the display mode of the switching destination, a process omission occurs. Based on whether or not the processing omission occurs, it can be changed, and if the processing omission occurs, it is determined that the change cannot be performed.

For example, when the background image data corresponding to the display mode switching is newly set in the drawing list this time, it is necessary to newly set the image data in the world coordinate system in the VDP 135. The processing load on the VDP 135 increases. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the symbol cannot be changed. On the other hand, when another saved data is set as the image data for the background in the drawing list this time, or when the image data for the background corresponding to the same display mode as the display mode related to the previous drawing list is set. Therefore, it is not necessary to newly set the image data in the world coordinate system in the VDP 135, so that the processing load of the VDP 135 becomes relatively small. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the design can be changed.

It should be noted that the information as to whether or not it can be changed is defined in the data table, and the determination in step S1609 is performed based on that information. In addition, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1608, the second switching execution flag is cleared.

When it is determined in step S1609 that the pattern can be changed, the symbol to be controlled is changed in step S1610 in accordance with the display mode of the switching destination. The specific content of this processing is the same as in step S1604. After executing the processing of step S1610, the process proceeds to step S1613.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1609 that the change is not possible, the change standby flag is set for a predetermined area provided in the work RAM 132 in step S1611, and then the process proceeds to step S1613. .. The change standby flag is a flag for the display CPU 131 to specify that the change of the symbol to be controlled is waiting. When the change standby flag is set, even if it is determined in step S1608 that the second switching execution flag is not set, the process of step S1612 is executed, and thus the process of step S1609 is executed. Executed. If neither the second switching execution flag nor the change standby flag is set, the process directly proceeds to step S1613. Further, the change standby flag is cleared when a positive determination is made in step S1612.

In step S1613, the object of the symbol to be controlled is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in the following step S1614, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. After that, the calculation process for this symbol ends.

When the symbol calculation process is executed as described above, in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process, the instruction to use the image data for the pattern corresponding to the first display mode or the second display mode is given. Information is set. In this case, when it is determined in step S1609 that the design corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination cannot be changed, the information of the instruction to use the image data of the design corresponding to the display mode of the switching source remains unchanged. It is set in the drawing list. Then, finally, a symbol that does not correspond to the display mode will be displayed on the display surface G, but since the timing at which the second switching execution flag is set is the high speed variable display, the player changes the above state. Cannot be recognized or difficult to recognize.

If the symbol corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination cannot be changed, the change standby flag is set, and the change is performed in the subsequent processing times. As a result, it is possible to favorably switch the display mode while preventing the processing drop in the VDP 135. The processing load of the VDP 135 is adjusted so that the design corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination is changed within the range where the high-speed variable display is being performed.

When the high speed fluctuation display is not being performed (step S1607: NO), the process proceeds to step S1615. In step S1615, the object of the symbol to be controlled is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in step S1616, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. After that, the calculation process for this symbol ends. When the symbol calculation process is executed as described above, in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process, the instruction to use the image data for the pattern corresponding to the first display mode or the second display mode is given. Information is set.

Next, the background setting process executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The background setting process is executed in step S1002 in the drawing process (FIG. 16).

First, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the use designation of separate saved data is set in the drawing list this time. If set, in step S1702, the register 153 stores information for setting the separately stored data corresponding to the designation as background drawing data.

If not set (step S1701: NO) or after executing the process of step S1702, the process proceeds to step S1703. In step S1703, the rearmost image specified in the current drawing list is grasped, and in step S1704, various parameters specified for the rearmost image are grasped. After that, in step S1705, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for the rearmost image. The contents related to this setting are as already described.

In the following step S1706, the background object designated in the current drawing list is grasped, and in step S1707, various parameters designated for the object are grasped. Then, in step S1708, the setting process for the world coordinate system is executed for the object, and then the setting process for the background is ended.

By performing the setting process for the background as described above, it is possible to draw not only in the situation where the use specification of separate save data is not set, but also in the situation where the use specification of separate save data is set. The image data specified in the list can be set in the world coordinate system. Along with this, for example, when the drawing list this time relates to the switching of the display mode, the setting for starting the control of the image data corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination can be performed.

Next, the background drawing data creation processing executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The background drawing data creation process is executed in step S1010 in the drawing process (FIG. 16).

First, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the information on the use setting of the separate storage data is set in the register 153. If not set, the hidden surface processing is executed in step S1802 to create background drawing data in the screen buffer 144. The hidden surface treatment has already been described.

In a succeeding step S1803, it is determined whether or not a separate save execution designation is set in the drawing list this time. If it has not been set, this drawing data creation processing is terminated. If set, in step S1804, the target mode area of the first mode area 145a and the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145 is set to the background mode created in step S1802. Write the drawing data of. As a result, the drawing data for the background is separately stored. After that, the main drawing data creation process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1801 that the use setting information of the separate storage data is set in the register 153, the process proceeds to step S1805. In step S1805, the separate save data is read from the mode area specified this time among the first mode area 145a and the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145, and the read separate save data is read as the current save data. The drawing data for the background is written in the screen buffer 144. After that, the main drawing data creation process ends.

By executing the background drawing data creation processing as described above, the background drawing data through the geometry calculation and rendering, or the background drawing data related to the separately stored data is stored in the screen buffer 144. .. Further, in the frame in which the image corresponding to each display mode is displayed, the rendering data for the effect and the design (step S1011) is executed thereafter, and the rendering data for the effect and the symbol is created, The drawing data composition process (step S1012) is executed to create drawing data for one frame.

Here, the timing at which the separately stored data for the first display mode and the separately stored data for the second display mode are created will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 28.

FIG. 28(A) shows background drawing data PD1 corresponding to the first display mode, and FIG. 28(B) shows background drawing data PD2 corresponding to the second display mode. 28A shows the ON/OFF state of the power of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 28B shows the presence/absence of the first display mode, and FIG. 28C shows the presence/absence of the second display mode. 28(d) shows the presence/absence of separate storage data for the first display mode, and FIG. 28(e) shows the presence/absence of separate storage data for the second display mode.

When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on at the timing of t1, power supply to the display CPU 131 is started, and the processing is started by the display CPU 131. Since the display mode is set to the first display mode, the drawing list is output from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 in order to display the image corresponding to the first display mode at a timing after the timing of t1. Then, based on the drawing list, the VDP 135 starts to create drawing data corresponding to the first display mode.

After that, at the timing of t2, the drawing data PD1 for the background corresponding to the first display mode is completed, so that the drawing data is stored in the first mode of the mode buffer 145 as separate storage data for the first display mode. It is stored in the usage area 145a. In the background image based on the background drawing data PD1 corresponding to the first display mode, as shown in FIG. 28A, the three-dimensional characters indicated by "A" to "F" in front of the rearmost image. The image is displayed. Further, the separate storage data stored in the first mode area 145a is stored and held while the power supply to the VRAM 134 is continued. Further, the display of the image corresponding to the first display mode is started at the timing of t2 or a predetermined timing thereafter.

After that, the display mode is switched from the first display mode to the second display mode based on the effect operating device 48 being operated at the timing of t3. Then, the drawing data for the second display mode is created, and the display of the image corresponding to the second display mode is started. In addition, since the drawing data PD2 for the background corresponding to the second display mode is completed at the timing, the drawing data is stored as the separate storage data for the second display mode in the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145. Memorized in. In the background image based on the background drawing data PD2 corresponding to the second display mode, as shown in FIG. 28B, the three-dimensional characters indicated by "G" to "J" in front of the rearmost image. The image is displayed. Further, the separate storage data stored in the second mode area 145b is stored and held while the power supply to the VRAM 134 is continued.

Here, the number of objects to be set in the background drawing data PD1 corresponding to the first display mode is larger than that of the background drawing data PD2 corresponding to the second display mode. Then, if the switching from the second display mode to the first display mode is performed in a situation where the processing load on the VDP 135 is large, there is a concern that the VDP 135 may drop processing. On the other hand, the processing load is large because the separate storage data for the first display mode, out of the separate storage data for both, is created by using the time during which the initial setting is performed when the power is turned on. When the display mode is switched to the first display mode under some circumstances, the processing error can be avoided by using the separately stored data.

On the other hand, the background drawing data PD2 corresponding to the second display mode has a small processing load on the VDP 135 for creating the background drawing data PD2, and is switched to the second display mode even when the processing load on the VDP 135 is large. It is set to prevent processing omissions. However, when the drawing data PD2 for the background corresponding to the second display mode is also separately stored, and the processing load is relatively large even if the processing omission does not occur, the switching to the second display mode is performed. , The separately stored data is used.

By creating the separate save data as described above, as shown in the timings of t4 to t9, when the display mode switching is repeatedly executed in a short time, the separate save data is created in each display mode. By displaying the image for the background by utilizing it, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of processing omission.

In addition, the target of separate storage is the background image, and does not include individual images for which variations such as designs are noticeable. As a result, when the display mode is switched in a situation where the individual image is fluctuating, even if the image is displayed using the separately saved data, the movement of the individual image in which the fluctuation is noticed is continued. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

The display mode is not limited to two stages, and may be set in three stages or four or more stages. Even in this case, it is possible to favorably switch the display mode by separately storing the drawing data for the background corresponding to each display mode.

Further, it may be configured such that the switching of the symbol type is performed without waiting, regardless of the display mode switching timing. In addition, the design may be different between the display modes.

Further, the effect character may be switched depending on the display mode. In this case, the effect character may not be a target of separate storage, or may be a target of separate storage.

<Structure for displaying three-dimensional image using connected object>
Next, a configuration for displaying a three-dimensional image using a connected object will be described.

The connected object is a unit of objects in which a plurality of part objects (partial objects) are connected with a connecting portion as a joint, and in order to give a motion to a character of a three-dimensional image by relatively displacing each part object. It is set. By using the connected object, the character of the three-dimensional image can be smoothly moved. In addition, considering that the connected object has a skeleton portion and a joint portion, it can be referred to as a bone model.

The connected object is set to display a character performing a predetermined action. Here, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of connected objects for displaying a common character are set. The plurality of types of connected objects will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B, a first connected object PC15 and a second connected object PC16 are set in order to display a common character. Each of the first connected object PC15 and the second connected object PC16 has a plurality of connected portions CT1 and CT2, but the connected portions CT1 and CT2 are set at mutually different positions.

Specifically, the first connected object PC15 does not have a connecting portion at the knee portion, but has a connecting portion CT1 at the elbow portion, as shown in FIGS. 29(a-1) and (a-2). It is possible to display the operation as shown. On the other hand, the second connected object PC16 does not have a connecting portion at the elbow portion, but has a connecting portion CT2 at the knee portion, as shown in FIGS. 29(b-1) and (b-2). The operation can be displayed. By setting the connecting parts at different positions as described above, it is possible to make the character perform different actions depending on whether the first connected object PC15 is used or the second connected object PC16 is used. Becomes

Note that the two connected objects PC15 and PC16 have the connecting portions CT1 and CT2 at the common location, but may have a configuration that does not have the connecting portions CT1 and CT2 at the common location. Further, although a common texture is mapped to both connected objects PC15 and PC16, the texture may be set individually for each. The positions of the connecting portions CT1 and CT2 and the types of the characters are arbitrary as long as it is possible to make the character perform different actions by preparing a plurality of connecting objects PC15 and PC16.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for displaying a state in which a character is moving using the above-described connected objects PC15 and PC16 will be described.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing for the connected object executed by the display CPU 131. The calculation process for the connected object is executed by the effect calculation process in step S904 of the task process (FIG. 14). In addition, the arithmetic processing for the connected object is started when the data table corresponding to the game time in which the effect using the connected objects PC15 and PC16 is executed is set.

First, in step S1901, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not the effect using the linked objects PC15 and PC16 is being executed (the character is being displayed). If the effect is not being executed, it is determined in step S1902 whether or not it is the start timing of the effect using the connected objects PC15 and PC16. If it is not the start timing, the present arithmetic processing is terminated as it is, and if it is the start timing, the process proceeds to step S1903.

In step S1903, the start designation information of the connected object effect is stored, and in the following step S1904, the first connected object PC15 and the second connected object PC16 are grasped as control targets based on the currently set data table. To do. By the way, at the execution timing of the process of step S1904, the control start process is completed for both connected objects PC15 and PC16 in the immediately preceding control start setting process (step S901). Further, the control information of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 whose control has been started is stored and held in the work RAM 132 until the series of effects of this time using the connected objects PC15 and PC16 is completed.

In subsequent step S1905, various parameters of the first connected object PC15 are calculated to update the control information related to the first connected object PC15. In step S1906, various parameters of the second connected object PC16 are calculated to update the control information related to the second connected object PC16.

In the following step S1907, the designation information of the first effect period is stored. Here, in the effect using the connected objects PC15 and PC16, the entire effect period is divided into a plurality of types of effect periods, specifically, a first effect period, a second effect period, and a third effect period. Then, the character is displayed using the first connected object PC15 during the first effect period and the third effect period, and the character is displayed using the second connected object PC16 during the second effect period. After that, in step S1908, the parameter of the first connected object PC15 of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 is set so as to be specified in the current drawing list.

In a succeeding step S1909, another object for the first effect period and an object to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. By the way, at the execution timing of the process of step S1909, the control start process is completed for the object to be updated this time in the immediately preceding control start setting process (step S901). Thereafter, in step S1910, various parameters of the other object thus grasped are calculated to update the control information relating to these other objects, and then the present calculation processing is ended.

When the arithmetic process for the connected object is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output process is set with the information of the use instruction of both the connected objects PC15 and PC16 and The parameters of the first connected object PC15 are set for the objects PC15 and PC16. Further, the start designation information of the connected object effect indicating that the effect using the connected objects PC15 and PC16 should be started and the specification information of the first effect period indicating the first effect period are set in the drawing list. To be done.

On the other hand, when the effect using the linked objects PC15 and PC16 is being executed (step S1901: YES), in step S1911, is it during the first effect period based on the currently set data table? Determine whether or not. In the case of the first effect period, after executing the processing of step S1904 to step S1910, the present calculation processing is ended. By the way, since this time is in the first effect period, the first connected object PC15 performs a predetermined first operation (see FIG. 29(a)) along with the progress of the first effect period. First, the parameters are calculated in step S1905.

When the arithmetic process for the connected object is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output process is set with the information of the use instruction of both the connected objects PC15 and PC16 and The parameters of the first connected object PC15 are set for the objects PC15 and PC16. Further, the designation information of the first effect period indicating that it is the first effect period is set in the drawing list.

If it is determined in step S1911 that it is not in the first effect period, it is determined in step S1912 based on the currently set data table whether or not it is in the second effect period. In the case of the second effect period, in step S1913, the first connected object PC15 and the second connected object PC16 are grasped as control targets based on the currently set data table.

In the following step S1914, various parameters of the first connected object PC15 are calculated to update the control information related to the first connected object PC15. Further, in step S1915, various parameters of the second connected object PC16 are calculated to update the control information related to the second connected object PC16. By the way, since this time is in the second effect period, the second connected object PC16 performs a predetermined second operation (see FIG. 29(b)) along with the progress of the second effect period. In addition, parameter calculation is performed in step S1915.

In the following step S1916, the designation information of the second effect period is stored, and in step S1917, the parameter of the second linked object PC16 of both linked objects PC15, PC16 is designated in the current drawing list. Set.

In a succeeding step S1918, another object for the second effect period which is an object to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. Here, in the second effect period, the effect is more developed than in the first effect period, and at least the number of objects displayed when switching from the first effect period to the second effect period increases. The control start setting process (step S901) for the object increased by the change from the first effect period to the second effect period is completed at the execution timing of the process of step S1918. Then, in step S1919, the various parameters of the other object thus grasped are calculated to update the control information relating to these other objects, and then the present calculation processing is ended.

When the arithmetic process for the connected object is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output process is set with the information of the use instruction of both the connected objects PC15 and PC16 and The parameters of the second connected object PC16 are set for the objects PC15 and PC16. Further, the designation information of the second effect period indicating that it is the second effect period is set in the drawing list.

If it is determined in step S1912 that it is not in the second effect period, it means that it is the third effect period, and therefore the process proceeds to step S1920. In step S1920, the first connected object PC15 and the second connected object PC16 are grasped as control targets based on the currently set data table.

In subsequent step S1921, various parameters of the first connected object PC15 are calculated to update the control information related to the first connected object PC15. By the way, since this time is in the third effect period, the first connected object PC15 performs a predetermined first operation (see FIG. 29(a)) along with the progress of the third effect period. Then, in step S1921, the parameters are calculated. Further, in step S1922, various parameters of the second connected object PC16 are calculated to update the control information related to the second connected object PC16.

In the following step S1923, the designation information of the third effect period is stored, and further, in step S1924, the parameter of the first coupled object PC15 of the coupled objects PC15 and PC16 is designated in the current rendering list. Set.

In a succeeding step S1925, another object for the third effect period, which is an object to be updated this time, is grasped based on the currently set data table. Here, in the third effect period, the effect is more developed than in the second effect period, and at least the number of objects displayed when switching from the second effect period to the third effect period increases. The control start setting process (step S901) for the increased amount of objects when switching from the second effect period to the third effect period is completed at the execution timing of the process of step S1925. Then, in step S1926, the various parameters of the other object thus grasped are calculated to update the control information relating to these other objects, and then the present calculation processing is ended.

When the arithmetic process for the connected object is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output process is set with the information of the use instruction of both the connected objects PC15 and PC16 and The parameters of the first connected object PC15 are set for the objects PC15 and PC16. Also, the designation information of the third effect period indicating that it is the third effect period is set in the drawing list.

Next, the setting process for the connected object effect executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for the connected object effect is executed in the effect setting process of step S1003 in the drawing process (FIG. 16). Further, the setting process for the connected object effect is activated when the start designation of the connected object effect or the designation of the first effect period to the third effect period is set in the current drawing list.

First, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the start designation of the connected object effect is set in the current drawing list. If it is set, in step S2002, the address where the first connected object PC15 is stored in the memory module 133 is grasped based on the drawing list this time, and the first connected object PC15 is set. read out. In step S2003, the address where the second connected object PC16 is stored in the memory module 133 is grasped based on the current drawing list, and the second connected object PC16 is read.

In a succeeding step S2004, a uniform α value setting process for the first effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first connected object PC15 is set to “1” that is opaque information, and the uniform α value of the second connected object PC16 is set to “0” that is completely transparent information. To do. As a result, the preset color information (including the information of the α value set to each pixel from the beginning) is applied as it is to all the pixels of the first connected object PC15, whereas The α value of “0” is uniformly applied to all the pixels of the second connected object PC16.

In the following step S2005, the parameter designated for the first connected object PC15 in the current drawing list is grasped as the parameter of both connected objects PC15 and PC16. Then, in step S2006, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for both connected objects PC15 and PC16.

Since this time is the processing time related to the start designation of the connected object effect, both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are arranged in the world coordinate system. Further, the shapes of the two connected objects PC15 and PC16 are substantially the same, but the connected portions of the respective component objects are different. Then, even if the parameters of the first connected object PC15 are applied to the second connected object PC16 as they are, there are pixels whose coordinate designations do not match, but such pixels are subjected to predetermined adjustment on the VDP 135 side. ..

In a succeeding step S2007, other objects for the first effect period designated in the drawing list this time are grasped, and in step S2008, various parameters designated for the object are grasped. After that, in step S2009, the setting process for the world coordinate system is executed for the object, and then the setting process for the effect of the connected object is ended.

By executing the setting process for the connected object effect as described above, the arrangement of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 is started simultaneously in the world coordinate system. Further, since the same parameter is applied to both connected objects PC15 and PC16, both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are arranged so as to overlap at the same position in the world coordinate system. However, since the second connected object PC16 is treated as a completely transparent object at the time of rendering because the processing of step S2004 is executed, the first connected object PC15 of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 is displayed on the display surface G. Only PC15 is displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2001 that the start designation of the linked object effect is not set in the current drawing list, the process proceeds to step S2010. In step S2010, it is determined whether or not the designation of the first effect period is set in the drawing list this time.

If it is set, the process of steps S2004 to S2009 is executed, and then the present setting process is ended. In this case, in step S2006, various parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 set in the world coordinate system are grasped from information of parameters set in the drawing list in association with the first connected object PC15. Update.

By executing the setting process for the connection object effect as described above, various parameters of both connection objects PC15 and PC16 are updated, but since the process of step S2004 is executed, both connection objects are displayed on the display surface G. Of the objects PC15 and PC16, only the first connected object PC15 is displayed. Further, since the parameter updated in step S2005 corresponds to the first connected object PC15, the first connection is performed so that the first operation is performed on the display surface G with the progress of the first effect period. The object PC 15 is displayed.

When it is determined in step S2010 that the designation of the first effect period is not set in the current drawing list, the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, it is determined whether or not the designation of the second effect period is set in the drawing list this time.

If it is set, in step S2012, a process of setting a uniform α value for the second effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first connected object PC15 is set to “0” which is completely transparent information, and the uniform α value of the second connected object PC16 is set to “1” which is opaque information. To do. As a result, the preset color information (including the information of the α value set to each pixel from the beginning) is applied as it is to all the pixels of the second connected object PC16, whereas The α value of “0” is uniformly applied to all pixels of the connected object PC15 of 1.

In the following step S2013, the parameter specified for the second connected object PC16 in the current drawing list is grasped as the parameter of both connected objects PC15, PC16. Then, in step S2014, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for both connected objects PC15 and PC16.

Since this time is the processing time relating to the update of the second effect period, various parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 set in the world coordinate system are set in the drawing list so as to correspond to the second connected object PC16. Check the parameter information and update it. In this case, the shapes of the two connected objects PC15 and PC16 are substantially the same, but the connected parts of the respective component objects are different. Then, even if the parameters of the second connected object PC16 are applied to the first connected object PC15 as they are, there are pixels whose coordinate designations do not match, but such pixels are subjected to a predetermined adjustment on the VDP 135 side. ..

In a succeeding step S2015, other objects for the second effect period designated in the drawing list this time are grasped, and in step S2016, various parameters designated for the object are grasped. Then, in step S2017, the setting process for the world coordinate system is executed for the object, and then the setting process for the main connected object effect is finished. Here, when the current processing time is the timing related to switching from the first effect period to the second effect period, the number of objects to be displayed increases, so in step S2017, the corresponding process is executed. ..

By executing the setting process for the connection object effect as described above, various parameters of both connection objects PC15 and PC16 are updated, but since the process of step S2012 is executed, both connection objects are displayed on the display surface G. Of the objects PC15 and PC16, only the second connected object PC16 is displayed. Further, since the parameter updated in step S2013 corresponds to the second connected object PC16, the second connection is performed on the display surface G along with the progress of the second effect period. The object PC 16 is displayed.

If it is determined in step S2011 that the designation of the second effect period is not set in the current drawing list, it means that the designation of the third effect period is set in the current drawing list. It proceeds to step S2018.

In step S2018, a process for setting a uniform α value for the third effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first connected object PC15 is set to “1” that is opaque information, and the uniform α value of the second connected object PC16 is set to “0” that is completely transparent information. To do. As a result, the preset color information (including the information of the α value set to each pixel from the beginning) is applied as it is to all the pixels of the first connected object PC15, whereas The α value of “0” is uniformly applied to all the pixels of the second connected object PC16.

In the following step S2019, the parameters specified for the first connected object PC15 in the current drawing list are grasped as the parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16. Then, in step S2020, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for both connected objects PC15 and PC16.

Since this time is the processing time related to the update of the third effect period, various parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 set in the world coordinate system are set in the drawing list in association with the first connected object PC15. Check the parameter information and update it.

In a succeeding step S2021, other objects for the third effect period designated in the drawing list this time are grasped, and in step S2022, various parameters designated for the object are grasped. Then, in step S2023, the setting process for the world coordinate system is executed for the object, and then the setting process for the effect of the connected object is ended. Here, when the processing time this time is the timing related to the switching from the second effect period to the third effect period, the number of objects to be displayed increases, so in step S2023, a process corresponding to that is executed. ..

By executing the setting process for the connection object effect as described above, various parameters of both connection objects PC15 and PC16 are updated, but since the process of step S2018 is executed, both connection objects are displayed on the display surface G. Of the objects PC15 and PC16, only the first connected object PC15 is displayed. Further, since the parameter updated in step S2019 corresponds to the first connected object PC15, the first connection is performed on the display surface G along with the progress of the third effect period. The object PC 15 is displayed.

Next, the contents of the connected object effect will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the connected object effect. 32A shows the first effect period, FIG. 32B shows the second effect period, and FIG. 32C shows the third effect period. 32(a-1), (b-1), and (c-1) are image diagrams of the world coordinate system, and FIGS. 32(a-2), (b-2), and (c-2) are The display surface G is shown. Although the background image and the pattern are omitted in FIGS. 32(a-2), (b-2), and (c-2), the background image is actually displayed on the back side of the image for each effect. At the same time, the design is displayed on the front side.

In the first effect period, as shown in FIG. 32(a-1), both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are set in the world coordinate system, but the second connected object PC16 is transparentized. .. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32(a-2), the character CH3 corresponding to the first connected object PC15 is displayed on the display surface G, and the first motion is performed along with the progress of the first effect period. .. Characters CH4 to CH6 shown in "A" to "C" are displayed as images corresponding to other objects.

In the second effect period, as shown in FIG. 32(b-1), both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are set in the world coordinate system, but the first connected object PC15 is subjected to the transparency processing. .. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32(b-2), the character CH3 corresponding to the second connected object PC16 is displayed on the display surface G, and the second motion is performed as the second effect period progresses. ..

Here, when comparing FIG. 32(a-2) and FIG. 32(b-2), it is shown that both characters CH3 have different shapes, but in reality, both connected objects PC15, The same texture is mapped to the PC 16 so that the connecting portion (joint portion) becomes inconspicuous. Therefore, even if the first effect period is switched to the second effect period, the same, substantially the same, or similar image is displayed on the display surface G for the character CH3, which makes it difficult for the player to recognize the change. .. However, if it is difficult for the player to recognize the occurrence of switching, textures may be set individually for both connected objects PC15 and PC16.

Further, in the second effect period, the characters CH4 to CH8 indicated by "A" to "E" are displayed as images corresponding to other objects. The number of characters CH4 to CH8 is greater than that in the first effect period.

In the third effect period, as shown in FIG. 32(c-1), both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are set in the world coordinate system, but the transparent processing is performed on the second connected object PC16. .. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32(c-2), the character CH3 corresponding to the first connected object PC15 is displayed on the display surface G, and the first motion is performed as the third effect period progresses. .. In the third effect period, the characters CH4 to CH10 shown in "A" to "G" are displayed as images corresponding to other objects. The number of characters CH4 to CH10 is greater than that in the second effect period.

As described above, since the plurality of connected objects PC15 and PC16 are set for the common character, the connected objects PC15 and PC16 to be displayed can be switched according to the type of motion using the joint portion. .. For example, if a plurality of types of operations are to be performed by a single connected object, it is necessary to set the corresponding number of connected portions and part objects for the single connected object. Then, the data capacity of one image data becomes large, and there is a concern that the memory module 133 may exceed the capacity that can be stored as a single image data. There is a concern that the processing time and transfer time will be longer. On the other hand, since it is set as a plurality of connected objects PC15 and PC16, it is possible to cause the character to perform a plurality of types of motions without causing the inconveniences described above.

In addition, in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, there are many occasions in which the effects are modified, and if the entire movement of the connected object is reviewed every time the motion of the character is modified, it takes a lot of time for the design. turn into. On the other hand, by setting a plurality of connected objects PC15 and PC16 according to the type of operation to be performed as described above, even if it is necessary to correct the effect, the already-created connected object PC15 , It becomes unnecessary to modify all of the PC 16. Therefore, it is possible to cause the character to perform a plurality of types of motions while allowing the pachinko machine 10 to be designed well.

Further, not only the switching source object but also the switching destination object before the timing at which the connected object is switched to display the character is set as the control target in the display CPU 131 and arranged in the world coordinate system in the VDP 135. To be targeted. Thus, when the switching timing comes, the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135 do not execute the control start processing for the switching destination object, but execute the control update processing having a processing load smaller than that of the control start processing. Therefore, the processing load at the switching timing is reduced.

In particular, at the switching timing, the effect develops and the number of displayed objects increases, so that the processing load on the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135 becomes relatively large. In this case, assuming a configuration in which the control start processing is performed on the switching destination object, there is a concern that processing omission may occur in the display CPU 131 or the VDP 135. However, as described above, the control updating processing is performed on the switching destination object. Since it may be executed, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the processing omission.

Further, since both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system and the uniform α value to be applied is switched between the completely transparent information and the non-transparent information, the display CPU 131 has a uniform α value for both switching. Switching may be designated, and in the VDP 135, the uniform α value to be applied may be switched according to the designation. Therefore, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved while suppressing the complication of the processing configuration of the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135.

Further, the display CPU 131 provides the VDP 135 with only the parameter information for the connected object to be displayed of the connected objects PC15 and PC16 that are simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system. As a result, the amount of data set in the drawing list can be reduced. Further, in the VDP 135, the parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 may be updated in the same manner, so that the processing load of the VDP 135 can be reduced.

In addition, in the switching from the first effect period to the third effect period, instead of or in addition to the increase in the number of characters, the action of the effect character different from the character in which the plurality of connected objects are prepared is performed. The configuration may be newly added, or the configuration may be such that, in addition to the character in which the plurality of connected objects are prepared, the display of the effect character having a large processing load is started.

The control start timing of the display CPU 131 of the second connected object PC 16 and the control start timing of the VDP 135 may not be the same as those of the first connected object PC 15. For example, the timing may be before the switching timing from the first effect period to the second effect period but after the control start timing of the first connected object PC15.

Further, although the processing load at the switching timing of the effect period is larger than that of the above configuration, the control of the second connected object PC 16 may be started at the switching timing. In this case, since the first connected object PC15 and the second connected object PC16 are not arranged in the world coordinate system at the same time, it is not necessary to uniformly control the α value and switch the display target.

Further, for both connected objects PC15 and PC16 that are simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system, the display object may be switched not by uniformly adjusting the α value, but by switching the rendering object. In this case, since the connected object on the side that is not the display target is not rendered, the processing load at the time of rendering is reduced as compared with the above configuration.

In addition, the configuration may be such that the third effect period is not provided, or the effect period longer than the fourth effect period may be set. Further, three or more connected objects may be prepared for one character.

<Structure for producing particle dispersion>
Next, a configuration for performing the particle dispersion effect will be described.

The particle dispersion effect is an effect that is displayed as if a large number of single particle images are dispersed over a plurality of consecutive frames (a plurality of image update timings). At the time of this dispersion, at least some of the images of a large number of single particle images are displayed such that they are displaced in different orbits. In the particle dispersion rendering, a particle dispersion object having a large number of vertex data set in a one-to-one correspondence with a large number of single particle images, and a particle dispersion object set in correspondence with the particle dispersion object. A particle-dispersing texture having a large number of single-piece image data for displaying single-piece particle images respectively corresponding to positions corresponding to the data is used.

The particle dispersion object and the particle dispersion texture will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 33(a) and 33(b). FIG. 33(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the particle dispersion object PC17, and FIG. 33(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the particle dispersion texture PC18.

As shown in FIG. 33A, the particle dispersion object PC17 includes vertex data, coordinate data corresponding to the vertex data, and other data other than these. A large number of vertex data are set as vertex (1), vertex (2), vertex (3),..., Vertex (99), vertex (100), and in the VDP135, the object for particle dispersion is set by these vertex data. Each vertex on the PC 17 is identified. A large number of coordinate data are set in correspondence with each vertex data in a one-to-one correspondence, such as coordinate (1), coordinate (2), coordinate (3),..., Coordinate (99), coordinate (100). , VDP135 recognizes the position of each vertex in the particle dispersion object PC17 in the world coordinate system based on these coordinate data.

Other data include, for example, initial scale data of the particle dispersion object PC17, initial α value data uniformly applied to all vertex data, and initial rotation angle data of the particle dispersion object PC17. include.

As shown in FIG. 33B, the particle-dispersion texture PC 18 includes simplex data, correlation data corresponding to the simplex data, simplex image data corresponding to the simplex data, and other data other than these. Is included. The unit image data corresponds to each unit data in a one-to-one manner, and unit image data (1), unit image data (2), unit image data (3),..., Unit image data (99), unit image data Many are set as image data (100). Each single image data includes, for example, at least a combination of bitmap format data and a color palette table referred to when determining a display color at each pixel of the bitmap image. Each single image data is data for displaying the same type of particle single image. Specifically, the data is for displaying "spherical bubbles", and the shape, size in the initial state, and color of the "spherical bubbles" are different in part or all of each single image data. In this case, even if all the single image data are set in the scale in the initial state in order to increase the number of single particle images to be displayed simultaneously while reducing the processing load on the VDP 135 when executing the particle dispersion effect, On the display surface G, it is possible to simultaneously display the single particle images.

Note that the types of particles may be different for at least a part or all of the individual image data. Further, the particles may be of the same type and have the same shape, the same scale and color in the initial state.

The individual data of the particle dispersion texture PC 18 is set to a large number of single (1), single (2), single (3),..., Single (99), single (100). A large number of individual image data set in the particle dispersion texture PC 18 are individually recognized by the data. Correlation data is associated with each unit data in a one-to-one correspondence, and a large number of vertices (1), vertices (2), vertices (3),..., Vertices (99), vertices (100) are set. , VDP 135 recognizes from the correlation data which single image data in the particle dispersion texture PC 18 corresponds to each vertex data in the particle dispersion object PC 17.

Other data includes α value data individually applied to each single image data, α value data uniformly applied to each single image data, and the like.

Here, initial data is set for each coordinate data in the particle dispersion object PC 17, and these initial data have different coordinates. Each coordinate data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is rewritable, and when the particle dispersion object PC17 is set in the world coordinate system, each of the coordinate data is rewritten to data of coordinates different from the initial data. It is set in the specified state. A plurality of types of key data KD1 to KD3 are set as reference data for rewriting used to perform such rewriting.

At least two types of key data KD1 to KD3 are set, and specifically, as shown in FIGS. 33(c) to (e), first key data KD1, second key data KD2, and third key data are set. Three types of KD3 are set. Each of these key data KD1 to KD3 includes correlation data and coordinate data corresponding to the correlation data.

Specifically, the correlation data of the first key data KD1, the correlation data of the second key data KD2, and the correlation data of the third key data KD3 are all the respective vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 to which they are applied. They are set in a one-to-one correspondence, and a large number of vertices (1), vertices (2), vertices (3),..., Vertices (99), vertices (100) are set.

On the other hand, the coordinate data of the first key data KD1, the coordinate data of the second key data KD2, and the coordinate data of the third key data KD3 are respectively set in a large number in a one-to-one correspondence with each correlation data. There is a difference when comparing the same correlation data.

Specifically, the coordinate data of the first key data KD1 includes coordinates (1-1), coordinates (2-1), coordinates (3-1),..., Coordinates (99-1), coordinates (100 -1) are set in large numbers, and the coordinate data of the second key data KD2 is coordinate (1-2), coordinate (2-2), coordinate (3-2),..., Coordinate (99-2). ), a large number of coordinates (100-2) are set, and the coordinate data of the third key data KD3 includes coordinates (1-3), coordinates (2-3), coordinates (3-3),... A large number of coordinates (99-3) and coordinates (100-3) are set. Further, the coordinate data corresponding to the vertex (1) is coordinate (1-1) in the first key data KD1, coordinate (1-2) in the second key data KD2, and coordinate (1-2) in the third key data KD3. 1-3), and the coordinate data corresponding to the vertex (100) is the coordinate (100-1) in the first key data KD1, the coordinate (100-2) in the second key data KD2, and the third key. In the data KD3, different coordinate data is set for each vertex data so as to have the coordinate (100-3).

Incidentally, the key data KD1 to KD3 are set to have a smaller data capacity than the particle dispersion object PC17 because of the relationship that the α value data and the rotation angle data are not set.

As described above, each of the key data KD1 to KD3 is set to determine the displacement trajectory of each single particle image, and the order of application to the particle dispersion object PC17 is predetermined. Specifically, the second key data KD2 is used when setting the coordinate data on the side in the displacement direction of each particle simpler image than the first key data KD1, and the third key data KD3 is the second key data. It is used when setting the coordinate data on the side of the displacement direction of each particle single image rather than KD2. When the particle dispersion object PC17 is set to the world coordinate system, the coordinate data of the key data KD1 to KD3 is applied to each vertex data, so that each particle single image corresponding to each vertex data is respectively. Displace on the orbit.

In this case, the plurality of key data KD1 to KD3, more specifically, the coordinate data of the two key data KD1 to KD3 are applied to each vertex data in a fused state at least for a predetermined number of frames. .. Specifically, the first key data KD1 that determines the coordinate data of each vertex data in the first frame (that is, the image update timing) of the particle dispersion effect is the first frame number that is a plurality of frames after the first frame. It is used for the first frame period corresponding to (for example, 99 frames). The second key data KD2 corresponds to the first frame period, the first switching target frame corresponding to the next frame with respect to the first frame period, and the second frame number corresponding to a plurality of subsequent frames. It is used for two frame periods. The third key data KD3 is used over the second frame period. In this case, the first frame number and the second frame number are the same.

It should be noted that the fourth key data may be set after the third key data KD3. In this case, the third key data KD3 is stored in the second frame period and the frame next to the second frame period. And a second switching target frame corresponding to the second switching target frame, and a third frame number corresponding to the third frame number (the same number as the first frame number and the second frame number) that is a plurality of subsequent frames, The fourth key data is used over the third frame period.

With such a configuration, the number of the key data KD1 to KD3 is smaller than the number of consecutive frames when the particle dispersion effect is executed, more specifically, in the particle dispersion object PC17 during the particle dispersion effect. Even with the configuration in which the coordinate data of each vertex data is set to a number smaller than the number of times the coordinate data is changed, it is possible to smoothly display the displacement of each single particle image.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the particle dispersion effect using the particle dispersion object PC17, the particle dispersion texture PC18, and each of the key data KD1 to KD3 will be described. The particle dispersion object PC17, the particle dispersion texture PC18, and the respective key data KD1 to KD3 are stored in advance in the memory module 133.

FIG. 34A is a flowchart showing the calculation process for particle dispersion effect executed by the display CPU 131. The calculation process for the particle dispersion effect is executed by the operation process for effect in step S904 of the task process (FIG. 14). Further, the calculation process for the particle dispersion effect is started when the data table corresponding to the game time in which the particle dispersion effect is executed is set.

First, in step S2101, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not the particle dispersion effect is being executed. If the effect is not being executed, it is determined in step S2102 whether it is the timing for starting the particle dispersion effect. If it is not the start timing, this operation processing is ended as it is, and if it is the start timing, the process proceeds to step S2103.

In step S2103, the particle dispersion object PC17 is grasped as a control target based on the currently set data table. By the way, at the execution timing of the process of step S2103, the control start process is completed for the particle dispersion object PC17 in the immediately preceding control start setting process (step S901). The control information of the particle dispersion object PC17 whose control has been started is stored and held in the work RAM 132 until the particle dispersion effect is completed.

In a succeeding step S2104, an initial reading process for reading the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 from the memory module 133 is executed, and in the step S2105, various parameters other than the coordinates are calculated for the particle dispersion object PC17. , And updates the control information related to the particle dispersion object PC17. After that, in step S2106, after the start designation information of the particle dispersion effect is stored, the calculation process is ended.

When the calculation process for the particle dispersion effect is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output process contains the information of the instruction to use the particle dispersion object PC17 of the particle dispersion texture PC18. The first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 read out in step S2104 and the parameters calculated in step S2105 are set together with the information on the use instruction. Further, the particle dispersion effect start designation information indicating that the particle dispersion effect should be started is set in the drawing list.

When it is determined in step S2101 that the particle dispersion effect is being performed, it is determined in step S2107 based on the currently set data table whether or not it is the update timing of the key data. Such update timing corresponds to the above-mentioned first switching target frame.

When it is not the update timing of the key data (step S2107: NO), the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S2108, the particle dispersion object PC17 is grasped as a control target based on the currently set data table.

In a succeeding step S2109, processing for determining the blending ratio of the key data is executed. In the process for determining the blend ratio, the currently set two key data KD1 to KD3 are referred to by referring to the blend table BT stored in the memory module 133 as shown in FIG. The data of the blend ratio at the time of blending each coordinate data of is read, and each coordinate data is blended by the read data.

Regarding the blending table BT, in detail, the number of frames is set in the blending table BT, and the data of the number of frames is set in one-to-one correspondence with the key data on the front side. A ratio to be applied to each coordinate data set and a ratio to be applied to each coordinate data set in the rear key data are set. In this case, the blending table BT is set such that the blending ratio changes at a constant rate each time the number of frames increases by 1, that is, each time the coordinates of the individual particle images are updated. Specifically, for the key data on the front side, the ratio when blending by 1% decreases at each update timing, and for the key data on the rear side, 1% at each update timing. The blending table BT is set such that the ratio at the time of blending increases, and the sum of the ratio of the front key data and the ratio of the rear key data becomes 100% at each update timing.

It should be noted that the blending table BT is not limited to the configuration in which the ratio is changed by 1% at each update timing, and is set to 2% or 3%. It may be set so as to change by at least %, or may be set so as to change at a different ratio instead of a constant ratio.

In step S2109, the blending table BT is referred to based on the currently set data table. In step S2109, the number of frames to be referred to in the blending table BT is grasped based on the current pointer information set in the data table, and the key data of the front side set to the number of frames is stored. The ratio and the ratio of the rear key data are read. In this case, if the currently set data table is the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2, the first key data KD1 corresponds to the front key data and the second key data KD2 corresponds to the rear key data. Corresponds to data.

After that, in step S2110, various parameters other than the coordinates are calculated for the particle dispersion object PC17 to update the control information related to the particle dispersion object PC17, and in step S2111, the particle dispersion effect is produced. After the update designation information is stored, this calculation process is ended.

When the calculation process for the particle dispersion effect is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output process contains the information of the instruction to use the particle dispersion object PC17 of the particle dispersion texture PC18. The blend ratio data set in step S2109 and the parameter calculated in step S2110 are set together with the use instruction information. Further, update designation information of the particle dispersion effect indicating that the particle dispersion effect should be updated is set in the drawing list.

When it is determined in step S2107 that it is the update timing of the key data, the process proceeds to step S2112. In step S2112, the particle dispersion object PC17 is grasped as a control target based on the currently set data table.

In a succeeding step S2113, a process of reading new key data is executed. In this processing, the key data KD1 to KD3 in the next order with respect to the rear key data of the currently set two key data is read from the memory module 133. Specifically, since the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 are currently set, the rear key data among them is the second key data KD2, while the key data in the next order is It becomes the third key data KD3.

After that, in step S2114, various parameters other than the coordinates are calculated for the particle dispersion object PC17 to update the control information related to the particle dispersion object PC17, and in step S2115, the particle dispersion effect is generated. After the update designation information is stored, this calculation process is ended.

When the calculation process for the particle dispersion effect is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output process contains the information of the instruction to use the particle dispersion object PC17 of the particle dispersion texture PC18. The third key data KD3 read out in step S2112 and the parameter calculated in step S2113 are set together with the information on the use instruction. Further, update designation information of the particle dispersion effect indicating that the particle dispersion effect should be updated is set in the drawing list.

By the way, from the next processing time when the third key data KD3 is newly set, a negative determination is made in step S2107 and the processing of steps S2108 to S2111 is executed until the end timing of the particle dispersion effect. In this case, in step S2109, the blend ratio is sequentially determined using the second key data KD2 as the front key data and the second key data KD2 as the rear key data.

Next, the particle dispersion effect setting process executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The particle dispersion effect setting process is executed by the effect setting process of step S1003 in the drawing process (FIG. 16). Further, the setting process for the particle dispersion effect is activated when either the start designation information of the particle dispersion effect or the update designation information of the particle dispersion effect is set in the current drawing list.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the particle dispersion effect start designation information is set in the current drawing list. If it is set, in step S2202, the address where the particle dispersion object PC17 is stored in the memory module 133 is grasped based on the drawing list this time, and the particle dispersion object PC17 is stored in the VRAM134. The data is read into the expansion buffer 141. After that, in step S2203, the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 set in the current drawing list are stored in the register 153.

In subsequent step S2204, an initial application process is executed. In the initial application processing, each coordinate data corresponding to each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is rewritten to each coordinate data set in the first key data KD1 to set the start coordinate of each vertex data. In step S2205, parameters other than the coordinates designated for the particle dispersion object PC17 in the current drawing list are grasped as other parameters of the particle dispersion object PC17.

After that, in step S2206, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for the particle dispersion object PC17, and then this setting process is ended. As a result, the vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is set at the coordinates corresponding to the coordinate data set in the first key data KD1. Further, in the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16) in the VDP 135, for each vertex data set in the coordinates as described above, the single particle image data corresponding to each vertex data is obtained. Is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2201 that the start designation of the particle dispersion effect is not set in the current drawing list, the process proceeds to step S2207. In step S2207, it is determined whether new key data is designated in the current drawing list.

If not specified, coordinate blending processing is executed in step S2008. In the blending process, the two currently set key data, specifically, the coordinate data of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 in the first frame period are set in the drawing list this time. Blend according to the data of the blending ratio.

In this case, first, the coordinate data corresponding to one vertex data of the first key data KD1 is read, and the coordinate data corresponding to the above vertex data of the second key data KD2 is read. Then, the former coordinate data is (x1, y1, z1), the latter coordinate data is (x2, y2, z2), the ratio of the front key data read from the blending table BT is rt1, and the blending table BT is When the ratio of the read back key data is rt2, the blended coordinate data (x, y, z) is
x: x1×rt1+x2×rt2
y: y1×rt1+y2×rt2
z: z1×rt1+z2×rt2
Blend so that Further, such blending is executed on the coordinate data corresponding to all the vertex data.

In a succeeding step S2209, parameters other than the coordinates designated for the particle dispersion object PC17 in the current drawing list are grasped as other parameters of the particle dispersion object PC17. After that, in step S2210, each coordinate data as the blending result in step S2208 is set to the particle dispersion object PC17 already set in the world coordinate system, and the parameters grasped in step S2209 are set to the particles. After setting the distribution object PC 17, the present setting process ends.

In this case, when setting the coordinate data which is the blend result, each coordinate data corresponding to each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is rewritten to each coordinate data which is the blend result in step S2208. As a result, each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is set at the coordinates corresponding to the blending result of step S2208. Further, in the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16) in the VDP 135, for each vertex data set in the coordinates as described above, the single particle image data corresponding to each vertex data is obtained. Is set.

If it is determined in step S2207 that new key data is specified in the current drawing list, key data update processing is executed in step S2211. In the updating process, of the two key data currently stored in the register 153, the key data on the front side, specifically, the first key data KD1 is replaced with the new key data set in the drawing list this time. Specifically, the third key data KD3 is rewritten.

In the following step S2212, application processing at the time of updating is executed. Specifically, each coordinate data set in the second key data KD2 is grasped. In step S2213, parameters other than the coordinates designated for the particle dispersion object PC17 in the current drawing list are grasped as other parameters of the particle dispersion object PC17.

Then, in step S2214, the coordinate data acquired in step S2212 is set in the particle dispersion object PC17 already set in the world coordinate system, and the parameters acquired in step S2214 are set for the particle dispersion. After setting the object PC 17, the present setting process ends.

In this case, when setting the coordinate data obtained in step S2212, the coordinate data corresponding to the vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is rewritten with the coordinate data obtained in step S2212. As a result, each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is set at the coordinates corresponding to the second key data KD2. Further, in the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16) in the VDP 135, for each vertex data set in the coordinates as described above, the single particle image data corresponding to each vertex data is obtained. Is set.

By the way, from the next processing time when the third key data KD3 is newly set, a negative determination is made in step S2207 and the processing of steps S2208 to S2210 is executed until the end timing of the particle dispersion effect. In this case, in step S2208, coordinate blending is performed using the second key data KD2 and the third key data KD3.

Next, the content of the particle dispersion effect will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 36(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the particle dispersion effect, and FIGS. 36(b-1) and 36(b-2) show in a simplified manner the trajectory of each particle simplex image. It is an explanatory view for explaining.

As shown in FIG. 36(a), the particle dispersion effect is executed as an effect for game times, and specifically, when a combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed on one effective line when the game times are finished. Then, the particle dispersion effect is executed. In the particle dispersion effect, a large number of single particle images PT that are “spherical bubbles” are displayed on the display surface G, and the large number of single particle images PT are displaced in predetermined orbits over a plurality of consecutive frames. Displayed in.

The specific trajectory will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 36(b-1) and (b-2). In the state where each coordinate data of the first key data KD1 is set, the particle single image PT1, Each of the particle single image PT2 and the particle single image PT3 is displayed at a position corresponding to the start coordinate indicated by the solid line in FIG. 36(b-1). In this case, the individual particle images PT1 to PT3 are displayed at different positions.

In the subsequent first frame period, the blend processing of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 is executed, so that the particle single image PT1, as shown by the chain double-dashed line in FIG. 36(b-1), The particle single image PT2 and the particle single image PT3 are displayed as if they are displaced in different trajectories. In this case, since the coordinates are determined by blending the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2, the displacement trajectories of the individual particle images PT1 to PT3 are linear.

When the first frame period has elapsed, the coordinate data of the second key data KD2 is set, so that the particle single image PT1, the particle single image PT2, and the particle single image PT3 are respectively displayed in FIG. It is displayed at the position corresponding to the switching target coordinates indicated by the solid line in 2). In this case, the individual particle images PT1 to PT3 are displayed at different positions.

In the subsequent second frame period, the blend processing of the second key data KD2 and the third key data KD3 is executed, so that the particle single image PT1, as shown by the chain double-dashed line in FIG. 36(b-2), The particle single image PT2 and the particle single image PT3 are displayed as if they are displaced in different trajectories. In this case, since the coordinates are determined by blending the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2, the displacement trajectories of the individual particle images PT1 to PT3 are linear. Further, the trajectories of the individual particle images PT1 to PT3 in the second frame period are different from the trajectories in the first frame period.

As described above, in the particle dispersion rendering, the coordinate data of each vertex data in the particle dispersion object PC17 is set while using the blend of the plurality of types of key data KD1 to KD3, thereby reducing the data capacity and It is possible to perform a display effect as if a large number of single particle images are dispersed while achieving a balance between the reduction of the processing load.

That is, it is conceivable that the animation data, in which the coordinate data of the single image data is set over the entire number of frames, is set in a one-to-one correspondence with all the single image data. Become. On the other hand, by using the blend of the plurality of types of key data KD1 to KD3 as described above, the required data capacity can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which all the animation data is set as described above. It will be possible.

On the other hand, it is conceivable that the coordinate data of all single image data is calculated only by the processing based on the program, but in this case, if each single image of particles is displayed in a different trajectory, it would be complicated. A huge program is needed. On the other hand, by using the blend of the plurality of types of key data KD1 to KD3 as described above, the information for calculating the coordinate data is appropriately dispersed on the program side and the data side, and the processing is performed. The load can be reduced.

Further, the single image data is not set as an individual object but is set corresponding to each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC 17, so that the data capacity of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 is reduced. It becomes possible.

Further, in the VDP 135 as well, when an object for setting single image data is read, it is possible to read not the individual objects corresponding to each single image data, but the particle dispersion object PC 17, The processing load required for the reading can be reduced.

Further, since the blending process of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 is executed by the VDP 135 instead of the display CPU 131, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the display CPU 131.

<Another form of setting process for particle dispersion production>
FIG. 37 is a flowchart for explaining another mode of the particle dispersion effect setting process executed by the VDP 135.

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the particle dispersion effect start designation information is set in the current drawing list. If set, in step S2302, the address where the particle dispersion object PC17 is stored in the memory module 133 is grasped based on the drawing list this time, and the particle dispersion object PC17 is read. After that, in step S2303, the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 set in the current drawing list are stored in the register 153.

In a succeeding step S2304, the address where the first texture and the second texture are stored in the memory module 133 is grasped based on the drawing list of this time.

Here, in this another embodiment, a plurality of types of textures are set in a one-to-one correspondence with the respective key data KD1 to KD3. Specifically, the first texture, the second texture, and the third texture are set in a one-to-one correspondence with the first key data KD1, the second key data KD2, and the third key data KD3. In addition, in the structure in which four or more types of key data are set, four or more types of textures may be set correspondingly.

Similar to the particle-dispersing texture PC 18 shown in FIG. 33, individual texture data is set for each texture in a one-to-one correspondence with each vertex data. Since a plurality of types of textures are set for a single particle-dispersion object PC17 in this way, the types of single image data set for one vertex data of the particle-dispersion object PC17 are a plurality of frames. (That is, the progress of a plurality of update timings), and the change is performed on a large number of vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC 17, more specifically, all vertex data.

For example, in the first texture, the single image data for the first vertex data is the first single image data for displaying the first single image (for example, “◯” shown in FIG. 36), whereas In the two-texture, the single image data for the first vertex data is the second single image data for displaying the second single image (for example, “□” shown in FIG. 36). Similarly, in the first texture, the single image data for the second vertex data is the third single image data for displaying the third single image (for example, “Δ” shown in FIG. 36). In the second texture, the single image data for the second vertex data is the single image data for displaying a single image different from the third single image (for example, “◯” shown in FIG. 36).

After the process of step S2304 is executed, in step S2305, the initial application process is executed as in step S2204. Thereby, each coordinate data corresponding to each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is set to the start coordinate corresponding to each coordinate data set in the first key data KD1.

Thereafter, in step S2306, parameters other than the coordinates designated for the particle dispersion object PC17 in the current drawing list are grasped as other parameters of the particle dispersion object PC17, and in step S2307, After performing the setting process to the world coordinate system for the particle dispersion object PC17, this setting process is ended. Further, in the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16) in the VDP 135, the first texture of the first texture and the second texture is set for each vertex data set in the coordinates as described above. Only applies to the particle dispersion object PC17. As a result, the single image corresponding to the first texture is displayed at the coordinates corresponding to the first key data KD1.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2301 that the start designation of the particle dispersion effect is not set in the current drawing list, the process proceeds to step S2308. In step S2308, it is determined whether new key data is designated in the current drawing list.

If not specified, in step S2309, the numerical information of the blending counter provided in the register 153 is updated so that 1 is added. Here, the blending counter specifies the blending ratio by the VDP 135 when blending coordinate data using a plurality of key data and blending single image data using a plurality of textures. It is a counter for doing.

The blending counter is set to "0" as an initial value, and when the counter value is "1", the ratio of the key data on the front side (for example, the first key data KD1) is set to 99% and the rear side is set. Of the key data (for example, the second key data KD2) is 1%, the ratio of the front texture (for example, the first texture) is 99%, and the ratio of the rear texture (for example, the second texture) is 1%. %. When the counter value is "2", the ratio of the front key data (for example, the first key data KD1) is set to 98%, and the ratio of the rear key data (for example, the second key data KD2) is set to 2. %, and the ratio of the front texture (for example, the first texture) is 98% and the ratio of the rear texture (for example, the second texture) is 2%. When the counter value is "99", the ratio of the front key data (for example, the first key data KD1) is set to 1% and the ratio of the rear key data (for example, the second key data KD2) is set to 99. %, and the ratio of the front side texture (for example, the first texture) is 1% and the rear side texture (for example, the second texture) is 99%. That is, as the number of frames goes forward, the application ratio of the key data on the front side is reduced, while the application ratio of the key data on the rear side is increased, and similarly, the application ratio of the texture on the front side is reduced, while The application rate of the side texture is increased.

The blend ratio information corresponding to the numerical information of the blending counter as described above is stored in the memory module 133 in advance as table information, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the numerical information of the blending counter is not limited to this. The information of the blend ratio corresponding to may be calculated by an arithmetic expression defined by the program.

In a succeeding step S2310, coordinate blending processing is executed. In the blending process, the two currently set key data, specifically, the coordinate data of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 in the first frame period, are updated in step S2309. Blending is performed according to the blending ratio corresponding to the numerical information of the blending counter later. The specific calculation method of this blend is the same as that in step S2208.

In the following step S2311, texture blending processing is executed. In the blending process, the two currently known textures, specifically, the individual image data of the first texture and the second texture in the first frame period are used for blending after the updating process of step S2309. Blend according to the blend ratio corresponding to the numerical information of the counter.

For example, first, the single image data corresponding to one vertex data of the first texture is read, and the single image data corresponding to the above vertex data of the second texture is read. Then, the RGB color information in the former single image data (here, one pixel for convenience of description) is (r1, g1, b1), and the latter single image data (here, one pixel for convenience of description). (R2, g2, b2), the ratio of the front texture corresponding to the numerical information of the blending counter is rt3, and the ratio of the rear texture corresponding to the numerical information of the blending counter is rt4 (rt3+rt4=1). In this case, the single image data (r, g, b) after blending is
r: r1×rt3+r2×rt4
g: g1×rt3+g2×rt4
b: b1×rt3+b2×rt4
Blend so that Further, such blending is executed on the single image data corresponding to all the vertex data.

After that, in step S2312, parameters other than the coordinates designated for the particle dispersion object PC17 in the current drawing list are grasped as other parameters of the particle dispersion object PC17, and in step S2313, After performing the setting process to the world coordinate system for the particle dispersion object PC17, this setting process is ended.

In this case, when setting the coordinate data which is the blend result, each coordinate data corresponding to each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is rewritten to each coordinate data which is the blend result in step S2310. Further, in the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16) in the VDP 135, the individual image data which is the blend result in step S2311 is added to each vertex data set in the coordinates as described above. Applied. As a result, the single image corresponding to the blending result of step S2311 is displayed at the coordinates corresponding to the blending result of step S2310.

Here, since the VDP 135 side is configured to derive the blend ratio using the blend counter as described above, the display CPU 131 does not execute the process for deriving the blend ratio. As a result, the processing load on the display CPU 131 can be reduced.

It should be noted that the display CPU 131 uses those keys in the case of using a predetermined combination of key data such as a combination of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 and a combination of the second key data KD2 and the third key data KD3. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of times of changing the blending ratio of data is instructed to the VDP 135, and the VDP 135 independently determines the blending ratio at each changing time for the predetermined combination of key data according to the instruction. In this case, when there are a plurality of types of periods in which the same key data is used as a combination of the predetermined key data, if the processing load of the VDP 135 is larger in a specific period than in the other periods, in that specific period. By reducing the number of changes designated by the display CPU 131, the processing load on the VDP 135 can be reduced. Further, in the above-mentioned configuration, the VDP 135 may be set so that the blend ratio is changed at a constant rate at each change time. In this case, each VDP 135 is uniquely set according to the instructed change frequency. Data may be set so that the blend ratio of the change times can be derived, and the blend ratio of each change time may be derived by calculation.

If it is determined in step S2308 that new key data is specified in the current drawing list, the blending counter is initialized in step S2314. As a result, the calculation of the blend ratio is started from the beginning from the next processing time.

In a succeeding step S2315, a key data updating process is executed. In the updating process, of the two key data currently stored in the register 153, the key data on the front side, specifically, the first key data KD1 is replaced with the new key data set in the drawing list this time. Specifically, the third key data KD3 is rewritten. Further, in step S2316, a new texture is grasped. In this process, of the two textures currently stored in the register 153, the front texture, specifically the first texture, is replaced with the new texture set in the drawing list this time, specifically the first texture. Rewrite to 3 textures. Note that the third texture is read from the memory module 133 at the time of this rewriting.

In a succeeding step S2317, application processing at the time of updating is executed. Specifically, each coordinate data set in the second key data KD2 is grasped. In step S2318, parameters other than the coordinates designated for the particle dispersion object PC17 in the current drawing list are grasped as other parameters of the particle dispersion object PC17.

Then, in step S2319, the coordinate data acquired in step S2317 is set for the particle dispersion object PC17 already set in the world coordinate system, and the parameters acquired in step S2318 are used for the particle dispersion. After setting the object PC 17, the present setting process ends.

In this case, when setting each coordinate data, each coordinate data corresponding to each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is rewritten to each coordinate data grasped in step S2317. Further, in the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16) in the VDP 135, the second texture of the second texture and the third texture is set for each vertex data set in the coordinates as described above. Only applies to the particle dispersion object PC17. As a result, the single image corresponding to the second texture is displayed at the coordinates corresponding to the second key data KD2.

By the way, from the next processing time when the third key data KD3 and the third texture are newly set, a negative determination is made in step S2308 until the end timing of the particle dispersion effect, and the processing of steps S2309 to S2313. To execute. In this case, in step S2310, the blending of the coordinates is performed using the second key data KD2 and the third key data KD3, and in step S2311, the blending of the single image data is performed using the second texture and the third texture. It

In another form for executing the particle dispersion effect as described above, the display mode of the particle dispersion effect is changed by the texture applied to the same object being different as the effect progresses. It is possible to prevent the display effect from becoming monotonous. In this case, a different texture is not used for each frame in which the display mode is changed, but a texture corresponding to the first update timing and a second update timing that is a plurality of update timings later than that. It is possible to reduce the number of textures stored in advance because the image data used between the first update timing and the second update timing is created by blending with the textures Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced.

Further, each texture is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each key data, and the switching of each texture is performed in accordance with the switching of each key data. Therefore, the processing load of the processing related to the switching in the VDP 135 can be reduced.

<Other forms of particle dispersion production>
In the particle dispersion effect (in the case of FIG. 35 and the case of FIG. 37), the number of key data KD1 to KD3 is set to be larger and the number of frames until the switching of the key data KD1 to KD3 to be used is set to be smaller. By doing so (for example, every 10 frames), while the coordinate data is being blended, the single image may be displaced and displayed so as to draw a curved trajectory instead of a linear trajectory.

The target to be blended using the key data KD1 to KD3 may be an α value for setting transparency, in addition to or instead of the coordinate data, and color information of the vertex data and the color information of the vertex data may be set without executing texture mapping. It may be a vertex color that makes it possible to determine the color information of a polygon composed of a plurality of vertex data. Further, in the configuration in which the UV value for determining the relative pasting position of the texture with respect to the object is changed and the display mode is changed even when the same texture is pasted, the UV is changed. The value may be changed using blending of key data.

The first frame period and the second frame period are not limited to have the same number of frames, and the number of frames included in these frame periods may be different. In this case, it is necessary to perform blending processing according to each frame period.

The type of single image data for displaying a single image may be the same. In this case, it is not necessary to set individual image data in the particle-dispersion texture PC 18 in association with each piece of individual data, so that the data capacity of the particle-dispersion texture PC 18 can be reduced.

-Instead of performing the blending by using two types of key data, the blending may be performed by using three or more types of key data. In this case, by appropriately changing the blending ratio of these three types of key data, the trajectory when the single image is displaced can be curved instead of linear. Also, when blending is performed using three or more types of key data, for example, a virtual arc or spherical surface is assumed by calculation from these three or more types of key data, and displacement is performed along the assumed virtual arc or spherical surface. A single image may be displayed as if it were moving.

The VDP 135 may be configured to have a dedicated circuit that calculates the vertex data using the key data. Further, the VDP 135 may be configured to have a dedicated circuit for calculating the vertex data when the key data is not used. By having these circuits individually, it becomes possible to specialize in the calculation of each vertex data, and the calculation of the vertex data can be performed appropriately.

The configuration for deriving the parameter data using the key data as described above may be applied to a configuration for displaying an image using image data of two-dimensional information such as sprite data. For example, a plurality of key data may be blended in deriving the coordinate parameters when setting the sprite data in the frame buffer 142.

<Structure for displaying the sea level>
Next, a configuration for displaying the sea level will be described.

The sea surface display is an effect for displaying the sea surface in the background, and is an effect in which the sea surface is displayed in a wavy manner over a plurality of consecutive frames (a plurality of image update timings). The sea surface display is a display effect executed in the first display mode of the first display mode and the second display mode described above. When displaying the sea surface, the sea surface object and normal map data for finely changing the movement of the sea surface object are used.

These sea surface objects and normal map data will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 38(a) and 38(b). FIG. 38A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the sea surface object PC 19, and FIG. 38B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal line map data ND1 and ND2.

As shown in FIG. 38A, the sea surface object PC 19 has a large number of surface data (polygons) SD defined by a plurality of vertex data in a plurality of rows and a plurality of columns. In this case, each surface data SD has a combination of row information and column information (hereinafter, this information is also referred to as order information). For example, in FIG. 38A, the surface data SD in the lower left corner has the information in the first column and the first row as order information, and in FIG. 38A, the surface data SD in the upper right corner is the 25th column. It has 25 lines of information as order information.

Although each surface data SD is defined as a quadrangle with four vertex data, it is not limited to this and may be defined as a triangle with three vertex data, and may be defined with five or more vertex data. It may be defined as another polygon. Further, the arbitrary one surface data SD is adjacent to the other surface data SD, and the vertex data of the one surface data SD also serves as the vertex data of the other surface data SD. That is, in each surface data SD, the sides of the adjacent surface data SD are common. Therefore, basically, when the coordinate data of one vertex data is changed, the plurality of surface data SD are transformed, and the coordinate data of one side composed of two adjacent vertex data is changed. In this case, the directions of the plurality of surface data SD are changed.

In the sea surface object PC 19, initial coordinate data of each vertex data is set in order to determine the coordinates in the initial state of each surface data SD and the orientation of the surface. In addition to this, data of the initial scale of the sea surface object PC19, data of an initial α value uniformly applied to all vertex data (or surface data SD), and an initial rotation angle of the sea surface object PC19. Data etc. are included.

Here, each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC 19 is divided into a plurality of groups by collecting a plurality of adjacent surface data SD, and specifically, the first surface data group,..., The k-th surface. It has a data group (k is an integer of 2 or more, and in this embodiment, k=25). The number of surface data SD included in each surface data group is equal to a plurality of predetermined numbers (specifically 25), but the surface data SD included in at least a part of the surface data groups The numbers may be different. Note that, in FIG. 38A, each unit surrounded by a thick line corresponds to a surface data group.

The coordinates and the orientation of the surface of each surface data group are individually determined under the control of the display CPU 131. Specifically, the entire surface data SD included in the first surface data group forms the same surface facing a predetermined direction, and in that state, the coordinates of the reference surface data SD in the first surface data group have predetermined coordinates. Thus, the coordinates and the orientation of each surface data SD included in the first surface data group are determined. That is, the coordinates and direction of each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC 19 are first roughly determined in units of the sea surface data group. Hereinafter, the coordinates and orientation determined in units of each surface data group will also be referred to as the first stage form.

The reference surface data SD is a single surface data SD in each surface data group, but may be a plurality of surface data SD. Further, instead of setting the coordinates with reference to the surface data SD, the reference data may be set with respect to the vertex data forming the corner portion of the surface data group. The reference coordinates may be set for all, or the reference coordinates may be set for only one corner portion. Further, in order to make the sea surface object PC 19 into a series, in the adjacent surface data groups, the coordinates and the orientation of the surface are determined so that the coordinates of the vertex data at the boundary between the two are the same.

The normal map data ND1 and ND2 are data for making the orientations of the surface data SD included in each surface data group mutually different after the first-stage form is determined for each surface data group. Yes, a plurality of types, specifically, two types of normal map data ND1 and ND2 are stored in the memory module 133 in advance. Each of the normal line map data ND1 and ND2 has a large number of unit normal line data UND for changing the direction of each surface data SD from the first stage form. In the following description, one of the pair of normal line map data ND1 and ND2 is also referred to as first normal line map data ND1 and the other is also referred to as second normal line map data ND2.

FIG. 38(b) is an image diagram of the normal map data ND1 and ND2 having a large number of unit normal data UND, in which each square portion arranged in a plurality of rows and a plurality of columns is a unit method. The line data UND is shown. In this case, each unit normal data UND in each normal map data ND1 and ND2 has a combination of row information and column information (hereinafter, this information is also referred to as order information). For example, in FIG. 38(b), the unit normal data UND in the lower left corner has the information in the first column, first row as the order information, and in FIG. 38(b), the unit normal data UND in the upper right corner is It has the information of the 35th column and the 35th row as order information.

Each unit normal data UND has data of a direction when the direction of each surface data SD is changed from the first-stage form and data of an amount of change when changing the direction (hereinafter, also referred to as change data). is doing. In this case, in one piece of normal line map data ND1 and ND2, some of the unit normal line data UND have the same data in the changing direction and the same amount of change data in the direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be different among all the unit normal data UND.

Between the pair of normal line map data ND1 and ND2, the same change data determined by each unit normal line data UND is included, but the change data sequences do not match. In this case, the change data determined by each unit normal data UND may be different in all the order information between the pair of normal line map data ND1 and ND2, and at least a part of the order information includes each unit method. The change data determined by the line data UND may be different. Although the number of unit normal data UND is the same in each normal map data ND1 and ND2, it may be different.

The number of unit normal data UND in each of the normal map data ND1 and ND2 is set to be larger than the number of surface data SD forming the sea surface object PC19. In such a configuration, when the unit normal data UND of each normal map data ND1 and ND2 is applied to the surface data SD of the sea surface object PC19, in the range where the whole surface data SD is included in each normal map data ND1 and ND2, By selecting the unit normal data UND to be applied to the reference surface data SD and using the relationship as a reference and using the order information on the surface data SD side and the order information on the unit normal data UND side, The unit normal data UND corresponding to the surface data SD other than the reference surface data SD is selected.

More specifically, in the configuration having the surface data SD for the m-th column and the n-th row (m and n are integers of 1 or more), the reference surface data SD is the first column, the first row, When the corresponding unit normal data UND is the sth column and the tth row (s and t are integers of 1 or more), the unit normal data UND used this time is the sth column to the (s+m-1)th column. Therefore, it corresponds to the t-th column to the (t+n−1)-th row. Therefore, the unit normal data UND are read from the normal map data ND1 and ND2. Then, the read unit normal data UND is converted in order information by an operation in which the order information in the sth column and the tth row becomes the first column and the first row, and the order information after the conversion is performed. Is associated with the surface data SD having the same order information as.

A method of applying the pair of normal line map data ND1 and ND2 to the sea surface object PC19 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39(a) and 39(b).

As shown in FIG. 39(a), when the orientation of the surface data SD of the sea surface object PC19 is changed using the normal map data ND1 and ND2, the pair of normal map data ND1 and ND2 is the sea surface object. It is applied to the PC 19 at the same time. In this case, at the start of the sea surface display, the unit normal data UND of the corner portion of one of the normal map data ND1 coincides with the corner portion on the same side of the sea surface object PC19, and the sea surface object PC19 Data setting is performed so that all surface data SD correspond to different unit normal data UND. Similarly, for the other normal map data ND2, the unit normal data UND of the corner portion of the normal map data ND2 matches the corner portion on the same side of the sea surface object PC19, and the sea surface object Data setting is performed so that all surface data SD of the PC 19 correspond to different unit normal data UND.

In this case, the unit surface normal data UND of one normal map data ND1 and the unit normal data UND of the other normal map data ND2 simultaneously correspond to the same surface data SD. When the modified data of the unit normal data UND is applied to the surface data SD, the orientation of the surface data SD according to the modified data corresponding to one normal map data ND1 and the other normal map data ND2 are applied. The blending of the respective change data is executed so that the orientation becomes an intermediate direction from the orientation of the surface data SD by the modification data, and the modification data resulting from the blending is applied to the surface data SD.

Note that, in FIG. 39A, the position of the corner portion serving as the reference at the start is different between the one normal map data ND1 and the other normal map data ND2, but the positions are the same. Good. Even in this case, since the arrangement of the change data is different between the pair of normal map data ND1 and ND2, the content of the change data applied to the surface data SD is the same in both normal map data ND1 and ND2. The above phenomenon does not occur for all surface data SD.

Then, as the number of frames in the sea surface display progresses, as shown in FIG. 39B, the unit normal data UND corresponding to the surface data SD that is the reference of the sea surface object PC 19 becomes Both normal map data ND1 and ND2 are changed. However, at the time of this change, the change is made so that all the surface data SD of the sea surface object PC 19 correspond to different unit normal data UND.

In this way, by changing the unit normal data UND corresponding to the reference surface data SD, it is possible to gradually change the manner in which the direction of each surface data SD is changed, and the sea surface display is rich in variation. It becomes possible. Further, since the pair of normal line map data ND1 and ND2 are blended, even if the variation of the change data is suppressed to some extent in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, it is substantially applied to the surface data SD. It is possible to increase the variation of change data.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a method of applying the change data to each surface data SD will be described.

As described above, the unit normal data UND is individually associated with each surface data SD, but the modified data by the unit normal data UND is not applied to all of the surface data SD, The change data based on the unit normal data UND is applied only to a part of the surface data SD1 in each surface data group. Specifically, the surface data SD1 to be applied is predetermined so that the modification data is not applied simultaneously to the surface data SD that share the same vertex data.

Specifically, the surface data SD1 to which the modified data is applied in each surface data group is limited to a part as shown in FIG. Since the surface data SD2 exists, the vertex data is not shared between the surface data SD1 to be applied. Further, since the surface data SD1 to be applied does not form a corner portion in the surface data group, the vertex data is shared between the surface data SD1 to be applied even when viewed between the surface data groups. Not not. With such a configuration, even if the orientation of the surface data SD is randomly changed by using the normal map data ND1 and ND2, the surface data SD1 is applied between the surface data SD1 to be applied. Since the buffer surface data SD2 for absorbing the difference in the orientation exists, it is possible to ensure the continuity as the surface of the sea surface object PC19.

FIGS. 40(b-1) and 40(b-2) show how the orientation of each surface data SD is changed from the form of the first stage by applying the modification data to the surface data SD1 to be applied. Show. As shown in FIG. 40(b-1), in the first-stage mode, the surface data SD1 and SD2 included in the predetermined surface data group are oriented in the same direction and form the same surface. There is.

Of these surface data SD1 and SD2, the second and fourth surface data SD1 is the application target, and the blending result of both normal line map data ND1 and ND2 with respect to these second and fourth surface data SD1. Some change data applies. At this time, as shown in FIG. 40B-2, the orientations of the second and fourth surface data SD1 are changed based on the corresponding change data. Also, the first, third, and fifth surface data SD2, which is the surface data SD2 for buffering, not the surface data SD1 to be applied, is the sea surface object in the mode in which the amount of change from the first stage form is the smallest. The orientation is changed so as to ensure the continuity of the surface of the PC 19.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for setting the orientation of each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC 19 will be described.

FIG. 41( a) is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing for sea level display executed by the display CPU 131. The calculation processing for displaying the sea level is executed by the calculation processing for background in step S903 of the task processing (FIG. 14). The arithmetic processing for displaying the sea level is executed in the first display mode, and is executed as a part of the processing of steps S1502 to S1505 in FIG.

First, in step S2401, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not the sea surface display is being executed. If the sea surface display is not being executed, it is determined in step S2402 whether it is the sea surface display start timing. If it is not the start timing, the present arithmetic processing is terminated as it is, and if it is the start timing, the process proceeds to step S2403.

In step S2403, the sea surface object PC 19 is grasped as a control target based on the currently set data table. By the way, at the execution timing of the process of step S2403, the control start process is completed for the sea surface object PC 19 in the immediately preceding control start setting process (step S901). The control information of the sea surface object PC 19 whose control has been started is stored and held in the work RAM 132 until the sea surface display is completed.

In the following step S2404, information for instructing the VDP 135 to control the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 as control targets is stored. However, the display CPU 131 does not execute the arithmetic processing necessary to actually apply the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 to the sea surface object PC19. In other words, although the display CPU 131 instructs the VDP 135 to use the data ND1 and ND2 for the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2, these data ND1 and ND2 are actually used. Do not execute the arithmetic processing for controlling. As a result, the processing load on the display CPU 131 can be reduced.

In a succeeding step S2405, the sea surface animation data is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132. FIG. 41B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the animation data AD for the sea surface. The sea surface animation data AD is data for controlling the sea surface object PC 19 in units of surface data groups, and the sea surface animation data AD determines the reference coordinates and directions of the respective surface data groups to determine the sea surface. The form of the first stage is determined for the object PC19 for use.

More specifically, a plurality of pointer information is set in the sea surface animation data AD so that the pointer information has a serial number, and each pointer information includes a reference coordinate data and a direction for each surface data group. The data is set. For example, for the first surface data group, the reference coordinate data (A1-1) and the orientation data (B1-1) are set in association with the first pointer information, and the second pointer is set. The reference coordinate data (A1-2) and the orientation data (B1-2) are set corresponding to the information, and the f-th pointer information (f is an integer of 3 or more, for example, “50”). The reference coordinate data (A1-f) and the orientation data (B1-f) are set in correspondence with. Further, also for the second surface data group,..., And the kth surface data group, the reference coordinate data and the orientation data are set in association with each pointer information.

The pointer information is updated when one frame progresses in the situation where the sea surface display is being performed (every time when the image is updated), and the combination of the data of the reference coordinates and the data of the orientation is next as the pointer information is updated. Will be changed to the order of. In this case, the continuous reference coordinate data and the orientation data are set so that the first-stage form has motion continuity in each surface data group.

Also, the arrangement of the reference coordinate data and the orientation data is different between the surface data groups as the pointer information progresses, but the morphological continuity between adjacent surface data groups should not be impaired. The data of the reference coordinates and the data of the orientation are set. In other words, for a surface data group in which multiple sides are in contact with another surface data group, if the reference coordinates and orientations of these other surface data groups are determined, the state in which they are in contact with these other surface data groups is released. Unless otherwise, there will be restrictions on the reference coordinates and orientation, and in some cases it will be uniquely determined. In such a situation, the reference coordinates and the orientation of each surface data group are predetermined so as not to release the state of being in contact with the other surface data group. Specifically, as described above, in the adjacent surface data groups, the reference coordinate data and the orientation data are determined such that the coordinates of the vertex data at the boundary between the two are the same.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 41A, after the sea surface animation data AD is read in step S2405, the initial setting data is grasped from the sea surface animation data AD in step S2406. Specifically, as the start data, a combination of the reference coordinate data and the orientation data set in association with the first pointer information is read out for the entire data group. Then, in step S2407, the sea surface display start designation information is stored, and then the present arithmetic processing is terminated.

When the arithmetic processing for sea surface display is executed as described above, information on the use instruction of the sea surface object PC 19 is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, and the first method is used. Information on the instruction to use the line map data ND1 and the second normal line map data ND2 is set. Furthermore, the initial setting data for the first-stage form ascertained in step S2406 is set, and sea surface display start designation information indicating that sea surface display should be started is set in the drawing list.

When it is determined in step S2401 that the sea level display is being executed, the process proceeds to step S2408. In step S2408, the sea surface object PC 19 is grasped as a control target based on the currently set data table. Further, in step S2409, the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 are grasped as control targets based on the currently set data table.

In the following step S2410, the pointer information of the sea surface animation data AD already read in the work RAM 132 is updated so as to be incremented by 1, and in step S2411, the updated data corresponding to the updated pointer information is grasped. .. Regarding this grasping process, specifically, a combination of the data of the reference coordinates and the data of the direction set corresponding to the updated pointer information is read out for the entire data group as the update data. After that, in step S2412, after the update designation information of the sea level display is stored, the present arithmetic processing is ended.

When the arithmetic processing for sea surface display is executed as described above, information on the use instruction of the sea surface object PC 19 is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, and the first method is used. Information on the instruction to use the line map data ND1 and the second normal line map data ND2 is set. In addition, the update data regarding the first-stage form ascertained in step S2411 is set in the drawing list. Furthermore, the sea surface display update designation information indicating that the sea surface display should be updated is set in the drawing list.

Although the pointer information of the sea surface animation data AD may correspond to the total number of frames where the sea surface display is executed, in the pachinko machine 10, the pointer information of the pointer information is larger than the total number of frames where the sea surface display is executed. The number is set low. In this case, the pointer information is in the last order during the execution of the sea level display, but the pointer information is restored to the first pointer information in the next frame in the last order. In consideration of the looping of the pointer information in this way, the first-stage form in which the pointer information is in the last order and the first-stage form in which the pointer information is in the first order are the movements of the sea surface object PC 19. It is preferable to have continuity.

Next, the sea level display setting process executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42. The setting process for the sea surface display is executed in the situation of the first display mode, and is executed as a part of the process of steps S1703 to S1708 in FIG. The sea surface display setting process is activated when either the sea surface display start designation information or the sea surface display update designation information is set in the current drawing list.

First, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the sea surface display start designation information is set in the current drawing list. If set, the process advances to step S2502.

In step S2502, the address at which the sea surface object PC 19 is stored in the memory module 133 is grasped based on the drawing list this time, and the sea surface object PC 19 is read into the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134. In step S2503, the addresses at which the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 are stored in the memory module 133 are grasped based on the current drawing list, and the first normal map The data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 are read into the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134.

In subsequent step S2504, the initial setting data (data extracted from the animation data AD for sea surface) set in the drawing list this time is grasped, and in step S2505, the sea surface is applied with the grasped initial setting data. The object PC19 is set in the world coordinate system. As a result, the sea surface object PC 19 is set in the world coordinate system in the state of the first stage form.

In a succeeding step S2506, an initial setting process of the first normal map data ND1 to the world coordinate system is executed, and in a step S2507, an initial setting process of the second normal map data ND2 to the world coordinate system is executed. As a result, the unit normal data UND and the second normal line of the first normal map data ND1 with respect to each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC19 are brought into the state described with reference to FIG. The unit normal data UND of the map data ND2 is associated.

After that, in step S2508, the normal parameter setting process is executed, and then this setting process is terminated. The process of setting the normal line parameter will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal parameter is a parameter that determines the orientation of the surface data SD, and specifically determines the coordinates of the vertex data that forms the surface data SD.

In the normal line parameter setting process, first, in step S2601, the applicable counter provided in the register 153 is initialized. In the present processing, the application counter identifies the surface data SD1 to which the change data set in the unit normal data UND of the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 is applied by the VDP 135. In the state where the application counter is initialized, numerical information corresponding to the number of the applicable surface data SD1 is set in the application counter.

In the following step S2602, the change data is read from the unit normal data UND corresponding to the current numerical value information of the applicable counter in the first normal map data ND1. Specifically, first, the surface data SD1 corresponding to the current numerical information of the applicable counter is grasped, and then the unit normal data UND associated with the surface data SD1 in the first normal map data ND1 is grasped. To do. Then, the change data set in the unit normal data UND is read out.

In the following step S2603, the changed data is read from the unit normal data UND corresponding to the current numerical value information of the applicable counter in the second normal map data ND2. Specifically, first, the surface data SD1 corresponding to the current numerical information of the applicable counter is grasped, and then the unit normal data UND associated with the surface data SD1 in the second normal map data ND2 is grasped. To do. Then, the change data set in the unit normal data UND is read out.

In the following step S2604, a blending process is executed with the change data read from the first normal map data ND1 in step S2602 and the change data read from the second normal map data ND2 in step S2603. In this blending process, as described above, the orientation of the surface data SD1 based on the modified data corresponding to the first normal map data ND1 and the orientation of the surface data SD1 based on the modified data corresponding to the second normal map data ND2. Blending of each change data is executed so that the orientation becomes an intermediate direction.

It should be noted that the blending is not limited to a configuration in which each direction of the surface data SD1 when each change data is applied is in the middle, and is related to the first normal map data ND1 at a predetermined ratio. The configuration may be closer to the changed data or closer to the changed data related to the second normal map data ND2.

In the following step S2605, the change data resulting from the blending in step S2604 is applied to the surface data SD1 corresponding to the current numerical value information of the application counter. As a result, the surface data SD1 is changed from the orientation in the first-stage form to the orientation corresponding to the blended change data. However, as described above, since the change data is given as a relative change amount from the first-stage form as a reference, the change data is not applied as it is, but in the first-stage form. Based on the orientation, the direction is changed from that direction by the amount of change corresponding to the changed data after blending.

In the following step S2606, the surface data SD2 adjacent to the surface data SD1 corresponding to the current numerical value information of the application counter, that is, the surface data SD2 sharing the vertex data with the surface data SD1 to be applied (for the buffer described above). A process of changing the orientation of the surface data SD2) is performed according to the change of the coordinates of the shared vertex data. In this case, regarding the vertex data that is not shared with the surface data SD1 to be applied this time, the orientation of the adjacent surface data SD2 is changed without changing the coordinates from the first-stage form.

In subsequent step S2607, the numerical information of the applicable counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the applicable counter so that the target for which the normal line parameter is set shifts to the next applicable surface data SD1.

After that, in step S2608, whether or not the updated numerical information of the applicable counter is information indicating that the setting for all surface data SD1 to be applied is completed, that is, the numerical information of the applicable counter is " It is determined whether it is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2608, the process returns to step S2602, the processes of steps S2602 to S2607 are executed for the new surface data SD1 to be applied, and if a positive determination is made in step S2608, , This setting process ends.

Returning to the description of the setting process for sea surface display (FIG. 42 ), if a negative determination is made in step S2501, the update data (from the sea surface animation data AD that has been set in the drawing list this time is set in step S2509. The extracted data) is grasped, and in step S2510, the grasped updated data is set in the sea surface object PC 19 already set in the world coordinate system. In this case, the update data is overwritten on the coordinate and orientation data of each surface data group of the sea surface object PC 19. As a result, the sea surface object PC 19 is set in the world coordinate system again in the state of the first stage form.

In a succeeding step S2511, the updating process of the first normal map data ND1 is executed, and in a step S2512, the updating process of the second normal map data ND2 is executed. As a result, the unit normal data UND and the second normal of the first normal map data ND1 associated with the surface data SD of the sea surface object PC 19 are brought into the state described with reference to FIG. 39B. The unit normal line data UND of the line map data ND2 is changed.

After that, the normal parameter setting process of step S2508 is executed, and then this setting process is ended. The process of setting the normal parameter is as described above.

As described above, the coordinates and orientation of each surface data SD forming the sea surface object PC19 in the world coordinate system are determined. Then, for these surface data SD, color information is set in the color information setting process of step S1009 in the drawing process (FIG. 16). In this case, the setting of the color information for the surface data SD is performed by a method different from the texture mapping process. This method will be described.

44A to 44C are explanatory diagrams for explaining a method of setting color information in each surface data SD.

In the color information setting process (step S1009), as shown in FIG. 16, the setting process of each object to the world coordinate system is completed, and further, the setting process to the visual field coordinate system of step S1006 and the clipping process of step S1007. Is executed and then executed. Therefore, at the timing when the color information setting process is executed, the coordinates and the orientation of each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC 19 have already been set in a state of being converted into the visual field coordinate system.

In this state, as shown in FIG. 44A, the viewpoint VD serving as the reference of the visual field coordinate system is set, and the sea surface object PC 19 is set so as to be located above the viewpoint VD. There is. That is, the sea surface display on the pachinko machine 10 is a display with the background of the sea as the background, and the sea surface is displayed in a state of looking up from the sea.

When setting the color information for each surface data SD, when the light source is provisionally above the sea surface object PC 19, the transmitted light from the light source is related to the coordinates and direction of the surface data SD and the position of the viewpoint VD. The surface data SD corresponding to the light transmitted from the light source, and the light from the light source are all above the sea surface object PC 19 on the assumption that the light is visible. It is sorted into the surface data SD corresponding to the fact that it is reflected and not transmitted.

In this distribution, the light source is not set in the writing process (step S1008) of the drawing process (FIG. 16), but it is determined whether the angle of the surface data SD with respect to the viewpoint VD is less than a predetermined angle. The surface data SD is assigned to either a classification with a large amount of transmitted light or a classification with a small amount of transmitted light.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 44(b-1) and (b-2), first, when the surface data SD is viewed from the viewpoint VD by using the coordinate and orientation data of the surface data SD. The refraction angle β, which is an angle, is calculated. In this calculation, a table in which the data of the refraction angle is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the data of the coordinate and the direction is read from the memory module 133 and used. However, a calculation formula program is prepared in advance. The refraction angle may be calculated by the calculation formula.

Here, since the setting of the color information for the surface data SD is premised on the incidence of light from the atmosphere to the sea surface, the larger the refraction angle β, the larger the incident angle α, and the larger the incident angle α, the larger the light amount. Will be less. Based on this, the VDP 135, after calculating the refraction angle β, determines whether or not the refraction angle β is less than a predetermined reference angle. Then, when the refraction angle β is less than the predetermined reference angle (for example, in the case of FIG. 44(b-1)), the surface data SD that causes the refraction angle β is classified into a large transmitted light, and the refraction angle β is determined. Is greater than or equal to a predetermined reference angle (for example, in the case of FIG. 44(b-2)), the surface data SD that causes the refraction angle β is classified as a small transmitted light. By the way, the surface data SD that does not have the component facing the viewpoint VD side in the direction facing the side opposite to the viewpoint VD side is all classified as a small transmitted light. To be done.

After performing the above classification, the color information of each surface data SD is determined using the color table CT as shown in FIG. The color table CT is stored in advance in the memory module 133 and contains a plurality of color numbers. Data and these color numbers. The color information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the above data. Further, in the color table CT, correlation data that is referred to when determining which color information to apply to the surface data SD is set.

In this case, the color NO. “7” is applied to the surface data SD classified as the above-mentioned small transmitted light. On the other hand, color NO. “1” to “6” are applied to the surface data SD classified as the above-mentioned large amount of transmitted light, and a plurality of types of color information are set for the surface data SD of this classification. .. Which color information is set for the surface data SD of the classification is not determined by the direction of the surface data SD, but by the distance in the Z-axis direction from the viewpoint VD.

Specifically, the vertex data of one corner portion (for example, the lower left corner portion in the state of FIG. 38A) of the surface data SD is used as the reference vertex data, and the Z coordinate data of the reference vertex data is If the threshold value is equal to or lower than the first stage threshold value "Z1" (that is, if the Z coordinate is closer to the viewpoint VD than "Z1"), "CL1" is selected as the color information and the first stage threshold value "". If it is larger than “Z1” and equal to or smaller than “Z2” which is the second stage threshold value, “CL2” is selected as the color information and is larger than “Z2” which is the second stage threshold value and that of the third stage. If it is equal to or smaller than the threshold value "Z3", "CL3" is selected as the color information. Then, in the same manner, "CL4" and "CL5" are selected in correspondence with the respective threshold ranges, and the data of the Z coordinate of the reference vertex data is larger than the threshold value "Z5" of the fifth stage. In this case, “CL6” is selected as the color information.

The color information “CL1” to “CL6” is set to be darker toward the rear side. Specifically, the color information “CL1” is set as white and the color information “CL6” is dark blue. And the color information “CL2” to “CL5” are set as their intermediate color. Further, the color information “CL7” is set as a color darker than the color information “CL6”, and specifically, is set as blue close to black.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for setting the color information in each surface data SD will be described.

FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing the sea surface display color information setting process executed by the VDP 135. The sea surface display color information setting process is executed in the color information setting process of step S1009 in the drawing process (FIG. 16). Further, the color information setting process for sea surface display is started when either the sea surface display start designation information or the sea surface display update designation information is set in the current drawing list.

First, in step S2701, the initialization processing of the applicable counter is executed. In this processing, the application counter has a role of specifying the surface data SD of the target for setting the color information in the VDP 135, and is included in the sea surface object PC 19 when the application counter is initialized. Numerical information corresponding to the number of surface data SD is set in the applicable counter.

In subsequent step S2702, the sea surface object PC 19 grasps the orientation data from the surface data SD corresponding to the current numerical information of the applicable counter, and in step S2703, the refraction angle is calculated from the grasped orientation data. Then, in step S2704, it is determined whether the calculated refraction angle is greater than or equal to the reference angle.

If the angle is equal to or larger than the reference angle, in step S2705 the color No. 7 color information (“CL7”) is set for the surface data SD that is the target this time. On the other hand, if the angle is less than the reference angle, in step S2706, the Z coordinate data of the target surface data SD is read, and in step S2707, the corresponding color number is checked by collating with the color table CT. ． Color information (any one of "CL1" to "CL6") is set for the surface data SD that is the target this time.

After the processing of step S2705 or step S2707 is performed, the numerical value information of the applicable counter is decremented by 1 in step S2708 so that the object for which the color information is set moves to the next surface data SD. The numerical information of is updated. After that, in step S2709, whether or not the updated numerical information of the applicable counter is information indicating that the setting of the color information for all the surface data SD is completed, that is, the numerical information of the applicable counter is " It is determined whether it is "0".

When a negative determination is made in step S2709, the process returns to step S2702, and the processes of steps S2702 to S2708 are executed on the new surface data SD. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S2709, the main color information setting process ends.

FIG. 45( b) is a flowchart showing the adjustment processing for the sea surface, which is executed by the VDP 135. The adjustment process for the sea surface is executed in the background drawing data creation process of step S1010 in the drawing process (FIG. 16). More specifically, although omitted and not described in FIG. 27, it is executed between step S1802 and step S1803. In other words, the sea surface adjustment process is executed after the background three-dimensional image data is converted into two-dimensional image data.

First, in step S2711, it is determined whether or not either the sea surface display start designation information or the sea surface display update designation information is set in the current drawing list. If neither is set, this adjustment processing is ended as it is. If either is set, the sea level blurring process is executed in step S2712, and then this adjustment process ends.

In the sea surface blurring process, the blurring process using the Gaussian filter is executed on the two-dimensional image data for the background created by using the hidden surface process (step S1802). Specifically, one pixel is extracted from the area corresponding to the sea surface display, and a predetermined number (for example, 5) of pixels are extracted on both sides of the pixel in the X-axis direction. After that, weighting according to the distance from the center pixel is determined using a Gaussian function, and the color information of each pixel is blended (combined) while the determined weighting is applied. Similarly, a predetermined number (for example, 5) of pixels are extracted on both sides of the same pixel in the Y-axis direction. After that, weighting according to the distance from the center pixel is determined using a Gaussian function, and the color information of each pixel is blended while the determined weighting is applied. Then, the blurring process using the Gaussian filter is executed for all the pixels forming the area corresponding to the sea surface display.

Next, the contents of the sea surface display will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 46(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the sea surface display, and FIG. 46(b) is an explanatory diagram for simply explaining the setting mode of the color information of the area where the sea surface display is performed. ..

As shown in FIG. 46(a), in the background in which a plurality of symbols are variably displayed, an image showing the sea is displayed. A sea surface display SP is made above this background. In this case, the orientation of the surface data SD for displaying the sea surface is finely controlled, and the color information according to the finely controlled state is set, so that the direction of the sea surface is finely expressed. The transmission of light from the atmosphere to the sea is realistically represented. Therefore, it is possible to perform a realistic sea surface display SP.

Further, since the configuration is such that the orientation of each surface data SD is adjusted after the first stage form of the sea surface object PC 19 is set, the large movement of the sea surface is regular, but the regular large movement of the sea surface is not changed. In particular, it is possible to give irregularity to the direction of each surface data SD.

Further, when the movement of each surface data SD is individually controlled, it is not necessary to individually change the direction of each surface data SD by calculation by using the normal map data ND1 and ND2. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while reducing the processing load. In particular, since the positions of the normal map data ND1 and ND2 in the world coordinate system are changed, the unit normal data UND associated with each surface data SD is changed as the sea surface display SP progresses. When the direction of the surface data SD is changed in a complicated manner as the sea surface display SP progresses, the same normal map data ND1 and ND2 can be used and the same application processing can be used. And the processing load are reduced.

Further, the display CPU 131 executes the rough motion determination using the sea surface animation data AD, and the VDP 135 executes the fine surface orientation determination using the normal map data ND1 and ND2. The processing load can be distributed.

In addition, as described above, the blurring process of the sea surface is performed, and as shown in FIG. 46B, the pixel PS (the pixel on the left side) for which color information corresponding to almost no light transmission is set. PS) and a pixel PS (color pixel PS on the right side) in which color information corresponding to the highest light transmission is set, a pixel PS (center side) in which the color information of these pixels PS is blended. Pixels PS) of the As a result, it is possible to make the boundary of the part where the color information is different in the configuration in which the color information is individually set in the area where the sea surface display SP is performed inconspicuous.

Further, since the blurring process is performed after the two-dimensional image is formed, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the blurring process is performed in the state of the three-dimensional image.

<Another form of color information setting processing for sea surface display>
FIG. 47 is a flowchart for explaining another mode of the sea surface display color information setting process executed by the VDP 135.

First, in step S2801, similar to step S2701, initialization processing of the applicable counter is executed. In the following step S2802, the direction data is grasped from the surface data SD corresponding to the current numerical value information of the applicable counter in the sea surface object PC 19 in the same manner as in the above step S2702, and in step S2803, the same as step S2703. The refraction angle is calculated from the data of the grasped direction.

In subsequent step S2804, color information is derived from the information on the refraction angle calculated in step S2803. In this case, when deriving the color information, the color table in which the refraction angle information and the color information are associated with each other is read from the memory module 133, and the color information corresponding to the refraction angle information is read out. That is, in this another mode, the color information is directly read from the information of the refraction angle.

Then, in step S2805, the Z coordinate data of the target surface data SD is read out, and in step S2806, color information adjustment processing corresponding to the read Z coordinate data is executed. In this case, a process is performed in which the shift amount for shifting the color information set in step S2804 to a darker color side is increased as the surface data SD existing farther from the viewpoint VD.

In subsequent step S2807, the numerical information of the applicable counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the applicable counter so that the target for which the color information is set shifts to the next surface data SD. After that, in step S2808, whether or not the updated numerical information of the applicable counter is information indicating that the setting of the color information for all the surface data SD is completed, that is, the numerical information of the applicable counter is " It is determined whether it is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2808, the process returns to step S2802, and the processes of steps S2802 to S2807 are executed on the new surface data SD. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S2808, the main color information setting processing ends.

<Other other forms>
The number of unit normal data UND included in one normal map data ND1 and ND2 may be less than or equal to the number of surface data SD included in the sea surface object PC19. In this case, by arranging a plurality of the same normal map data ND1 and ND2, the unit normal data UND may be associated with all the surface data SD.

A plurality of types of normal line map data ND1 and ND2 need not be set, and a single normal line map data may be set. In this case, when displaying the sea surface, only the single normal map data may be applied to the sea surface object PC 19. Even with this configuration, by changing the position of the normal map data applied to the sea surface object PC 19, it is possible to change the direction of each surface data SD as the sea surface display progresses. In addition, a plurality of single normal map data are read out at the same time, and the positions to be applied to the sea surface object PC 19 in the plurality of normal map data are made different from each other, thereby making it possible to control the orientation of a complicated surface. It may be configured to.

The target to which the unit normal data UND of the normal map data ND1 and ND2 is applied is limited to a configuration in which a plurality of surface data SD sharing the same vertex data are not simultaneously applied. Instead, the unit normal data UND may be applied to the entire surface data SD. However, in this configuration, different coordinates are set at the same time for one vertex data, and therefore it is necessary to perform the adjustment separately. For example, when the coordinates of the vertex data are set, the priorities are set in advance between the adjacent surface data SD, and the unit normal data UND is applied as it is to the surface data SD having a high priority, and the surface data SD having a low priority is applied. Regarding the data SD, while maintaining the coordinates of the vertex data determined by the surface data SD having a high priority, the data SD is brought closer to the direction determined by the unit normal data UND applied to itself than in the state of the first stage form. The configuration may be adjusted as follows.

The setting of the color information for each surface data SD is not limited to the setting method using the color table CT or the setting method shown in FIG. 47 described above. For example, the lighting of the drawing process (FIG. 16). In the processing, the virtual light source may be set on the opposite side of the viewpoint VD across the sea surface object PC 19, and the amount of light transmitted from the virtual light source may be calculated individually for each surface data SD. In this case, a configuration is conceivable in which color information corresponding to the amount of transmitted light is derived by using predetermined table information and the color information of the derivation result is set in each surface data SD. Further, a configuration may be considered in which initial color information is preset for each surface data SD and the color information is adjusted in relation to the calculated transmission amount.

The sea surface object PC19 is not limited to the configuration set above the viewpoint VD, and the sea surface object PC19 may be configured below the viewpoint VD. In this case, after the direction of each surface data SD is determined by each of the above methods, bright color information is set if the direction of each surface data SD is a direction in which light is easily reflected, and the direction of each surface data SD is determined. If the direction is such that light can be easily transmitted, dark color information is set. For this setting, table information prepared in advance may be used or a virtual light source may be used for actual calculation.

For the surface data SD whose derived refraction angle is equal to or less than a predetermined angle, the brightest color information may be set regardless of the distance in the Z-axis direction from the viewpoint VD. Alternatively, for the surface data SD whose derived refraction angle is equal to or smaller than a predetermined angle, color information that is brighter than that of other refraction angles is set, and the color information is used as a base from the viewpoint VD. The color information may be adjusted so that the darker the distance in the Z-axis direction becomes, the darker the color information becomes.

The processing configuration for controlling the direction of the surface and setting the color information as described above need not be the sea surface, and may be another water surface such as a river or a pond. Further, when expressing a transmissive film or a reflective film that changes the state of a surface over time, the processing configuration for controlling the direction of the surface and setting the color information as described above may be applied.

The target of the parameter controlled using the map data is not limited to the direction and the coordinates, and may be the surface color or the surface transparency value.

The number of unit normal data UND included in the normal map data ND1 and ND2 may be smaller than the number of surface data SD included in the sea surface object PC19. In this case, one normal map data ND1 and ND2 is applied to a predetermined number of surface data SD in the sea surface object PC19, and the same normal map data ND1 and ND2 is again applied to the remaining surface data SD. You can apply.

In the normal parameter setting process (FIG. 43), the process of step S2606, that is, the process of adjusting the adjacent surface data may not be executed. In this case, regarding the buffer surface data SD2, among the plurality of vertex data included in the surface data SD2, the vertex data shared with the target surface data SD1 is associated with the application of the normal map data ND1 and ND2. The vertex data that is changed but not shared retains the coordinates set in the first stage form. Even in this case, the orientation and size of the buffer surface data SD2 will be changed according to the orientation and size of the application target surface data SD1.

Instead of the normal map data ND1 and ND2 that directly control the orientation of the surface data SD, map data that directly controls the coordinates of each vertex data of the sea surface object PC 19 may be used. In this case, by applying the map data to the sea surface object PC 19, the coordinates of the vertex data are changed, and as a result of the change, the orientation of the surface data SD is changed. With this configuration, the control target is not the surface but the apex, and therefore the application target surface data SD1 and the buffering surface data SD2 are separated as in the case of using the normal map data ND1 and ND2. There is no need to do it. The control amount of each vertex data set in the map data is preferably a change amount from the coordinates in the first stage form.

The structure in which the sea surface object PC 19 is distinguished into a plurality of surface data groups is not essential, and such a structure may be omitted. In this case, each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC 19 is individually controlled by using the normal map data ND1, ND2 and the like.

At the same update timing, the setting of the form of the first stage based on the control in the unit of surface data group and the individual control of the orientation of the surface data SD using the normal map data ND1, ND2, etc. There is no limitation to the configuration for performing both, for example, the setting of the form of the first step is performed at one update timing, individual control of the orientation of the surface data SD is performed at the subsequent update timing, and The configuration may be repeated. In this case, the processing load at one update timing can be reduced.

The color information is not limited to the configuration in which the color information is selected according to the distance in the Z-axis direction from the viewpoint VD, and the color information is selected according to the distance from the viewpoint VD determined by the X coordinate, the Y coordinate, and the Z coordinate. It may be configured. Instead of this, the color information may be selected according to the distance in the X-axis direction from the viewpoint VD, or the color information may be selected according to the distance in the Y-axis direction. Further, the color information may be selected according to the rotation position and scale of the target object instead of the distance from the viewpoint VD.

<Structure for performing focus display>
Next, a configuration for performing focus display will be described.

Focus display means that a plurality of individual images on the display surface G are displayed at a predetermined position or range in the depth direction when they are simultaneously displayed as if the positions of the display surface G in the depth direction are different from each other. The individual image is in focus, and the boundary of the pattern, the boundary of the curved part, and the outer edge part are clearly displayed for the individual image, while the individual image exists on the front side and the back side. With regard to the individual image displayed in this way, the display effect is displayed in which the focus is out of focus, the boundary of the pattern, the boundary of the curved portion, and the outer edge portion are blurred and blurred.

The focus display is executed in the open/close execution mode in which the processing load required for image display is relatively low among the game time and the open/close execution mode. That is, during the game play, it is necessary to perform variable display of symbols in accordance with the predetermined animation data in each of the symbol columns SA1 to SA3. Therefore, in the task processing of the display CPU 131 (FIG. 14), steps S903 to At least the process of step S905 is executed. On the other hand, in the open/close execution mode, since it is not necessary to display the symbols in each of the symbol arrays SA1 to SA3 in a variable manner, step S903 and step S904 are executed in the task processing (FIG. 14) of the display CPU 131. S905 is not executed. Since the processing load on the display CPU 131 is reduced in the open/close execution mode by this amount, the focus display control is executed using the reduced load.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the effect calculation process in the opening/closing execution mode executed by the display CPU 131. The production calculation process in the opening/closing execution mode is executed by the production calculation process in step S904 of the task process (FIG. 14). Further, the effect calculation process in the opening/closing execution mode is started when the data table corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is set.

First, in step S2901, the effect object to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. By the way, at the execution timing of the process of step S2901, the control start setting process (step S901) for the effect object is completed. In subsequent step S2902, various parameters of the grasped effect object are calculated to update the control information.

In subsequent step S2903, the teaching object to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. The teaching object is an object used when displaying an image that allows the player to teach the game situation. For example, if a round is in progress, the current round is the number of the round. Contents such as are taught using an object for teaching (see FIG. 52). Further, the information of the kind of the combination of the symbols finally stopped and displayed on the activated line is taught by using the teaching object in the game time that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode (see FIG. 52). By the way, at the execution timing of the process of step S2903, the control start setting process (step S901) for the teaching object is completed. In a succeeding step S2904, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated and the control information is updated.

In a succeeding step S2905, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not it is a focus effect period in the opening/closing execution mode. The focus production period is a period in which the focus display can be performed based on the operation of the production operation device 48 by the player. In the present pachinko machine 10, a focus production period is set as a part of the opening/closing execution mode, and specifically, a predetermined round such as the first round (that is, a period during which a prize can be won in the variable winning device 22). ) The focus production period is set. However, without being limited to this, the focus production period may be set for a plurality of rounds, the focus production period may be set in the opening or ending, and the focus production period may be set between the rounds. The focus effect period may be set over a predetermined round and the next round, or the entire opening/closing execution mode may be set as the round effect period.

If it is not in the focus production period (step S2905: NO), the main production calculation process is ended as it is. When the production calculation process in the opening/closing execution mode is executed in this way, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process includes the instruction of using the object for the effect grasped in step S2901. The information is set together with the information of the texture use instruction corresponding to the objects. Further, in the drawing list, the parameters calculated in step S2902 are set, and further, the instruction instruction use instruction information grasped in step S2903 is set, and in step S2904. The calculated parameters are set.

If it is the focus effect period (step S2905: YES), it is determined in step S2906 whether it is the focus selection period. In the focus effect period, a focus selection period is set in which the player can select the focus over a predetermined number of frames (predetermined plural image update timings) such as 300 frames from the start timing. The focus display execution period is set when the player selects a focus selection instruction based on the operation of the performance operation device 48 during the focus selection period. This pin and the display execution period are performed until the end of the round to be executed. Individual images that are subject to focus selection during the focus selection period continue to be displayed during the subsequent focus display execution period, so focus display that reflects the results of focus selection during the focus selection period can be executed. Becomes

Note that the focus display execution period is executed over a predetermined number of frames (predetermined plurality of image update timings) such as at least 500 frames. Further, a predetermined round may be set as the focus selection period, and subsequent rounds may be set as the focus display execution period.

In the case of the focus selection period (step S2906: YES), in step S2907, the focus selection parameter adjustment processing is executed, and in step S2908, focus selection execution designation information is stored, and then the main effect is performed. The calculation processing for use ends.

When the production calculation process in the opening/closing execution mode is executed as described above, the rendering list created in the subsequent rendering list output process indicates the instruction to use the production object grasped in step S2901. Information is set together with the information of the texture use instruction corresponding to those objects. Further, in the drawing list, the parameters calculated in step S2902 are set, and further, the instruction instruction use instruction information grasped in step S2903 is set, and in step S2904. The calculated parameters are set. Further, in the drawing list, parameters for focus selection are set as parameters of the object for effect grasped in step S2901, and execution designation information for focus selection is set.

Here, in the focus selection period, a display is made so that the player can recognize that the individual images enabling focus selection are gradually switched on the display surface G. For example, in the state where the plurality of individual images are displayed simultaneously as if they are arranged in the depth direction of the display surface G while being displaced, the plurality of individual images are sequentially transitioned to the focus selectable state. The method of bringing the focus selectable state is arbitrary, but for example, while displaying the annular portion so as to surround the periphery of the individual image, the configuration in which the annular portion is displayed in blinking, the configuration in which the individual image is displayed in an enlarged manner, the individual image It is conceivable to enlarge the image and then reduce it, or to display another image pointing to the individual image. Such display of the focus selectable state is executed by referring to the focus selection parameter by the VDP 135 in a situation where the drawing list in which the focus selection execution designation information is set is output.

In the pachinko machine 10, the individual image that enables focus selection is an effect-specific image displayed in front of the background, but the background image may be included.

On the other hand, when it is not the focus selection period (step S2906: NO), the process proceeds to step S2909. In step S2909, it is determined whether or not focus display is being executed. If the focus display is not being executed, it is determined in step S2910 whether or not the focus instruction command is received from the voice light emission control device 60. The focus instruction command is a command transmitted from the audio emission control device 60 at the end timing of the focus selection period when the player issues a focus selection instruction during the focus selection period. Information on the individual image for which focus selection is instructed is included.

If a negative determination is made in step S2910, this processing is ended as it is. When the effect calculation process in the opening/closing execution mode is executed in this way, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process makes a negative determination in step S2905 and ends the effect calculation process. The same information as in the case of doing is set.

When a positive determination is made in step S2910, focus range calculation processing is executed in step S2911. In the focus range calculation process, a process of calculating the focus range is executed from the information of the individual image of the focus selection instruction target included in the focus instruction command. In this case, the type of the individual image displayed during the focus production period is already determined at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and therefore the data of the focus range is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the individual image to be the focus selection target. Is predetermined as a focus range table. Therefore, in step S2911, the focus range table is first read from the memory module 133, and the focus range data corresponding to the individual image that is the focus selection instruction target is read. Then, in step S2912, after the execution designating information of the focus production is stored, the production processing for the main production is ended.

When the production calculation process in the opening/closing execution mode is executed as described above, the rendering list created in the subsequent rendering list output process indicates the instruction to use the production object grasped in step S2901. Information is set together with the information of the texture use instruction corresponding to those objects. Further, in the drawing list, the parameters calculated in step S2902 are set, and further, the instruction instruction use instruction information grasped in step S2903 is set, and in step S2904. The calculated parameters are set. Further, in the drawing list, the focus range data calculated in step S2911 is set, and focus effect execution designation information is stored.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S2910, the focus display is in the execution state. The focus display execution state is set by, for example, setting "1" to a flag for distinguishing whether or not the focus display execution state is in the data table. When the focus display is in the execution state, an affirmative decision is made in step S2909, the focus production execution designation information is stored in step S2912, and then the present production arithmetic processing is ended.

When the production calculation process in the opening/closing execution mode is executed in this way, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process includes the instruction of using the object for the effect grasped in step S2901. The information is set together with the information of the texture use instruction corresponding to the objects. Further, in the drawing list, the parameters calculated in step S2902 are set, and further, the instruction instruction use instruction information grasped in step S2903 is set, and in step S2904. The calculated parameters are set. Further, in the drawing list, focus range data corresponding to the current focus effect is set, and focus effect execution designation information is set.

The VDP 135 performs image display for the focus selection period and image display for the focus display execution period based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131. In this case, regarding the image display for the focus selection period, the individual images in the focus selectable state as described above are sequentially displayed based on the drawing process (FIG. 16) being executed with reference to the focus selection parameter. Image display is performed so as to be switched. On the other hand, the image display for the focus display execution period is performed by executing the process for adjusting the focus after the process of shifting the state of the three-dimensional image data to the state of the two-dimensional image data is executed. ..

Hereinafter, a specific configuration for adjusting the focus in the VDP 135 will be described. FIG. 49A is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area of the VRAM 134 used for adjusting the focus in the VDP 135.

As shown in FIG. 49A, the VRAM 134 is provided with a frame buffer 142 having a first frame area 142a and a second frame area 142b, and a Z buffer 143. The respective buffers 142 and 143 have already been described, and the frame areas 142a and 142b of the frame buffer 142 each have two-dimensional drawing data which is referred to when drawing on the symbol display device 31. And the Z buffer 143 is used to temporarily store coordinate data in the Z-axis direction when the hidden surface processing (FIG. 18) is executed.

In addition to the buffers 142 and 143, the VRAM 134 is provided with a blurring buffer 181 as an area for adjusting the focus in the VDP 135. The blurring buffer 181 has the same number of unit areas as the frame areas 142a and 142b. That is, the frame areas 142a and 142b have the same number of unit areas, and the blurring buffer 181 has the same number of unit areas. The blurring buffer 181 can temporarily store the drawing list created in one frame area as it is.

If the drawing list can be temporarily stored as it is, the number of unit areas in the blurring buffer 181 may be larger than the number of unit areas included in one frame area.

The processing for adjusting the focus in the VDP 135 is executed by the drawing data composition processing of step S1012 in the drawing processing (FIG. 16). FIG. 49B is a flow chart showing the drawing data combination processing.

In the drawing data synthesizing process, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not focus instruction execution designation information is set in the current drawing list. If not set, the process proceeds to step S3002.

In step S3002, the background drawing data already created in step S1010 and stored in the screen buffer 144 is written in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn this time. After that, in step S3003, the rendering data for the effect and the pattern already created in the previous step S1011 and stored in the screen buffer 144 is set to the frame area 142a in which the rendering data for the background is written as described above. , 142b, the main combining process is terminated.

In this case, drawing data for effects and symbols is written while referring to the α value, as already described. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode, the design does not exist in the drawing data for the effect and the design, and only the data corresponding to the individual image for the effect exists. Furthermore, in the opening/closing execution mode, the drawing data for the effect and the pattern includes the data of the teaching individual image created based on pasting the teaching texture to the teaching object. The drawing data for the effect and the design are created so that the data of the individual image for teaching is not overlapped with the data of the other individual image from the front side.

On the other hand, if the focus effect execution designation information is set in the current drawing list, the process advances to step S3004. In step S3004, similar to step S3002, the background drawing data already created in step S1010 immediately before and stored in the screen buffer 144 is written in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn this time. In the following step S3005, like the above-described step S3003, the drawing data for the effect and the pattern which has already been created in the previous step S1011 and stored in the screen buffer 144 is written into the drawing data for the background as described above. The frame areas 142a and 142b are written. After that, in step S3006, after performing focus processing adjustment processing, the main synthesis processing ends.

FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing the adjustment processing for focus effect.

In the adjustment process for focus effect, first, in steps S3101 to S3107, a blur map creation process for creating blur map data to be referred to for performing the focus effect is executed. In the drawing data that is the two-dimensional image data, the blur map data shows how the color information set in each unit area of the frame areas 142a and 142b in which the drawing data is created is the three-dimensional image data. It is map data for specifying with the VDP 135 whether or not it has a coordinate in the Z-axis direction. That is, it is data in which coordinate data in the Z-axis direction is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the unit areas of the frame areas 142a and 142b.

Here, as described above, the drawing data for the background and the drawing data for the effect and the pattern set each object in the world coordinate system in the drawing process (FIG. 16) (steps S1002 to S1004). , The conversion process to the camera coordinate system (step S1005), the conversion process to the view coordinate system (step S1006), and in that state, the clipping process (step S1007), the lighting process (step S1008), and the color. It is created after the information setting process (step S1009) is executed. In this case, since each drawing data is created for the frame areas 142a and 142b, when creating the drawing data, the color information setting process is performed in the visual field coordinate system as described above. The data state is maintained, and is maintained even after the drawing data is created until a new drawing process is started. Then, the blur map data is created using the data in the state in which the color information setting process is performed in the visual field coordinate system.

In the blur map creating process, the Z map 143 is used to create the blur map data based on the same process as the hidden surface process (FIG. 18). However, in the hidden surface processing (FIG. 18), the drawing data for the background is created with only the image data for the background as the processing target, and the drawing data for the production and the pattern is created with only the drawing data for the effect and the pattern as the processing target. However, in the blurring map creation processing, all the image data clipped in the visual field coordinate system are collectively treated as the processing target without performing such a distinction.

Regarding the blurring map creation processing, first, in step S3101, an individual image included on the Z axis of the current projection target dot in the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 17) is used as a reference. Understand the Z value set in the target pixel of the individual image that is the test target. In a succeeding step S3102, the Z value set in the area of the dot corresponding to the drawing target dot in the Z buffer 143 is grasped.

In a succeeding step S3103, it is determined whether or not the Z value of the individual image grasped in step S3101 corresponds to the front side in the Z-axis direction of the Z value of the Z buffer 143 grasped in step S3102. If it corresponds to the front side, the process advances to step S3104, and the Z value grasped in step S3101 is overwritten in the dot area referred to in step S3102 in the Z buffer 143. Then, it progresses to step S3105.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3103 that the front side is not supported, the process proceeds to step S3105 without executing the process of step S3104. That is, when the Z value of the pixel that is the test target is the same as the Z value that is already set for the target dot of the Z buffer 143 or is on the far side in the Z axis direction, the Z buffer 143 is not updated. .. On the other hand, when the Z value of the test target pixel is on the front side in the Z axis direction with respect to the Z value already set for the target dot of the Z buffer 143, the Z buffer 143 is updated.

In step S3105, it is determined whether or not the Z test is completed for all target pixels included on the Z axis with respect to the projection target dot. If not completed, the process returns to step S3101 to perform the Z test on a new target pixel.

If it is completed, it is determined in step S3106 whether the Z test is completed for all the dots in the screen area PC12. If not completed, the projection target dot is updated in step S3107 and then the process returns to step S3101 to perform the Z test on the new projection target dot. If it has been completed, it means that the creation of the blur map data has been completed, and the process advances to step S3108.

By creating the blurring map data as described above, the VDP 135 specifies what coordinate the color information corresponding to each unit area of the composite drawing data has in the Z-axis direction. Is possible. Therefore, with respect to the color information corresponding to each unit area, the relative positional relationship in the depth direction can be specified by the VDP 135.

In the focus effect adjustment processing, after the blur map data is created in steps S3101 to S3107, the process proceeds to step S3108.

In step S3108, the combined drawing data created in the drawing target frame areas 142a and 142b by the processing in steps S3004 and S3005 in the drawing data combination processing (FIG. 49B) is stored in the blurring buffer 181. In the following step S3109, the focus range data set in the current drawing list is read.

Then, in steps S3110 to S3117, blurring processing is executed based on the read focus range data. In the blurring process, determination processing as to whether or not the unit area in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be rendered this time is the execution target of the blurring process is performed, and the unit area determined to be the execution target is executed. , Processing for causing blurring is performed, and further, these processing are performed for all unit areas included in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be rendered this time.

Here, processing for causing blurring is not executed for a unit area whose coordinate data in the Z-axis direction corresponds to the focus range, but the focus range corresponds to a single coordinate data in the Z-axis direction. Instead, it corresponds to a plurality of coordinate data that are continuous in the Z-axis direction, as shown in FIG. That is, the focus range is set to have a certain depth of field, and the image displayed on the display surface G is not too blurred. Although the focus range is specifically arbitrary, it is set so as to be able to include the entire one individual image for one effect having a predetermined thickness in the Z-axis direction in the state of the three-dimensional image data. Preferably.

With respect to the unit area in which the coordinate data in the Z-axis direction is out of the focus range, the degree of blurring is set to increase as the distance from the focus range increases. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the first blur range, the second blur range, and the third blur range are set so that the degree of blur gradually increases as the distance from the focus range increases. It is set.

The first blur range is set so as to be continuous from the focus range, and corresponds to a plurality of coordinate data that is continuous on the side away from the focus range in the Z-axis direction. The first blur range exists both on the back side and the front side of the focus range. The second blur range is set to be continuous from the first blur range, and corresponds to a plurality of coordinate data that is continuous in the Z-axis direction on the side away from the focus range and the first blur range. The second blur range exists both on the further back side of the first blur range on the back side and on the further front side of the first blur range on the front side. Further, the third blur range is set to be continuous from the second blur range, and corresponds to a plurality of coordinate data that is continuous on the side away from the focus range, the first blur range, and the second blur range in the Z-axis direction. is doing. The third blurring range exists both on the further back side of the second blurring range on the back side and on the further front side of the second blurring range on the front side.

The first blurring range, the second blurring range, and the third blurring range are specifically arbitrary, but in the state of the three-dimensional image data, the entire individual image for one effect having a predetermined thickness in the Z-axis direction. Is preferably set so that each of the ranges can include. In this case, the numbers of coordinate data in the Z-axis direction included in the first blur range, the second blur range, and the third blur range are the same as each other, and the number of the coordinate data is the same as the focus range. The focus ranges may be different or may be different from each other. For example, the number of pieces of coordinate data in the Z-axis direction included in the blurring range farther from the focus range may be increased.

As described above, the focus range is changed based on the player's operation of the staging operation device 48, and therefore the focus range data stored in advance in the memory module 133 is included in the focus range. It is set as data of the number of coordinate data that are continuous in the Z-axis direction. Then, based on the operation of the production operating device 48 by the player, the Z-axis direction coordinates that are the reference for setting the focus range are determined, and the Z included in the focus range data is based on the coordinates. The focus range is set by converting the number of coordinate data in the axial direction into the range of the actual coordinate data. In this case, it is preferable that the coordinate in the Z-axis direction, which is a reference in setting the focus range, is set as the coordinate on the most front side or the coordinate on the farthest side of the focus range. By setting it as the frontmost coordinate, the focus range can be set by simply adding the number of coordinate data set in the focus range data to the reference coordinate. It becomes possible. Even if it is set as the innermost coordinate, the number of coordinate data set in the focus range data is simply subtracted from the reference coordinate, and the focus range is Can be set.

Similarly, regarding the first blurring range, the second blurring range, and the third blurring range, the data for each blurring range stored in advance in the memory module 133 is in the Z-axis direction that is included in the blurring range. It is set as data of the number of continuous coordinate data. Then, based on the focus range determined as described above, the reference coordinates of each blurring range are determined, and by applying the data for each blurring range to the reference coordinates, each blurring range is determined. It becomes possible to set.

As described above, the first blur range, the second blur range, and the third blur range can be set for each of the front side and the back side of the focus range, but as described above, the focus range is set by the player. It is determined based on the operation of the staging operation device 48. Then, the focus range may be set corresponding to the effect-specific individual image existing closest to the front side. In this case, each blur range is set only on the far side with respect to the focus range.

Returning to the description of FIG. 50A, in the blurring process, first in step S3110, the coordinate data in the Z-axis direction corresponding to the current unit area is read from the blurring map data created in steps S3101 to S3107. In a succeeding step S3111, it is determined whether or not the coordinate data in the Z-axis direction read in the step S3110 is included in the focus range read in the step S3109. If the unit area is included in the focus range, it is not necessary to perform the process of causing blurring on the unit area, and thus the process proceeds to step S3116 without performing the processes of steps S3112 to S3115.

If it is not included in the focus range, it is determined in step S3112 whether or not the current unit area corresponds to the teaching area for displaying the teaching individual image. The individual teaching image is an image displayed by using the teaching object described above. If it corresponds to the teaching area, the process proceeds to step S3116 without executing the processes of steps S3113 to S3115. That is, the processing for causing blurring is not performed on the individual image for teaching. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably teach the information using the individual image for teaching even when performing the focus effect.

By the way, since the position at which the individual image for teaching is displayed does not change regardless of the operation mode of the staging operation device 48 by the player, the address of the unit area included in the teaching area is predetermined. The data is stored in the memory module 133 in advance.

If a negative decision is made in step S3112, the operation proceeds to step S3113. In step S3113, blurring range determination processing is executed. Specifically, it is determined which of the first blur range, the second blur range, and the third blur range the coordinate data in the Z-axis direction read in step S3110 is included in. Determines the target blur range. Then, in step S3114, blurring generation processing is executed.

The blurring generation process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S3201, it is determined whether the first blurring range is determined in step S3113. If the first blurring range has been determined, in step S3202, a first predetermined number of unit areas are specified in each of the X-axis directions with reference to the unit area of this time, and the color is extracted from each of the unit areas. Extract information. This extraction is performed from the blurring buffer 181 rather than from the frame areas 142a and 142b that are the current drawing targets. In step S3202, the color information set in the unit area this time is also extracted, but this extraction is also performed from the blurring buffer 181.

In subsequent step S3203, blurring generation processing in the X-axis direction is executed. In the blurring generation processing, a Gaussian filter is used to generate blurring. In other words, centering on the target unit area this time, weighting according to the distance in the X-axis direction from the centered unit area is determined using the Gaussian function for each of the extracted unit areas. Then, the color information of the center unit area and the extracted color information of the unit area are blended while the determined weighting is applied. The color information of this blend result is temporarily stored in the register 153.

In a succeeding step S3204, the first predetermined number of unit areas are specified in each of the Y-axis directions on the basis of the present unit area, and the color information is extracted from each of the unit areas. This extraction is performed from the blurring buffer 181. Further, in step S3204, the color information set in the unit area this time is also extracted, but this extraction is also performed from the blurring buffer 181.

In a succeeding step S3205, blurring generation processing in the Y-axis direction is executed. In the blurring generation processing, a Gaussian filter is used to generate blurring. In other words, centering on the target unit area this time, weighting according to the distance in the Y-axis direction from the centered unit area is determined using the Gaussian function for each of the extracted unit areas. Then, the color information of the center unit area and the extracted color information of the unit area are blended while the determined weighting is applied. The color information of this blend result is temporarily stored in the register 153.

Then, in step S3206, blending processing is executed. Specifically, the color information of the blend result calculated in step S3203 and the color information of the blend result calculated in step S3205 are blended at the same ratio. After that, the main blurring generation processing ends.

By performing the blurring generation processing as described above, as shown in FIG. 51(b-1), the first predetermined number is set on both sides in the X-axis direction with reference to the unit area of interest this time. The color information of the unit area that is the target of this time is the color information that is set in the unit area of the minute and the color information that is set in the unit areas of the first predetermined number on both sides in the Y-axis direction. Blended to information.

When a negative determination is made in step S3201, it is determined in step S3207 whether or not the second blurring range is determined in step S3113. If the second blurring range has been determined, in step S3208, a second predetermined number of unit areas, which is larger than the first predetermined number, is specified in each of the X-axis directions with reference to the current unit area. , Color information is extracted from each of these unit areas. This extraction is performed from the blurring buffer 181. In step S3208, the color information set in the unit area this time is extracted from the blurring buffer 181.

In a succeeding step S3209, blurring generation processing in the X-axis direction is executed. The specific contents of this processing are the same as in step S3203 above.

In a succeeding step S3210, a second predetermined number of unit areas larger than the first predetermined number are specified in each of the Y-axis directions on the basis of the present unit area, and color information is extracted from each of the unit areas. This extraction is performed from the blurring buffer 181. Further, in step S3210, the color information set in the unit area this time is extracted from the blurring buffer 181.

In a succeeding step S3211, blurring generation processing in the Y-axis direction is executed. The specific content of this processing is the same as that in step S3205.

After that, in step S3212, blending processing is executed. Specifically, the color information of the blend result calculated in step S3209 and the color information of the blend result calculated in step S3211 are blended at the same ratio. After that, the main blurring generation processing ends.

By executing the blurring generation process as described above, as shown in FIG. 51(b-2), the second predetermined number is set on both sides in the X-axis direction with reference to the unit area of interest this time. The color information set in the unit area for minutes and the color information set in the second predetermined number of unit areas on both sides in the Y-axis direction are the colors of the target unit area of the present time. Blended to information. In this case, since the number of unit areas to be blended is larger than that in the case of FIG. 51(b-1), the degree of blurring is greater in the second blurring range than in the first blurring range. Become.

A negative determination in step S3207 means that the third blurring range has been determined in step S3113. When the third blurring range is determined, in step S3213, a third predetermined number of unit areas, which is larger than the second predetermined number, is specified in each of the X-axis directions with reference to the current unit area. , Color information is extracted from each of these unit areas. This extraction is performed from the blurring buffer 181. In step S3213, the color information set in the unit area this time is extracted from the blurring buffer 181.

In subsequent step S3214, blurring generation processing in the X-axis direction is executed. The specific contents of this processing are the same as in step S3203 above.

In subsequent step S3215, a third predetermined number of unit areas, which is larger than the second predetermined number, is specified in each of the Y-axis directions on the basis of the present unit area, and color information is extracted from each of the unit areas. This extraction is performed from the blurring buffer 181. In step S3215, the color information set in the unit area this time is extracted from the blurring buffer 181.

In subsequent step S3216, blurring generation processing in the Y-axis direction is executed. The specific content of this processing is the same as that in step S3205.

Then, in step S3217, blending processing is executed. Specifically, the color information of the blend result calculated in step S3214 and the color information of the blend result calculated in step S3216 are blended at the same ratio. After that, the main blurring generation processing ends. By executing the blurring generation processing as described above, it is possible to make the degree of blurring larger than in the case of the second blurring range.

Returning to the explanation of the adjustment process for focus effect (FIG. 50A), after executing the blurring generation process in step S3114, the color information of the result calculated in the blurring generation process is displayed in step S3115. After overwriting the current unit area in the frame areas 142a and 142b that are the drawing targets, the process proceeds to step S3116. As a result, the color information in a state corresponding to each blur range is set in the unit area.

Here, in the configuration in which the color information resulting from the blurring is sequentially set in the frame areas 142a and 142b that are the drawing targets, in the blurring generation processing, as described above, the frame areas 142a and 142b are processed. Instead of reading the color information from the color information, the color information is read from the blurring buffer 181. As a result, when blurring is generated in a predetermined unit area, it is possible to prevent the use of the color information resulting from blurring. Therefore, it is possible to generate blurring in a mode that does not depend on the order in which the blurring generation processing is executed.

In step S3116, it is determined whether or not all the unit areas of the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn this time are the execution targets of the processing in steps S3110 to S3115. If not completed, the target unit area is updated in step S3117, and then the process returns to step S3110 to execute the processes of steps S3110 to S3115 for the new target unit area. If it has been completed, this adjustment process ends.

Next, the contents of the focus display will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 52A shows a state in which the focus display is not performed, and FIG. 52B shows a state in which the focus display is performed.

In the state where the focus display is not performed, as shown in FIG. 52A, the individual images CH11, CH12, and CH13 for each effect, the background image (the image of the sea surface, the image of the beach, and the sky) CH14 and The individual images CH15 and CH16 for each teaching are in focus. Therefore, in each of these images CH11 to CH16, the boundary of the pattern, the boundary of the bent portion, and the outer edge portion are clearly displayed.

On the other hand, in the state where the focus display is being performed, as shown in FIG. 52B, the individual image CH11 for effect and the background image CH14 of the sandy beach portion where the individual image CH11 is present are in the focus range. However, the individual images CH12 and CH13 for other effects and the background image CH14 of other portions are out of focus range, so that the borders and bends of the pattern are not displayed. The boundary of the part, and further the outer edge part is displayed in a blurred state, which is unclear. In particular, the degree of blurring increases as the display is farther from the individual image CH11 for effect included in the focus range toward the front side and the back side in the depth direction of the display surface G. ing. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the individual image CH11 for effect is in focus.

However, even in the state where the focus display is being performed, as shown in FIG. 52B, the individual images CH15 and CH16 for teaching are displayed as clearly as in FIG. 52A. As a result, even if the focus display is performed, it is possible to satisfactorily teach the information using the individual teaching images CH15 and CH16. Further, since the individual images CH15 and CH16 for teaching are displayed as if they are arranged on the front side of the other images, even if they are excluded from the subject of blurring, they are excluded from the subject of focus display. The player who is playing the game can clearly recognize it, and the focus can be displayed well.

Further, at the time of the focus display, the blur map data is not stored in the memory module 133 in advance, but is created each time by the VDP 135. This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity. In particular, in the configuration in which the player can actively participate in the game by setting the focus range based on the operation of the effect operation device 48 by the player, the blurring map data is set in advance. If you try to save it, the data capacity will be enormous. In addition, if it is attempted to suppress the enormous increase in the data capacity, the number of focus range patterns that can be selected based on the operation of the effect operation device 48 will be reduced. On the other hand, as described above, by creating the blurring map data by the VDP 135 each time, it is possible to suitably encourage the active participation of the player in the game while reducing the data capacity. Becomes

On the other hand, if the blur map data is created as described above, the processing load of the VDP 135 increases accordingly. On the other hand, when blurring is performed, it is necessary to perform a complicated process when averaging color information because the blurring is performed not in a three-dimensional image state but in a two-dimensional image state. Is eliminated, and the processing load for generating blurring can be reduced.

<Another form of focus display>
The blur map data is not limited to the configuration for creating the drawing data, and the blur map data may be stored in the memory module 133 in advance. In this case, if the focus range is selected based on the operation of the effect operation device 48, it is necessary to previously create the blurring map data corresponding to all the variations related to the selection. If the focus range is not selected based on the operation of the effect operation device 48 and the blurring display is performed in a certain manner, the blurring map data according to the manner may be created in advance.

In the configuration in which the blur map data is created in advance as described above, the data set corresponding to each unit area in the blur map data does not need to be the coordinate data in the Z-axis direction, and the focus range, Further, it may be data indicating which one of the blur ranges corresponds.

The averaging process of the color information for causing the blur does not have to be performed after converting the three-dimensional image data into the two-dimensional image data, and may be performed in the state of the three-dimensional image data. In this case, when the surrounding pixels are blended with the reference pixel, the distance from the reference pixel to the surrounding pixels is calculated in a three-dimensional state, and weighting is performed according to the calculation result. The blending process may be performed in a state in which is applied to the color information of the surrounding pixels.

In the averaging process of the color information for causing the blur, the extracted color information may be uniformly blended instead of weighting the Gaussian function according to the distance from the center. In this case, the realism of the blurred display is reduced, but the processing load is reduced.

The averaging process of color information for causing blurring is not limited to the configuration performed in each of the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction, and may be performed in only one of them. In this case, the realism of the blurred display is reduced, but the processing load is reduced.

The averaging process of the color information for causing blurring is limited to the configuration in which the drawing data set in the drawing target frame areas 142a and 142b is separately stored in the blurring buffer 181. Instead, the frame regions 142a and 142b to be drawn may be used as they are. In this case, when blurring is performed on the color information of a predetermined unit area, the color information of the unit area that has already been blurred is used, and the order of the processing that causes blurring affects the degree of blurring. Although it is given, the storage capacity can be reduced in that the blurring buffer 181 does not need to be provided separately, and the processing load can be reduced in that the separate storage in the blurring buffer 181 is not required. Be done.

A buffer other than the Z buffer 143 may be used when creating the blur map data. In this case, the VRAM 134 may be provided with a dedicated buffer for creating the blur map data.

The setting process of the color information is performed in step S1009 instead of the configuration in which the drawing data for the background and the drawing data for the effect and the pattern are individually created and the drawing data for one frame is combined to create the drawing data. After execution, the drawing data for one frame may be collectively created. In this configuration, when the hidden surface processing is used to create the drawing data for the one frame, the Z buffer 143 is set with the coordinate data in the Z axis direction corresponding to each unit area. Therefore, the data created in the Z buffer 143 by this hidden surface processing can be used as it is as the blur map data.

-A focus display may be performed as an effect for game play. In this case, in the same manner as the individual image for teaching is excluded from the blurring target as described above, the symbols variably displayed in each of the symbol arrays SA1 to SA3 may be excluded from the blurring target. If focus display is performed as an effect during reach, the symbols forming the reach line may be excluded from the blurring target on the symbol arrays SA1 and SA3 that are stopped and displayed first. Additionally or alternatively, the symbols in the final stop symbol array SA2 may be excluded from the blurring target. By excluding the symbols forming the reach line, it is possible to use the focus display as the reach effect without deteriorating the distinguishability of the type of the reach symbol, and excluding the symbol of the final stop symbol string SA2. This makes it possible to use the focus display as a reach effect without deteriorating the distinguishability of the symbols existing near the reach line in the final stop symbol sequence SA2.

In addition, while displaying an image that teaches the symbols forming the reach line or the type of the reach line, the reach lines are formed in the configuration in which the reach effect using the focus display is performed while the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 are not displayed. The image that teaches the symbol or the type of the symbol being drawn may be excluded from the blurring target. As a result, the focus display can be used as the reach effect without deteriorating the distinguishability of the reach pattern type.

Further, in the case of performing focus display as an effect for game play, the target to be excluded from the blurring target may be other than the symbol, and for example, an image for teaching the number of pieces of pending information is displayed on the display surface G. In this case, the image for teaching the number of the holding information may be excluded from the blurring target.

Focus display may be performed in a configuration in which image display is performed using two-dimensional image data such as sprite data instead of performing image display using three-dimensional image data. In this case, when setting the sprite data in the frame areas 142a and 142b, the coordinate data corresponding to the depth direction of the display surface G is set in each sprite data, and the coordinate data indicates the focus range and each blur range. Depending on which one is included, a configuration for performing a gradation display is conceivable.

The configuration for executing the process of creating the map data including the parameter group after setting the image data in the world coordinate system may be performed for a purpose other than the focus display.

For example, in a configuration in which whether to turn on or off according to the orientation of the surface of an object is set in order to display whether a predetermined area is blinking in an image for one frame, in the world coordinate system or the visual field coordinate system. In the state set to, the orientation of each surface is read as a parameter, and map data is created as data that aggregates them. Then, the drawing data after projection may be subjected to blinking display by processing the color information based on the created map data.

In addition, for example, in displaying a surface such as the sea surface whose shape changes with time in an image for one frame, the color information set in each surface data is selected according to the orientation of the surface of the object. In a state where the coordinate system or the visual field coordinate system is set, the orientation of each surface is read as a parameter, and map data is created as data that aggregates them. Then, with respect to the drawing data after projection, the surface display may be performed by processing the color information based on the created map data.

<Structure for changing pattern display>
Next, a configuration for performing the pattern change display will be described.

The pattern change display means that when the special character is continuously displayed over a plurality of frames (a plurality of image update timings), the outer shape of the special character is the same but the pattern is changed as the frame progresses. It is a display effect. However, instead of simply changing the pattern, when changing a part of the pattern of the special character, the type of the first partial texture to be attached to the special object corresponding to the special character is switched. Regarding the change of other patterns of the special character, by changing the pasting position of the second partial texture relative to the special object while the same kind of the second partial texture is stuck to the special object, Change the pattern.

The special object, the first partial texture, and the second partial texture will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53(a) to 53(c). 53(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the special object PC20, and FIGS. 53(b-1) to (b-3) are explanatory diagrams for describing the first partial textures PC21 to PC23. FIGS. 53(c-1) to 53(c-4) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the second partial textures PC24 to PC27.

As shown in FIG. 53A, the special object PC20 includes a large number of polygons, is created as data corresponding to a three-dimensional shape, and has a plurality of parts BP, AP1 to AP4. As the plurality of parts BP and AP1 to AP4, a main body parts BP and a plurality of accessory parts AP1 to AP4 attached to the main body parts BP are included. The special character is a character in which a whale is applied to a humanoid, the body part part BP corresponds to the face part and the body part of the body, and the attached part parts AP1 to AP4 correspond to the hand part and the foot part continuous from the body part. is doing.

As shown in FIGS. 53(b-1) to 53(b-3), the body part BP displays a pattern of the face (pattern of eyes and mouth) and whether the body reflects light. The first partial textures PC21 to PC23 for displaying the image including both the patterns are attached. These first partial textures PC21 to PC23 are set so as to be able to cover the entire body part BP. In addition, regarding the data for displaying the face pattern, the positions (coordinates) of the body part BP to which these data are attached are the same between the first partial textures PC21 to PC23. On the other hand, regarding the data for displaying as if the body is reflecting light, the positions (coordinates) of the body part BP to which these data are attached are the first partial textures PC21 to PC23. Differ between

That is, the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 display the data for displaying the invariant pattern whose sticking position does not change in the main body parts BP and the changing pattern whose sticking position changes in the main body parts BP. The first partial textures PC21 to PC23 have the same data structure for displaying the invariant pattern, but have different data structures for displaying the changing pattern.

On the other hand, in the accessory parts AP1 to AP4, as shown in FIGS. 53(c-1) to (c-4), a pattern for displaying as if the hands and feet reflect light. The second partial textures PC24 to PC27 for displaying an image including is attached. These second partial textures PC24 to PC27 are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the accessory parts AP1 to AP4, and one second partial texture PC24 to PC27 for one accessory part AP1 to AP4. Only provided. Each of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 is set so as to be able to cover the corresponding accessory parts AP1 to AP4. In this case, in each of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27, the pattern that causes the boundary portion is set to have continuity with the pattern that causes the boundary portion on the opposite side thereof.

The pasting of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 and the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 to the special object PC20 is performed based on the UV coordinate values set in advance. The UV coordinate values are as described above, and are stored in the memory module 133 in a state of being attached to the combination of the image data for the object and the image data for the texture, and each pixel of the image data for the texture is stored. Can be made to correspond to each pixel of the image data for the object on a one-to-one basis.

When displaying the special character, the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 to be pasted are changed in a predetermined order with respect to the body part part BP of the special object PC20. This order is set so that the manner in which the changing pattern changes has continuity. On the other hand, one second partial texture PC24 to PC27 corresponding to each is attached to the accessory parts AP1 to AP4 of the special object PC20, and the UV coordinates to be referred to when the pasting is performed. The value is changed from the initial setting state in a predetermined manner. This change of the UV coordinate value is set so that the manner in which each of the patterns corresponding to each of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 changes is continuous.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the pattern change display using the special object PC20, the first partial textures PC21 to PC23, and the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 will be described. The special object PC20, the first partial textures PC21 to PC23, and the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 are stored in the memory module 133 in advance.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing for the special character executed by the display CPU 131. The calculation processing for the special character is executed by the calculation processing for effect in step S904 of the task processing (FIG. 14). In addition, the arithmetic processing for the special character is started when the data table corresponding to the game time in which the special character is displayed is set.

First, in step S3301, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not the special character is being displayed. If the special character is not being displayed, the process advances to step S3302. In step S3302, it is determined whether it is the start timing of displaying the special character. If it is not the start timing, this operation processing is ended as it is, and if it is the start timing, the process proceeds to step S3303.

In step S3303, the special object PC 20 is grasped as a control target based on the currently set data table. By the way, at the execution timing of the process of step S3303, the control start process for the special object PC 20 is completed in the immediately preceding control start setting process (step S901). The control information of the special object PC 20 whose control has been started is stored and held in the work RAM 132 until the display of the special character is completed.

In a succeeding step S3304, initial setting processing of the first partial texture is executed. Specifically, the first partial texture PC21 whose use order is set first among the plurality of types of first partial textures PC21 to PC23 is specified, and the use instruction information of the first partial texture PC21 is stored. The data of the use order of the plurality of types of first partial textures PC21 to PC23 is stored in advance in the memory module 133 as table information.

In a succeeding step S3305, initial setting processing of each second partial texture is executed. Here, in the display CPU 131, when changing the UV coordinate value of each of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27, the change amount from the initial coordinate value is derived in a one-to-one correspondence with each of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27. Then, the derived changes are provided to the VDP 135. In the VDP 135, the provided data of each variation amount is applied to each corresponding initial coordinate value. In this case, when viewed from one of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27, since the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 include many pixels, the initial coordinate value exists for each of these many pixels. There is. Therefore, the change amount data corresponding to the one second partial texture PC24 to PC27 is uniformly applied to each initial coordinate value of the one second partial texture PC24 to PC27.

For example, in a situation in which the initial coordinate values of the predetermined pixels forming one of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 are (U1, V1) and the initial coordinate values of the other pixels are (U2, V2), , The UV coordinate value of the predetermined pixel is set to (U1+w1, V1+w2), and the UV coordinate values of the other pixels are set to (U2+w1, V2+w2). It Therefore, the relative positions of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 with respect to the accessory parts AP1 to AP4 are changed with the same directionality and the same change amount. Since step S3305 is an initialization process, data corresponding to the fact that there is no change amount is stored.

The change amount data for changing the UV coordinate values of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 from the initial coordinate values is set as table information in one-to-one correspondence with the use order information. The table information is stored in the memory module 133 in advance. The table information is set individually for each of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27.

After that, in step S3306, the special character start designation information is stored, and in step S3307, various parameters are calculated for the special object PC 20 to update the control information related to the special object PC 20. This arithmetic processing is ended.

When the calculation process for the special character is executed as described above, the information of the instruction to use the special object PC 20 is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process, and in step S3304. The stored use instruction information of the first partial texture PC 21 and the data of each variation amount derived in step S3305 are set. Furthermore, in the drawing list, the parameters calculated in step S3307 are set and the special character start designation information is set.

When it is determined in step S3301 that the special character is being displayed, in step S3308, the special object PC 20 is grasped as a control target based on the currently set data table.

In a succeeding step S3309, it is determined whether or not it is the update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 based on the currently set data table. The update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 is set to once for a predetermined plurality of first specific number frames, that is, once for a predetermined plurality of first specific number of image update timings. Moreover, the update timing is constant. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set once for each frame, that is, once for each image update timing, and from the predetermined first partial textures PC21 to PC23 to the next first part. The number of frames until the update timing of the textures PC21 to PC23 (the image update timing number) and the number of frames from the first partial texture PC21 to PC23 to the update timing of the next first partial texture PC21 to PC23 ( The image update timing number) may be different.

When it is not the update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23, in step S3310, the use instruction information of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 stored in the previous processing time is stored as it is. On the other hand, if it is the update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23, the use instruction information corresponding to the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 in the next order is stored in step S3311.

After executing the processing of step S3310 or step S3311, in step S3312, it is determined whether it is the update timing of the UV coordinate value applied to each of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27. The update timing of the UV coordinate value is set once in a predetermined plurality of second specific number frames, that is, once in a predetermined plurality of second specific number of image update timings, and this update is further performed. The timing is constant. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set once for each frame, that is, once for each image update timing, and may be set from a predetermined UV coordinate value to the next UV coordinate value update timing. The number of frames until that time (the number of image update timings) may be different from the number of frames (the number of image update timings) from the UV coordinate value to the next update timing of the UV coordinate value.

Further, the update timing of the UV coordinate value is synchronized with the update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23, but may be asynchronous. To make them asynchronous, a configuration in which each update cycle is different can be considered. In this case, the update timing of the UV coordinate values may be shorter or longer than the update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23, but the update cycle is short on the update side of the UV coordinate values. However, considering that there is almost no effect on the data capacity, it is preferable to set the update timing of the UV coordinate value to a cycle shorter than the update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23.

If it is not the update timing of the UV coordinate value, in step S3313, the data of each change amount stored in the previous processing is stored as it is. On the other hand, if it is the update timing of the UV coordinate value, in step S3314, the data of each change amount in the next order is stored.

After executing the processing of step S3313 or step S3314, the continuation designation information of the special character is stored in step S3315, and various parameters of the special object PC20 are calculated in step S3307 to calculate the special object PC20. After updating the information for control according to the above, the present arithmetic processing is terminated.

When the calculation process for the special character is executed as described above, the information of the instruction to use the special object PC 20 is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process, and the above step S3310 and The use instruction information of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 stored in any of step S3311 and the data of each variation amount stored in any of the steps S3313 and S3314 are set. Furthermore, in the drawing list, the parameters calculated in step S3307 are set, and special character continuation designation information is set.

When the VDP 135 receives the drawing list for displaying the special character, the special object PC 20 is set in the world coordinate system in the setting process (step S1003) for the effect in the drawing process (FIG. 16). To do. In this case, since the coordinates, scale, rotation angle, etc. when setting to the world coordinate system are also specified in the drawing list, the special object PC 20 is set in a state in which these are applied. In addition, since the special character is displayed as if it is displaced in a predetermined direction over a plurality of frames, a drawing list corresponding to that is applied to the VDP 135, and a special character for the world coordinate system is applied in a state corresponding to that. The object PC 20 is set.

When the VDP 135 receives the drawing list for displaying the special character, the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 for the special object PC20 are set in the color information setting process (step S1009) in the drawing process (FIG. 16). And, the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 are attached. The process of pasting the texture will be described below.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing texture mapping processing for a special character. The texture mapping process for the special character is activated when either the special character start designation information or the special character continuation designation information is set in the current drawing list.

First, in step S3401, use designation information of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 set in the current drawing list is grasped. In the following step S3402, the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 corresponding to the use designation information grasped in step S3401 are read from the memory module 133. After that, in step S3403, the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 read in step S3402 are pasted to the main body part BP of the special object PC20. This completes the attachment of the texture to the body part BP.

In the following step S3404, "4", which is information corresponding to the number of the accessory parts AP1 to AP4, is set in the accessory part counter provided in the register 153, and the flow advances to step S3405. In step S3405, the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 corresponding to the attached parts parts AP1 to AP4 indicated by the numerical information of the present attached parts counter are read from the memory module 133.

In a succeeding step S3406, data of initial coordinate values corresponding to the accessory parts AP1 to AP4 indicated by the numerical information of the current accessory part counter is read. Further, in step S3407, of the variation data set in the drawing list this time, the variation data corresponding to the accessory parts AP1 to AP4 indicated by the numerical information of the current accessory counter is grasped. Then, in step S3408, the current UV coordinate value is derived by applying the change amount grasped in step S3407 to the initial coordinate value read in step S3406. After that, in step S3409, the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 read out in step S3405 are attached to the corresponding accessory parts AP1 to AP4 according to the UV coordinate values derived in step S3408.

In the following step S3410, the numerical information of the accessory parts counter is decremented by 1, and in step S3411, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the accessory parts counter after the subtraction is "0". If it is not "0", the process returns to step S3405, and the paste processing of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 by the above steps S3405 to S3409 is executed for the next accessory parts AP1 to AP4. If it is determined in step S3411 that the numerical information of the attached parts counter is "0", this texture mapping process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the pattern change display will be described with reference to FIG.

56(a) and 56(b) are explanatory views for explaining the contents of the pattern change display.

The pattern change display using the special character CH17 is, as shown in FIGS. 56(a) and (b), a reach line is formed on a predetermined effective line during the game play, and the final stop symbol sequence SA2 is displayed. It is executed in a situation where variable display of symbols is being performed. In the pachinko machine 10, a pattern change display is performed as an effect for informing the player that the game time has a high degree of expectation that triggers the opening/closing execution mode. Note that the pattern change display using the special character CH17 may be configured to occur with a predetermined probability only in the game game that triggers the opening/closing execution mode.

In the pattern change display, the special character CH17 is displaced and displayed in a predetermined direction. In this case, the pattern attached to the special character CH17 is changed with the displacement of the special character CH17. Specifically, the pattern is changed such that the surface of the special character CH17 is illuminated and reflected by the light, and the portion brightened by the reflection is displaced. This pattern change occurs in each of the main body part BP and each of the accessory parts AP1 to AP4. On the other hand, the positions of the eyes and mouth displayed on the special character CH17 are constant.

As described above, a plurality of types of textures PC21 to PC23 are stored in advance for a part of the special object PC20, and the textures PC21 to PC23 to be pasted are sequentially changed. As for the other parts of CH17, a single texture PC24 to PC27 is used, but the UV coordinate values of the texture PC24 to PC27 are sequentially changed, so that the pattern change display is performed while balancing the data capacity and the processing load. It becomes possible to do.

Further, in a place where there is a pattern whose relative position with respect to the outer edge of the special character such as eyes and mouth does not change, the pattern is not changed by switching the UV coordinate values of a single texture, but is a pasting target. By changing the textures PC21 to PC23 sequentially to change the pattern, it is possible to reduce the processing load when changing the pattern at the location.

On the other hand, regarding the accessory parts AP1 to AP4 having a relatively small size, the pattern is changed by switching the UV coordinate values of the single textures PC24 to PC27. Even if the shape of the pattern is slightly deformed, it can be made inconspicuous.

<Another form of pattern change display>
-Instead of the configuration in which the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 are set in a one-to-one correspondence with the respective accessory part parts AP1 to AP4, the predetermined second partial texture is provided for the plurality of accessory part parts AP1 to AP4. The second partial texture may be commonly used for all the accessory parts AP1 to AP4. In this case, in making the patterns of the accessory parts AP1 to AP4 different, the initial setting values of the UV coordinate values may be made different.

The speed at which the UV coordinate values of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 to be pasted in each of the accessory parts AP1 to AP4 are changed is not limited to the same configuration, and some of them are different. The configuration may be different, or all may be different.

The pattern may be attached so as to straddle the main body part BP and at least one of the accessory parts AP1 to AP4. In this case, when changing the appearance of the special character, the change in the straddling pattern when the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 are changed so as to ensure the continuity of the pattern in the straddling portion. It is preferable to associate the aspect with the change aspect of the straddling pattern when the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 are changed.

<Regarding the structure related to round production>
Next, a configuration related to the round effect will be described.

The round effect is an effect that can be executed when a round game in the open/close execution mode is being performed. In the opening and closing execution mode, it is set so that a plurality of round games are performed, and when the round effect is won in performing the round effect in the round effect lottery executed when shifting to the opening and closing execution mode. , Is executed every time a round game is played. If the round effect lottery is not won, the arithmetic processing and the like in the opening/closing execution mode will be executed.

The round game is, as described above, (1) the opening time of the variable winning device 22 exceeds a predetermined time, and (2) the total winning number of game balls to the variable winning device 22 becomes a predetermined number. It is a game that continues until either one of the conditions is satisfied.

In the round effect, moving image data is used. The moving image data is image data which has been compressed between frames so as to have a plurality of difference data with one frame of still image data as a reference and which has been encoded by the MPEG2 system, for example. When the moving image data is decoded by a moving image decoder (not shown) provided in the VDP 135, it is expanded into still image data for a plurality of frames. A series of movies is reproduced by sequentially drawing the still image data.

The moving image data set in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 57, round moving image data RMD0 is set as moving image data used in the round effect. As for the round moving image data RMD0, file data is set at the first address, followed by compressed data of each frame. A frame header is attached to the compressed data of each frame.

The compressed data is one frame of I picture data corresponding to the reference data, a plurality of frames of P picture data corresponding to the first difference data, and a plurality of frames of B picture data corresponding to the second difference data. And have.

The I picture data is data that can be used to create one frame of still image data by itself when decoding. The P picture data is data capable of creating still image data for one frame by performing forward prediction with reference to I picture data or P picture data preceding by one frame or a plurality of frames at the time of decoding. .. When decoding B picture data, bidirectional prediction is performed by referring to I picture data or P picture data one frame or a plurality of frames before and I picture data or P picture data one frame or a plurality of frames after decoding. This is data for which still image data for one frame can be created.

In the compressed data of the round moving image data RMD0, I picture data is set as the first frame data. Further, B picture data is set as the data of the second frame,..., M−1 frame. Further, P picture data is set as the data of the mth frame. Further, B picture data is set as the data of the m+1th frame,..., N−1th frame. Further, P picture data is set as the data of the nth frame. The arrangement pattern of the picture data is not limited to the above and is arbitrary.

The size of the still image data created from the round moving image data RMD0 is set corresponding to the display surface G, and specifically set to a size that can be displayed on the entire display surface G. ..

In addition, in the round effect, insertion image data IPD0 that is still image data is used in addition to the round moving image data RMD0. The contents of the round moving image data RMD0 and the insertion image data IPD0 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58A shows the contents of part of the image set in the round moving image data RMD0, and FIG. 58B shows the image set in the inserted image data IPD0.

In the round moving image data RMD0, as shown in FIG. 58(a-1), the first background image BP1 showing the wavy state is overlapped with the first background image BP1. Reference data (I picture data) RMD1 to which the moving character image MP1 and the second moving character image MP2 which is an image of an octopus are added is set.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 58(a-2) and 58(a-3), the difference data (P picture) that does not have the first background image BP1 but corresponds to the movement of the respective moving character images MP1 and MP2. Data or B picture data) RMD2 is set. One frame of still image data is created by the reference data RMD1 and the difference data RMD2 is applied to the reference data RMD1 to thereby obtain each difference data for the first background image BP1 set in the reference data RMD1. One frame of still image data to which the moving character images MP1 and MP2 set in the RMD2 are added is created.

By the way, the round moving image data RMD0 is set so that the moving character images MP1 and MP2 are framed out from the display surface G. Specifically, the difference data is set so that each of the moving character images MP1 and MP2 moves to the frame-out position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58(a-3), reference data RMD3 in which the second background image BP2 showing a cloud is drawn is set in the round moving image data RMD0.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58(a-4), the reference data RMD4 in which the third moving character image MP3 of the boy is enlarged and drawn is set in the round moving image data RMD0. Although not shown, the round moving image data RMD0 is set with difference data corresponding to the third moving character image MP3 performing a predetermined motion.

A series of moving image display is performed by sequentially pasting the still image data created by the respective data RMD1 to RMD4 to the moving image object.

As shown in FIG. 58B, the inserted image data IPD0 corresponds to an image displayed on a part of the display surface G, and is larger than the image data used to display the entire display surface G. The data is set to have a small size and a small amount of data (data capacity).

A plurality of types of image data having different display modes are set in the insertion image data IPD0. Specifically, in the inserted image data IPD0, as shown in FIG. 58(b-1), the first inserted image data IPD1 in which the first inserted character image IP1 showing two girls is drawn, As shown in FIG. 58(b-2), the second insertion image data IPD2 in which the second insertion character image IP2 showing three girls is drawn is set.

In the round effect, a series of round moving images set in the round moving image data RMD0 is reproduced. Then, the insertion character image is inserted and displayed using the insertion image data IPD0 at a predetermined timing during the reproduction of the moving image. In this case, the insertion image data IPD0 used is set to be different depending on the round.

A specific processing configuration for performing a round effect using the round moving image data RMD0 and the insertion image data IPD0 will be described below.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a round effect calculation process executed by the display CPU 131. The round effect calculation process is started by the effect calculation process of step S904 in the task process (FIG. 14) when the data table corresponding to the open/close execution mode is set.

First, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the round effect is being executed based on the data table corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode. The data table corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is set so that the round moving image is played a plurality of times as the round effect, and specifically, the round moving image is set to be played the same number of times as the number of rounds. ..

If the round effect is not being executed, the process advances to step S3502, and it is determined whether it is the reproduction start timing of the round moving image based on the data table corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, in the data table corresponding to the open/close execution mode, a plurality of round moving image reproduction start timings are set in correspondence with the round moving image being reproduced plural times. The reproduction start timing is synchronized with the start timing of the round game, and more specifically, the start timing of the round game is configured to be one processing time (20 msec) earlier.

In addition, when it takes a longer period than the above-described one processing period to decode the round moving image data RMD0, the playback start timing of the round moving image is set to the round moving image data RMD0 rather than the start timing of the round game. It is advisable to set it earlier by the period required for decoding. As a result, it is possible to suitably cope with a time lag that may occur due to the period required for decoding. In short, if the reproduction start timing of the round moving image is set in consideration of the period required to decode the round moving image data RMD0, so that the reproduction of the round moving image and the start of the round game have the same timing. Good.

If it is not the reproduction start timing of the round moving image, the arithmetic processing for the main round effect is finished as it is, while if it is the reproduction start timing of the round moving image, the process proceeds to step S3503, and the round counter area provided in the work RAM 132. The update processing of the round counter RC stored in is executed. The round counter RC is used by the display control device 130 to keep track of the number of rounds. The round counter RC is set to “0” as an initial value when the data table corresponding to the open/close execution mode is set.

In step S3503, a process of adding 1 to the round counter RC is executed. As a result, by grasping the round counter RC, it is possible to grasp the number of times the round moving image has been reproduced in the one opening/closing execution mode. That is, by grasping the round counter RC, it is possible to specify what round the round game currently being played is.

After that, in step S3504, various addresses are grasped based on the data table corresponding to the open/close execution mode. Specifically, when the round moving image data RMD0 is stored in the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 and the round moving image data RMD0 is decoded to create still image data for a plurality of frames, those still images are static. Figure out the address of the area where the image data is stored.

In a succeeding step S3505, the VDP 135 stores the decode designation information for designating the decoding of the round moving image data RMD0, and the present arithmetic processing ends.

When the above arithmetic processing is executed, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S806), a drawing list in which the decode designation information of the round moving image data RMD0 is set is created and transmitted to the VDP 135.

If the round effect is being executed, the process advances to step S3506 to grasp the moving object. The moving image object is an object for mapping still image data. The moving object is composed of rectangular plate polygons. A plate polygon can be called an object having a small number of polygons, and is low-definition data configured in a plane shape without unevenness in the three-dimensional direction.

The size of the moving object is set to a size capable of displaying an image of the entire display surface G. Specifically, the plate size of the moving image object is set to the same size as the still image data.

After grasping the moving image object, in step S3507, a process for specifying still image data to be mapped to the moving image object is executed. Specifically, the address at which the still image data corresponding to the frame number of this time is stored in the still image data created from the round moving image data RMD0 is grasped. This address is grasped on the basis of a data table corresponding to the currently set open/close execution mode.

In a succeeding step S3508, a calculation process for determining a parameter applied to the moving object is executed. Then, in step S3509, moving image designation information indicating that the still image data created from the round moving image data RMD0 is used is stored.

After the process of step S3509 is executed, the arithmetic process related to the inserted image data IPD0 is executed in steps S3510 to S3518.

First, in step S3510, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not the insertion character image is being displayed. If the insertion character image is not being displayed, the process advances to step S3511, and it is determined whether it is the display start timing of the insertion character image.

Specifically, in the data table corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode, the display start timing (insertion timing) of the inserted character image in the round moving image is predetermined. Specifically, the insertion timing of the insertion character image is set in correspondence with the content of the round moving image, and between the timing when the moving character images MP1 and MP2 are framed out and the display timing of the reference data RMD4, specifically, The display timing of the reference data RMD3 is set. Based on the data table, it is determined whether it is the insertion timing of the insertion character image.

When it is the insertion timing of the insertion character image, the processing relating to the insertion of the insertion character image is executed in steps S3512 to S3516.

Specifically, first, in step S3512, an insertion object for drawing the insertion image data IPD0 is grasped. The insertion object is composed of a rectangular plate polygon. As described above, the plate polygon can be referred to as an object having a small number of polygons, and is low-definition data configured in a plane shape without unevenness in the three-dimensional direction.

The insertion object is set in correspondence with the insertion image data IPD0. Specifically, the size of the insertion object is set so that the plate surface size of the insertion object and the size of the insertion image data IPD0 are the same. As a result, the insertion image data IPD0 can be mapped to the insertion object without performing special processing such as compression, and the insertion character image can be displayed by the mapping.

Here, the inserted image data IPD0 is image data relating to an image partially displayed on the display surface G. For this reason, the insertion object set corresponding to the insertion image data IPD0 is set smaller than the moving object used to display the image of the entire display surface G.

After grasping the insertion object, a process of grasping image data (texture) to be mapped to the insertion object is executed in steps S3513 to S3515. In this case, the image data to be mapped is changed depending on how many rounds the current round moving image is.

Specifically, first, in step S3513, the number of rounds to which the present round effect corresponds is grasped. Specifically, the round counter RC is grasped.

Then, in step S3514, one image data corresponding to the round counter RC grasped in step S3513 is selected from the insertion image data IPD1 and IPD2. Specifically, when the round counter RC grasped in step S3513 is an odd number, the first insertion image data IPD1 corresponding to the first insertion character image IP1 is selected, and the round counter grasped in step S3513. When RC is an even number, the second insertion image data IPD2 corresponding to the second insertion character image IP2 is selected. Then, the address of the selected insertion image data is set.

Then, in step S3515, arithmetic processing of various parameters of the insertion object is executed. In this case, the coordinates of the insertion object are set so that the insertion character image is displayed in the center of the display surface G when converted to the world coordinate system, and are set to be in front of the moving object. ing.

After that, in step S3516, the image insertion designation information indicating that the insertion character image is displayed is set, and the present arithmetic processing ends.

When the above calculation process is executed, the moving image designation information is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S806). Further, in the drawing list, a moving image object is set and various parameters applied to the moving image object are set. In this case, the parameter includes an address of still image data created from the round moving image data RMD0 as image data (texture) mapped to the moving image object.

Furthermore, when the calculation processing this time is the insertion timing of the insertion character image, the information for displaying the insertion character image corresponding to the round effect this time, specifically, the insertion object and the insertion object. The parameters to be applied are set and the image insertion designation information is set. In this case, the parameter includes the address of the inserted image data corresponding to the current round as image data (texture) mapped to the insertion object.

When the inserted character image is being displayed, an affirmative decision is made in step S3510, and in step S3517 and step S3518, processing for maintaining the display of the currently displayed inserted character image is executed. Specifically, in step S3517, the insertion object is grasped, and in step S3518, a calculation for maintaining the currently set parameters of the insertion object is performed. In this case, the address of the insertion image data mapped to the insertion object is also maintained. Then, in step S3516, the image insertion designation information is set, and the present arithmetic processing ends.

When the above arithmetic processing is executed, the moving image designation information is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S806), and the still image data corresponding to the current frame number is set. Information for displaying an image is set.

Further, when the insertion character image is being displayed, information for displaying the image corresponding to the insertion character image corresponding to the current round is set in the drawing list.

In addition, in the calculation process for the round effect, it may be configured to execute the calculation process of the individual image for recognizing what round the current round game is. In this case, the player can easily confirm what round the round game this time is.

Further, in the opening/closing execution mode, the symbol calculation process (step S905) is skipped. As a result, the variable display of the symbols is not displayed during the opening/closing execution mode, so that the player's attention can be attracted to the round moving image based on the round moving image data RMD0, and the processing load in the opening/closing execution mode is reduced. be able to. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which variable display of symbols is performed during the opening/closing execution mode.

Further, the background setting process (step S903) is skipped during the reproduction of the round moving image. Even in this case, the still image data created from the round moving image data RMD0 is attached to the moving image object, so that the image related to the still image data is displayed on the entire display surface G. .. That is, the image related to the moving image display functions as the background image. As a result, the processing load can be reduced by the processing load related to the background setting process.

Next, the decoding process executed by the video decoder of the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The decoding process is started when any of the decoding designation information is set in the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131. The decoding process is activated asynchronously with the drawing process (FIG. 16) executed by the VDP 135.

First, in step S3601, the address of the round moving image data RMD0 is grasped from the information of the address specified in the drawing list. In the following step S3602, the area of the expansion destination of the round moving image data RMD0 is grasped from the information of the expansion destination address specified in the drawing list.

In subsequent step S3603, the round moving image data RMD0 is read from the address grasped in step S3601 and the round moving image data RMD0 is decoded. Then, each still image data of the decoding result is written in each area of the address grasped in step S3602. Then, this decoding process is terminated.

By the way, the period required from the VDP 135 receiving the drawing list in which the decoding designation information is set to creating the still image data of the first frame of the round moving image is set to be smaller than the drawing list reception cycle (20 msec). Has been done. As a result, the still image data of the first frame is not received until the drawing list having the address corresponding to the still image data of the first frame is received after the drawing list having the decode designation information is received. Has been created. Therefore, the situation where the still image data corresponding to the address does not exist does not occur.

Note that the decoding process is configured to be activated asynchronously with the drawing process, but is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the still image data related to a new frame is expanded based on the completion of the drawing using the still image data written in the predetermined area in the drawing process. In this case, since the still image data is sequentially expanded each time the decoded still image data is used, the area of the area for writing the still image data is compared to the structure in which the whole still image is expanded and stored at one time. Can be reduced. Further, since the round moving image is reproduced while decoding, the time lag due to decoding can be reduced.

Next, the round effect setting processing executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 61.

The round effect setting process is executed as a part of the effect setting process executed in step S1003 of the drawing process (FIG. 16). Further, when the moving image designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the round effect is executed.

First, in step S3701, the moving object set in the drawing list is grasped, and in step S3702, various parameters applied to the moving object are grasped based on the drawing list.

After that, in step S3703, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for the moving image object, and the process proceeds to step S3704.

In a succeeding step S3704, it is determined whether or not the image insertion designation information is stored in the drawing list. If the image insertion designation information is not stored, this setting process is ended as it is, while if the image insertion designation information is stored, in step S3705 it is determined that the insertion list set in the current drawing list is used. The object is grasped, and in step S3706, the parameter applied to the insertion object is grasped based on the drawing list. Then, in step S3707, the setting process for the insertion object to the world coordinate system is executed, and the setting process ends.

By executing the setting process as described above, the placement of the moving image object and the insertion object in the world coordinate system is started at the same time. In this case, the insertion object is arranged so as to overlap the front side of the moving image object.

Next, the round effect mapping process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The round effect mapping process is started when a drawing list (drawing list in which moving image specifying information is set) related to the round effect is created in the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16). To be done.

First, in step S3801, the information of the address at which the still image data to be set this time is stored is grasped from the drawing list. In the following step S3802, the still image data to be drawn this time is grasped from the address information grasped in step S3801. In subsequent step S3803, the still image data grasped in step S3802 is mapped to the moving image object. In this case, the coordinate values of the still image data are UV coordinate values preset for the moving image object, and the sticking position of the still image data with respect to the moving image object is uniquely determined.

After that, in step S3804, it is determined whether or not the image insertion designation information is set in the drawing list this time. If the image insertion designation information has not been set, this processing is terminated, while if the image insertion designation information has been set, the insertion character image set in the current drawing list in step S3805. Know the information of the address of the data.

In step S3806, the inserted image data to be drawn this time is grasped from the address information grasped in step S3805. After that, in step S3807, the insertion character image data grasped in step S3806 is mapped to the insertion object, and this processing ends.

By executing the above processing, the round moving image related to the round moving image data RMD0 is reproduced on the display surface G. Further, when the image insertion designation information is set, the insertion character image is displayed so as to overlap the round moving image.

Here, only the second background image BP2 is drawn in the round moving image, and each insertion character image is not set. Since the insertion character image corresponding to the number of rounds is displayed so as to overlap the second background image BP2, the insertion image data IPD0 is prepared as image data displayed on the entire display surface G. No need. This makes it possible to reduce the data amount of the inserted image data IPD0.

That is, when a part of the display surface G is changed, the data related to the common part (second background image BP2) is set to the moving image data, and the data related to the individual part (each insertion character image IP1, IP2) is set. By preparing the data separately, it is possible to reduce the amount of data as a whole.

Further, due to the characteristics of moving image data, it is necessary to set still image data for each continuous frame. By drawing the second background image BP2 using this indispensable still image data, the indispensable still image data can be suitably used, and the amount of data related to the round effect can be reduced.

Furthermore, for example, when an image in which the second insertion character image IP2 is drawn so as to be superimposed on the second background image BP2 is overwritten with the first insertion character image IP1, the girl displayed in the middle is deleted in order to delete the image. Due to the necessity of drawing the second background image BP2 for the area corresponding to the girl, the area to be overwritten becomes large, or different α values are set for the area to be erased and other areas. It may be necessary to separately provide the obtained α data. Therefore, the processing load may increase or the data amount may increase. On the other hand, by setting the still image data related to the second background image BP2 as the moving image data and preparing the image data related to the insertion character image to be changed separately from the moving image data, the above inconvenience is avoided. can do.

In addition, since the plate surface of the moving image object is a flat surface, the image related to the still image data is not curved. As a result, the image related to the still image data is displayed as it is.

Further, the moving image object and the insertion object are configured to be projected in parallel. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the image on the edge side of the display surface G from being curved due to the perspective.

Next, the state of the round effect will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a time chart showing the appearance of the round effect.

At the timing of t1 which is the start timing of the round effect, the first background image BP1 and the moving character images MP1 and MP2 are displayed as shown in FIG. 63(a).

Then, with the passage of time (update of the frame number), the moving character images MP1 and MP2 move in a predetermined direction. For example, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 63(b), a state in which the moving character images MP1 and MP2 move on waves is displayed. Then, the moving character images MP1 and MP2 are framed out.

After that, the inserted character image is displayed with the second background image BP2 as the background at the timing of image insertion timing t3. In this case, when the present round effect is an odd round, the first insertion character image IP1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 63(c-1). On the other hand, when the present round effect is the even-numbered round, the second inserted character image IP2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 63(c-2).

Thereafter, at the timing of t4, the third moving character image MP3 is displayed as shown in FIG. 63(d). Then, after the third moving character image MP3 has performed a predetermined motion, the round effect ends.

As described above, the configuration is such that the round video is played each time the round game is started, and during the playback of the round video, the insertion character image corresponding to the current round is displayed so as to overlap the image related to the round video. It is configured to execute the round effect to be displayed. Accordingly, since it is possible to visually recognize moving images in a plurality of display modes by using one round moving image data RMD0, it is stored in the memory module 133 as compared with a configuration in which the round moving image data RMD0 is prepared for each round. The amount of stored data can be reduced.

In particular, in the open/close execution mode, the same game, that is, the round game is repeated. In this case, if the same round effect is repeatedly executed in response to the round game being repeated, the attention to the round effect may be reduced. However, if a different moving image is displayed for each round game, there is a concern that the data amount of moving image data related to the moving image may increase.

On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10, the insertion character image corresponding to the current round is displayed during the reproduction of the round moving image, so that the same round moving image can be used to make variations in the round effect. Can be diversified.

Although two types of insertion image data IPD0, the first insertion image data IPD1 and the second insertion image data IPD2, are prepared, the present invention is not limited to this, and the insertion image data may be prepared for the number of rounds. In this case, it is advisable to set each inserted image data in association with each round. As a result, it is possible to diversify the round effect and to grasp what round the round game this time is based on the image displayed based on the inserted image data.

Further, a configuration may be employed in which more insertion image data than the number of rounds is prepared, and one insertion image data is selected from a plurality of insertion image data at the insertion timing of the insertion character image in each round. Accordingly, the randomness of the inserted character image to be inserted can be enhanced, and the attention to the inserted character image can be enhanced.

Further, although the parameter applied to the inserted image data IPD0 is not changed in the situation where the inserted character image is displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the applied parameter may be sequentially updated. In this case, if the configuration in which the uniform α value is updated is used, the inserted character image can be faded in or out, and if the configuration in which the magnification information is updated can be performed, the inserted character image can be enlarged or reduced. It will be possible.

When the insertion character image is faded in or out, a blending process may be performed for the insertion character image and the image related to the moving image drawn on the back side of the insertion character image. As a result, the affinity between the inserted character image and the moving image can be increased, and the sense of discomfort that can be caused by displaying the inserted character image and the moving image at the same time can be reduced.

Further, the present invention may be applied to not only the round moving image but also the super reach display or the normal reach display, for example. In this case, the reach moving image data relating to the reach moving image reproduced during the super reach display is prepared, and a plurality of types of insertion image data of the insertion image inserted during the reproduction of the reach moving image are prepared. Then, the display CPU 131 performs a process of randomly selecting one of the plurality of types of insertion image data when performing super reach display, and sets the address of the selected insertion image data in the data table. Then, at the insertion timing of the insertion image, the insertion image data of this time is grasped based on the address of the insertion image data set in the data table, and drawing is performed based on the insertion image data. This makes it possible to perform a plurality of types of super reach display using one reach moving image data.

Further, in the above configuration, the round moving image is played for each round, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a series of movies played over a plurality of rounds. In this case, it is preferable to repeatedly play the series of movies until the opening/closing execution mode ends. Even in this case, it is possible to recognize different movies by inserting different insertion character images in the middle of a series of movies.

When a series of movies is played over the plurality of rounds, the insertion character image may be displayed during the interval period between the rounds. This allows the player to preferably recognize that the movie is played over a plurality of rounds, and that the movie is in the interval period.

Further, although only the second background image BP2 is drawn in the reference data RMD3, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, both the first insertion character image IP1 and the second background image BP2 may be drawn. In this case, the coordinates of the second insertion image data IPD2 may be set so that the second insertion character image IP2 overlaps the first insertion character image IP1. This makes it possible to display different round effects depending on whether an image is inserted or not. However, in view of the point that the moving image data can be effectively used and the size of the image data needs to be set large in order to overwrite the image displayed on the back side, the second reference data RMD3 is It is preferable that only the background image BP2 is drawn.

Further, although the insertion character image is displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and another insertion moving image may be reproduced, for example, from timing t3 to timing t4. In this case, the insertion moving image may be decoded at a timing before the timing t3 so that the insertion moving image can be reproduced at the timing t3. The insertion moving image may be a moving image corresponding to a predetermined area on the display surface G or may be a moving image of the entire display surface G.

In the above configuration, the insertion character image related to the round moving image is displayed during the reproduction of the series of round moving images. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific image not related to the mode of the round moving image is the round moving image. It may be configured to be displayed separately. In this case, the specific image may be displayed during a part of the period during which the round moving image is played back, or may be displayed over the entire period during which the round moving image is played back.

As the specific image, for example, a teaching image that can teach the player how many rounds the current round is, a teaching image that can teach the number of times the round video is played, or a jackpot is displayed when the jackpot is won. It may be a pattern image that constitutes a combination of the jackpot patterns displayed on the surface G, an image corresponding to the symbol image, or the like.

In this case, for example, as the processing related to the display of the teaching image, various teaching image data (teaching object and teaching texture) are prepared separately from the round moving image, and A configuration in which a teaching image created by using a teaching object and a teaching texture is inserted and displayed, or a configuration in which a round moving image including a predetermined teaching image is prepared can be considered.

In the configuration in which the round moving image including the predetermined teaching image is prepared, when the content of the teaching image is changed, the change destination is changed so as to overlap with the predetermined teaching image included in the round moving image. Draw a teaching image. Specifically, the teaching object to be changed is arranged so as to overlap the area where the predetermined teaching image is displayed. As a result, the teaching image of the change destination is overwritten on the predetermined teaching image included in the round moving image, and the teaching image of the change destination is displayed.

In such a configuration, when the insertion character image is inserted and displayed, the positional relationship between the insertion object and the teaching object is set so that the teaching image is not overwritten by the insertion character image. Specifically, in the world coordinate system, the coordinates of both are set so that the teaching object is located closer to the viewpoint than the insertion object. As a result, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the teaching image becomes invisible due to the inserted character image.

Further, the invention of image insertion described above may be applied to a configuration for performing two-dimensional display. Specifically, for example, image data corresponding to an image to be inserted is previously stored in the memory module 133 as sprite data, and various parameter information applied to the sprite data is also stored. Then, the still image data created by decoding the moving image data may be written to the frame buffer 142, and the process of writing the sprite data related to the image to be inserted into the frame buffer 142 may be executed.

<Another form when performing a round production>
Another form in the case of performing the round effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 68.

In this another mode, the configuration of the round moving image data RMD0 is different. The different points will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the round moving image data RMD0 in this another embodiment.

In this another mode, the round moving image data RMD0 is divided at the timing at which the insertion character image is displayed, and more specifically, from the start timing of the round moving image until the moving character images MP1 and MP2 fade out. First round moving image data RMD0a corresponding to the first round moving image, and second round moving image data RMD0b corresponding to the second round moving image from the time when the third moving character image MP3 is displayed to the end timing of the round moving image. , Is divided into.

A compression mode of the first round moving image data RMD0a and the second round moving image data RMD0b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a compression aspect of each round moving image data RMD0a, RMD0b, and FIG. 65(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a compression aspect of the first round moving image data RMD0a. 65(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the compression mode of the second round moving image data RMD0b, and FIG. 65(c) is a graph for explaining the bit rate of each round moving image data RMD0a, RMD0b.

As described above, the first round moving image data RMD0a and the second round moving image data RMD0b are encoded compressed data, and have reference data and difference data. In this case, even if the reproduction time of each round moving image is the same and the reference data included in each round moving image data RMD0a, RMD0b is the same, the first round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0a The data amount of the second round moving image data RMD0b may be different.

Specifically, comparing the first round moving image and the second round moving image, the first round moving image has a larger number of moving target characters than the second round moving image, It is more dynamic than the second round video and is more complicated (high definition). Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 65(a-1) and 65(b-1), the difference data of the first round moving image data RMD0a is larger than the difference data of the second round moving image data RMD0b.

Here, the amount of data that can be assigned to the entire round moving image data RMD0 is predetermined, and it is necessary to adjust each round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0b so as to match the data amount. In this case, by adjusting the bit rates of the respective round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0b, it is possible to set the desired data amount while maintaining the image quality of the entire round moving image.

Specifically, the image quality is not likely to deteriorate even if the bit rate is reduced for a subject with little motion or a subject that is not relatively complicated (a subject with low definition). On the other hand, if the bit rate is lowered for a large motion or a relatively complicated one, a large amount of block noise and mosquito noise are generated, and the image quality is greatly deteriorated. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 65(a-2), a relatively large bit rate is allocated to the first round moving image data RMD0a to secure a relatively large data amount (FS1), and Suppresses the deterioration of the image quality of round movies. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65(b-2), a relatively small data amount (FS2) is secured by allocating a relatively small bit rate to the second round moving image data RMD0b, so that the second round It is possible to reduce the data amount of the moving image data RMD0b. As a result, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the image quality of a series of round moving images used in the round effect.

That is, as shown in FIG. 65(c), the bit rate of the first round moving image data RMD0a is increased and the bit rate of the second round moving image data RMD0b is set to be lower, so that each round moving image data RMD0a, Compared with the case where RMD0b is set at the same bit rate (see the dotted line in FIG. 65(c)), even though the total data amount is the same, the deterioration of the image quality of the round moving image is suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the image quality of the round moving image while setting the round moving image data RMD0 to a desired data amount.

By the way, the compression process at the stage of creating each round moving image data RMD0a, RMD0b will be described in detail. Each round moving image data RMD0a, RMD0b must be compressed a plurality of times (specifically, twice). Is created by. Specifically, first, in the first compression processing, the data amount of the entire preset round moving image data RMD0 is grasped, and each of the round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0b is assigned so as to have the data amount. The data amounts FS1 and FS2 are grasped, and the bit rates corresponding to the respective data amounts FS1 and FS2 are grasped. Then, in the second compression processing, the actual compression processing is executed using the bit rate grasped in the first compression processing. As a result, the round moving image data RMD0 has a preset data amount.

Here, in compression of the round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0b, the difference data is compressed by simplifying the difference data so that the data amount is based on the individually set bit rate, and the reference data is It is not meant to be simplified. Since the reference data is the reference data for each difference data (P picture data and B picture data), if the image quality of the reference data is degraded, the image quality of the entire round moving image is significantly degraded due to an error due to inter-frame compression. Is.

Further, in this another embodiment, the insertion image data IPD0 is different. Specifically, the size of the inserted image data IPD0 in this another mode is set so that the image related to the inserted image data IPD0 can be displayed on the entire display surface G. Then, in the inserted image data IPD0, the inserted image data in which the first inserted character image IP1 is drawn so as to be superimposed on the second background image BP2 and the second inserted character image IP2 is drawn in superposed on the second background image BP2. Inserted image data and are provided. That is, the insertion image data IPD0 of this another embodiment indicates one image itself displayed on the entire display surface G. In the following description, an image displayed using the inserted image data IPD0, that is, an image in which each of the inserted character images IP1 and IP2 is drawn on the second background image BP2 is also simply referred to as an inserted image.

In this another embodiment, the divided round moving image data RMD0a and RMDb are sequentially decoded at a predetermined interval, and the first round moving image and the second round moving image are sequentially reproduced at a predetermined interval, and By using the insertion image data IPD0 during the interval to display an insertion image in which the second background image BP2 and one of the insertion character images IP1 and IP2 are integrated, a series of round moving images are reproduced. Let

Next, the calculation process for the round effect in this another mode will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 66.

First, in step S3901, whether or not the insertion character image is being displayed is determined based on the currently set data table, specifically, the data table corresponding to the open/close execution mode. If the insertion character image is not being displayed, the flow advances to step S3902 to determine whether it is the display start timing of the insertion character image based on the currently set data table. The display start timing of the insertion character image is predetermined in the data table corresponding to the open/close execution mode, and in detail, is set to be the same as the end timing of the first round moving image.

If it is not the display start timing of the inserted character image, the process advances to step S3903, and it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not the effect related to the round moving image is being executed. In this case, it is determined whether or not the effect related to the first round moving image or the second round moving image is being executed,
When the effect related to the round moving image is not being executed, it is determined in step S3904 whether it is the reproduction start timing of the first round moving image. If it is not the reproduction start timing of the first round moving image, the present calculation processing is ended as it is, while if it is the reproduction start timing of the first round moving image, the processing of adding 1 to the round counter RC is executed in step S3905. Then, in steps S3906 and S3907, the process related to the decoding of the first round moving image data RMD0a is executed.

Specifically, in step S3906, the address where the first round moving image data RMD0a is stored in the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 and the still image data for a plurality of frames by decoding the first round moving image data RMD0a. When creating, the address of the area where the still image data is stored is grasped.

Then, in step S3907, the decode designation information of the first round moving image data RMD0a is set, and the present arithmetic processing ends.

When the above arithmetic processing is executed, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S806), a drawing list in which the decode designation information of the first round moving image data RMD0a is set is created and transmitted to the VDP 135. The moving picture recorder of the VDP 135 executes the decoding process of the first round moving image data RMD0a based on the reception of the drawing list in which the decoding designation information is set. Since the decoding process is as already described, the description is omitted.

When the effect related to the round moving image is being executed, a process of setting still image data corresponding to the round moving image as a drawing target is executed in steps S3908 to S3910. In this case, when the decoded round moving image data RMD0 is the first round moving image data RMD0a, the still image data related to the first round moving image is set as a drawing target, while the decoded round moving image data is set. When the image data RMD0 is the second round moving image data RMD0b, the still image data related to the second round moving image is set as the drawing target. Note that the specific configuration of the process is as already described, and thus the description is omitted.

After that, in step S3911, the round effect designation information for causing the VDP 135 to specify that the round effect is to be executed is set, and the present arithmetic processing ends.

When the above-described calculation process is executed, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S806), the moving image object is set as a drawing target and various parameters applied to the moving image object are set. The various parameters include an address of still image data as image data to be mapped to the moving image object.

On the other hand, if it is the display start timing of the inserted character image (step S3902: YES), a process of setting the inserted character image as a drawing target is executed in steps S3912 to S3915.

Here, the size of the insertion object according to this another embodiment is set in correspondence with the size of the insertion image data IPD0. Specifically, the size of the insertion object is set so as to be the same as the size of the insertion image data IPD0. That is, in this another mode, the insertion object and the moving image object are the same.

Note that the specific processing configuration of steps S3912 to S3915 is as described above, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the processes of steps S3912 to S3915, the round effect designation information is set in step S3911, and the present calculation process ends.

When the above calculation process is executed, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S806), the insertion object is set as a drawing target and various parameters applied to the insertion object are set. The various parameters include the address of the insertion image data corresponding to the current round game as the image data mapped to the insertion object.

Here, the size of the insertion object corresponds to the entire display surface G, and the size of the insertion image data IPD0 mapped to the insertion object is set to correspond to the entire display surface G. There is. Then, the second background image BP2 is drawn in advance on the insertion image data IPD0 in this another mode. Thereby, in this another mode, the insertion image functions as a background image. That is, it can be said that the inserted image in the present alternative embodiment is one image including the background image and the character image. As a result, a predetermined image is displayed on the entire display surface G even when the round moving image is not reproduced.

If the insertion character image is being displayed (step S3901: YES), the flow advances to step S3916 to determine whether or not it is the reproduction start timing of the second round moving image based on the currently set data table. The reproduction start timing of the second round moving image is set to the timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the display start timing of the inserted image (end timing of the first round moving image).

If it is not the reproduction start timing of the second round moving image, in step S3917 and step S3918, processing for maintaining the display of the inserted image is executed, and in step S3911, round effect designation information is set, and this calculation processing is performed. To finish. Since these processes have already been described, description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, if it is the reproduction start timing of the second round moving image, in step S3919 and step S3920, the process for reproducing the second round moving image is executed. Specifically, in step S3919, the address at which the second round moving image data RMD0b is stored in the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 and the second round moving image data RMD0b are decoded to obtain a still image for a plurality of frames. When the data is created, the address of the area where the still image data is stored is grasped.

Then, in step S3920, the decode designation information of the second round moving image data RMD0b is set, and the present arithmetic processing ends.

When the above arithmetic processing is executed, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S806), a drawing list in which the decode designation information of the second round moving image data RMD0b is set is created and transmitted to the VDP 135. The moving picture recorder of the VDP 135 executes the decoding process of the second round moving image data RMD0b based on the reception of the drawing list in which the decoding designation information is set.

According to this processing, when the first round moving image or the second round moving image is being reproduced, the drawing list in which the moving image object is set as the drawing target is created, while the end timing of the first round moving image is set. During the period from the start timing of the second round moving image, the drawing list in which the insertion object is set as the drawing target is created. In this case, neither the moving image object nor the insertion object is set in one drawing list.

Incidentally, with respect to the processing times after the processing of steps S3919 and S3920 is executed, the processing of steps S3908 to S3911 is executed after the next processing times. As a result, the still image data related to the second round moving image is set as the image data mapped to the moving image object.

As described above, in the round effect calculation process, the current drawing target is set for each process. Thus, the drawing list is set for each processing, and the VDP 135 executes the drawing processing so that the image is updated for each processing. That is, the image is updated for each frame, and the frame rate is set to be the same over the period in which the round moving image is reproduced.

Next, the round effect setting process in this another mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 67(a). The setting process for round effect in this another mode is configured to be activated when the round effect designation information is set in the received drawing list.

First, in step S4001, an object to be drawn is grasped. Specifically, when the first round moving image or the second round moving image is being reproduced, the moving image object is recognized. On the other hand, in the period between the end timing of the first round moving image and the start timing of the second round moving image, the insertion object is grasped.

Then, in step S4002, the parameters applied to the object to be drawn are grasped based on the drawing list. Then, in step S4003, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for the moving object recognized in step S4001 and the setting process ends.

Next, the round effect mapping process of this another mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 67(b).

First, in step S4101, the address of the image data (texture) to be mapped is grasped among the parameters applied to the drawing target object. In this case, when the moving image object is set in the drawing list, the address of the still image data corresponding to the frame number is grasped, while when the inserting object is set in the drawing list, Grasp the address of the inserted image data IPD0 corresponding to the round game.

In the following step S4102, the image data (texture) to be mapped is grasped based on the address grasped in the above step S4101. Then, in step S4103, the image data grasped in step S4102 is mapped onto the object to be drawn, and the present mapping process ends.

Next, an execution mode of the round effect in this another mode will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 68. 68(a) is a time chart showing the reproduction period of the first round moving image, FIG. 68(b) is a time chart showing the display period of the inserted image, and FIG. 68(c) is a time chart showing the reproduction period of the second round moving image. It is a chart.

First, as shown in FIG. 68(a), the reproduction of the first round moving image is started on the display surface G at the timing t11 which is the start timing of the round game. Then, when the first round moving image ends at the timing of t12, as shown in FIGS. 68(a) and 68(b), the display surface G is related to the insertion image data IPD0 instead of the first round moving image. The insert image is displayed. Specifically, the first insertion character image IP1 or the second insertion character image IP2 is displayed so as to overlap the second background image BP2.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 68(b) and 68(c), the second round moving image is started instead of the inserted image at the timing of t13, and the second round moving image ends at the timing of t14. As a result, a series of round effects in which the images are displayed on the display surface G in the order of the first round moving image→the inserted image→the second round moving image are performed.

Then, at the timing of t15 which is the start timing of the next round game, the first round moving image is sequentially reproduced again.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the round moving image data RMD0 related to a series of round moving images is converted into a plurality of unit data (first round moving image data RMD0a and It is divided into the second round moving image data RMD0b). By adjusting the bit rate for each of the round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0b, efficient image quality adjustment can be performed while setting the round moving image data RMD0 to a predetermined data amount.

Specifically, for the first round moving image data RMD0a, in which the difference data is likely to be relatively large due to the relatively intense movement in the first round moving image, a relatively high bit rate is set. The image quality of the first round moving image can be maintained by performing the encoding process with. On the other hand, for the second round moving image data RMD0b in which it is assumed that the difference data is likely to be relatively small due to the relatively gentle motion in the second round moving image, a relatively low bit rate. By performing the encoding process in (1), it is possible to reduce the data amount of the second round moving image data RMD0b while maintaining the image quality.

Particularly, focusing on the point that the data amount of the round moving image data RMD0 is suppressed, it may be possible to suppress the frame rate of the round moving image, specifically, the image update timing. However, if the configuration is such that the frame rate is changed, a process for changing the frame rate such as a process for grasping the current frame rate is additionally required, which increases the processing load and the program capacity for the above process. There is a concern that

On the other hand, according to this another mode, the data amount of the round moving image data RMD0 can be suppressed without executing the process related to the change of the frame rate. That is, the reduction of the data amount is realized by the compression mode instead of the configuration in which the process is compensated. This makes it possible to reduce the data amount of the round moving image data RMD0 while suppressing an increase in the processing load on the pachinko machine 10.

Further, the data amount of the moving image data that has been subjected to the encoding process depends on the bit rate regardless of the data amount of the difference data. That is, the encoder secures the data amount corresponding to the bit rate as the moving image data, regardless of the data amount of the difference data. In this case, when encoding is performed at a relatively high bit rate for a moving image in which the difference data is likely to be small, it is necessary to secure a useless amount of data in which no data is actually stored. Therefore, the amount of data is wasted. On the other hand, according to this another aspect, it is possible to suppress the generation of the useless data, so that it is possible to reduce the data amount.

In addition, an insertion image is displayed between the first round moving image and the second round moving image, and the insertion image is changed according to the round related to the current round effect. As a result, a plurality of round effects can be performed using one round moving image data RMD0. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of data while favorably performing a plurality of aspects of the round effect.

Furthermore, since the timing of decoding the first round moving image data RMD0a and the timing of decoding the second round moving image data RMD0b are different, the processing load related to decoding for playing a round moving image is dispersed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing omission due to a local increase in processing load.

In addition, in this another mode, the intensity and the complexity of the movement are different due to the switching of the scene in the round video, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the switching of the scene and the intensity of the motion may be different. The configuration may be such that they are not synchronized. In this case, the moving image data may be divided for each scene change. Thus, by preparing a plurality of unit moving image data for each scene and combining these unit moving image data, it is possible to diversify a series of round moving images. Further, it is possible to reduce the amount of data relating to the moving image data as compared with the configuration in which a series of moving image data is prepared for each combination. However, from the viewpoint that the bit rate can be appropriately assigned, it is preferable to divide the round moving image data RMD0 on the basis of the intensity of the movement.

Further, although one round moving image is divided into two moving image data, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be divided into three or more moving image data. However, due to the characteristics of moving image data, it is necessary that one piece of moving image data includes reference data that serves as a reference for difference data. The reference data is not a compression target or has a smaller compression rate than the differential data even if it is compressed. Therefore, the data amount of the entire round moving image data RMD0 may rather increase. Therefore, the relationship between the increase of the reference data due to the division of one round moving image data RMD0 into a plurality of moving image data and the reduction of the data amount of the entire round moving image data RMD0 by the adjustment with the bit rate will be described. Considering this, the division mode of the moving image data may be determined. Specifically, when the increase amount of the data amount due to the increase of the reference data that can be generated by the division is smaller than the reduction amount of the data amount that can be secured by the bit rate adjustment of the divided moving image data, the moving image When the data is divided and the increase amount is larger than the reduction amount, it may be treated as one moving image data without being divided.

Further, although it is assumed that the round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0b have the same amount of reference data, the present invention is not limited to this and may have a different configuration. Further, although it is assumed that the reproduction time of each round moving image reproduced by each round moving image data RMD0a, RMD0b is the same, the present invention is not limited to this, and may have a different configuration. Even in these cases, by adjusting the bit rates of the round moving image data RMD0a and RMD0b, the data amount of the entire round moving image data RMD0 can be adjusted appropriately.

Further, although the configuration is such that the predetermined period is provided between the first round moving image and the second round moving image, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the first round moving image and the second round moving image may be displayed continuously. Good. In this case, the insertion image may not be displayed, and the insertion image may be displayed during the first round moving image, the second round moving image, or across each round moving image.

<Structure for displaying the beach background image and composition for performing the beach sprint>
Next, a configuration for displaying a sandy beach background and a configuration for performing a sandy beach dashing effect will be described.

The sandy beach background image is an image when the sea is seen from the sandy beach, and is an image showing how waves are hitting the sandy beach at a predetermined cycle. The beach background image is used as a background image when the variable display of the design is performed.

The beach running performance is a performance that can be executed when the round game in the open/close execution mode is being performed. Specifically, the sandy beach dashing effect is an effect that is executed when it is elected to perform the sandy beach dashing effect in the effect lottery process that is executed when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

The sand beach dashing effect is an effect in which a plurality of pattern images sprints on the beach. In the rendering, a landscape drawn on the beach background image is used as a background image at another angle, specifically, an image when the landscape is viewed from a low angle.

Here, perspective projection and parallel projection are set as projection patterns in the pachinko machine 10, and these projection patterns are used properly according to the content of the image to be displayed. Perspective projection means projecting each object placed in the world coordinate system in a state viewed from a predetermined viewpoint, and specifically, the vertices of each polygon of each object are linearly directed toward the predetermined viewpoint. Projecting to move. As a result, the image of each object is displayed so as to change depending on the distance from the viewpoint.

On the other hand, parallel projection means projecting each object as it is seen from the screen area PC12. Specifically, the vertices of each polygon of each object move vertically to the screen area PC12. To project. Accordingly, each image of each object is always displayed in a constant size regardless of the distance from the predetermined viewpoint. The proper use of these projection patterns will be described later.

When displaying the beach background image, a plurality of objects and a plurality of textures set corresponding to the respective objects are used.

A plurality of objects used to display the beach background image will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each of the objects OB1 to OB4.

In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the world coordinate system is used as a reference, and the viewpoint is oriented in the +Z direction.

As shown in FIG. 69(a), as the objects related to the display of the beach background image, the beach object OB1 used to display the beach, the wave object OB2 used to display the wave, and the sea are displayed. A sea object OB3 used to display the sky and a sky object OB4 used to display the sky are set. Each of the objects OB1 to OB4 is composed of a rectangular plate polygon, and its longitudinal size is set to be larger than the longitudinal size of the screen area PC12.

Each of the objects OB1 to OB4 is arranged so as to be an image of the sea viewed from the sandy beach when perspectively projected from the specific viewpoint PV1. Specifically, each object is arranged in the order of the beach object OB1, the wave object OB2, the sea object OB3, and the sky object OB4 in the depth direction (+Z direction) when viewed from the specific viewpoint PV1 in the world coordinate system. The coordinates of OB1 to OB4 are set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 69(b), the beach object OB1, the wave object OB2, and the sea object OB3 are arranged to be inclined with respect to the screen area PC12 (projection plane). Accordingly, when perspective projection is performed from the specific viewpoint PV1, it is possible to add a sense of perspective (a sense of depth) to each of the individual images displayed by the objects OB1 to OB3.

Further, some of the adjacent objects are arranged so as to overlap and overlap each other, and the objects OB1 to OB3 are continuous. Specifically, the front end of the wave object OB2 overlaps the back end of the beach object OB1, and the front end of the sea object OB3 ends at the back of the wave object OB2. Overlaid. In this case, since the wave object OB2 overlaps the beach object OB1 and the sea object OB3, the continuity between the objects OB1 to OB3 is secured even if the wave object OB2 moves in the tilt direction. ..

The sky object OB4 is arranged so as to be continuous from the end on the back side of the sea object OB3. The empty object OB4 is arranged upright in the +Y direction.

A plurality of textures TD1 to TD4 are provided corresponding to the objects OB1 to OB4. Each of these textures TD1 to TD4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each of the textures TD1 to TD4. Note that some of the textures TD1 to TD4 are shown for the sake of drawing. The two-dot chain line indicates the projection area.

As shown in FIG. 70, the textures TD1 to TD4 are set as rectangular image data corresponding to the objects OB1 to OB4. An image corresponding to the object to be pasted is drawn on each of the textures TD1 to TD4, and specifically, a beach texture TD1 in which a beach is drawn is provided as a texture corresponding to the beach object OB1, A wave texture TD2 in which a wave is drawn is provided as a texture corresponding to the wave object OB2, and a sea texture TD3 in which a sea is drawn is provided as a texture corresponding to the sea object OB3, and corresponds to a sky object OB4. An empty texture TD4 in which the sky is drawn as a texture is provided.

Here, each of the textures TD1 to TD4 is set to be a sandy beach background image with a sense of depth when the objects OB1 to OB3 are viewed from the specific viewpoint PV1. Specifically, image data corresponding to an image when actually viewed from the specific viewpoint PV1 and having a predetermined perspective as a whole (having a perspective) is set as each texture TD1 to TD4. There is. In this case, the textures TD1 to TD4 are made to correspond to the distances between the specific viewpoint PV1 and the objects OB1 to OB4 so that the perspectives (perspectives) between the individual images displayed by the objects OB1 to OB4 are matched. Is set. As a result, when the objects OB1 to OB4 are perspectively projected from the specific viewpoint PV1 in a situation where the objects OB1 to OB4 are continuously arranged, a sandy beach background image with a sense of depth and perspective matching is generated. Will be done.

As described above, the objects OB1 to OB4 are continuously arranged while being inclined with respect to the screen region PC12 (YZ plane), and the textures TD1 to TD4 to be attached to the objects OB1 to OB4 are the specific viewpoints PV1. The image data corresponds to the image viewed from the above, and by using the image data in which the perspectives of the individual images are consistent so that a predetermined perspective is applied as a whole, a sandy beach with a sense of depth using plate polygons is used. A background image can be created. This allows the player to visually recognize a realistic image with a relatively small processing load and data amount.

Incidentally, in the perspective of each individual image, the distance between the specific viewpoint PV1 and each of the objects OB1 to OB4 is more dominant than the image data of each of the textures TD1 to TD4. That is, the perspective associated with each individual image changes significantly with respect to the change in the distance.

Next, the beach sprint production will be described.

The sandy beach dashing effect is an effect in which a plurality of symbol images are displayed as if they are running on the beach in a predetermined direction over a plurality of consecutive frames. In this presentation, the objects OB1 to OB4 and the textures TD1 to TD4 used to display the beach background image are used.

Here, the background image used in the sand beach dash production (hereinafter referred to as a production background image to distinguish it from the sand beach background image) has a different viewpoint from the sand beach background image. For this reason, if the textures TD1 to TD4 determined based on the specific viewpoint PV1 are used, the perspectives cannot be matched with each other, resulting in an unnatural image.

The phenomenon will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a change in perspective. For convenience of explanation, the wave object OB2 and the sky object OB4 will be omitted, and the beach object OB1 and the sea object OB3 will be described in succession.

As described above, since the beach object OB1 and the sea object OB3 are inclined with respect to the screen area PC12, the distance between the specific viewpoint PV1 and the objects OB1 and OB3 differs depending on the parts of the objects OB1 and OB3. ing. Specifically, the distance R1 from the specific viewpoint PV1 to the front end of the sandy beach object OB1, the distance R2 from the specific viewpoint PV1 to the front end of the sea object OB3, and the back of the specific viewpoint PV1 to the sea object OB3. The distance to the end portion on the side increases in the order of R3 (R1<R2<R3). In such a situation, perspective projection is performed with the specific viewpoint PV1 as a viewpoint, whereby an image with a perspective according to each of the distances R1 to R3 is obtained.

In this case, the degree of perspective is dependent on the ratio of the distances R1 to R3. Specifically, the higher the ratio of the distance R2 to the distance R1, the higher the perspective of the beach object OB1. Then, the higher the ratio of the distance R3 to the distance R2 is, the higher the perspective of the sea object OB3 is.

Further, the textures TD1 and TD3 attached to the beach object OB1 and the sea object OB3 are the perspectives (distance perception) between the individual images displayed by the objects OB1 and OB3 (actually also including the wave object OB2). ) Is set in consideration of the above ratio. This makes it possible to display an image with a consistent perspective.

Here, when the viewpoint is moved from the specific viewpoint PV1 in the -Y direction to be set as the different viewpoint PV2, the distances R1 to R3 change to the distances R1' to R3', respectively, and the ratio changes. As a result, the perspective is different in perspective projection. Then, if the textures TD1 and TD3 set according to the distances R1 to R3 are used, the perspective consistency between the objects OB1 and OB3 cannot be obtained. As a result, the image becomes unnatural as a whole.

In particular, when the images are updated by moving the objects OB1 and OB3 in a predetermined direction, discomfort due to the different perspectives of the images of the objects OB1 and OB3 is likely to be noticeable. Specifically, the sea displayed on the back side moves faster than the sand beach displayed on the front side.

In addition, when the angle of view is changed from the viewpoint, the degree of perspective is different, and thus the perspective shift is more noticeable.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when creating a production background image, parallel projection is used instead of perspective projection, and the sizes of the objects OB1 and OB3 are set according to the distance in the depth direction. The configuration is adjusted. These configurations will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram for describing a setting mode of each of the objects OB1 and OB3 when creating a background image for effect.

As described above, the parallel projection is a method of projecting the vertices of each polygon of each object so as to move linearly perpendicularly to the screen area PC12. When the parallel projection is performed, an image that does not depend on the distance from the viewpoint, that is, an image that has no perspective is displayed.

Specifically, when the beach object OB1 and the sea object OB3 are projected in parallel, both of them correspond to the distance from the viewpoint even though the sea object OB3 is on the back side of the beach object OB1 in the screen area PC12. It is displayed without the adjusted size. This reduces the perspective shift that can occur between the two.

In particular, the perspective based on the viewpoint and the distance between the objects OB1 and OB3 is more dominant than the perspective related to the textures TD1 and TD3 in the perspective related to each individual image. The shift of perspective based on it is easily noticeable.

On the other hand, by performing the parallel projection, the perspective itself based on the above distance is not added, so that the shift of the perspective can be reduced.

In this case, although the perspectives based on the textures TD1 and TD3 are reflected, the shift of the perspective is less noticeable than the shift of the perspective based on the distance. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to feel a sense of incongruity.

In addition, you may perform the process which eliminates the perspective of each texture TD1, TD3. This allows the player to visually recognize an image with more consistent perspective.

Specifically, for example, in each of the textures TD1 and TD3, it is preferable to perform a correction process in which the area mapped to the front side is reduced in the horizontal direction (X direction) and the area mapped to the back side is enlarged in the horizontal direction. Further, for example, each of the objects OB1 and OB3 may be a trapezoidal object having a long side on the front side and a short side on the back side, and a texture may be mapped to the trapezoidal object.

When performing parallel projection, since the sea that should originally appear to be smaller than the beach is displayed without being adjusted in size because it originally exists farther from the beach, the image does not have a sense of depth. In other words, the size ratio between the sandy beach and the sea does not correspond to the distance from the viewpoint, so the image has no sense of depth.

On the other hand, the magnifications of the objects OB1 and OB3 are set such that the ratio corresponds to the distance from the viewpoint. Specifically, the sizes of the objects OB1 and OB3 are set such that the sizes of the objects OB1 and OB3 gradually decrease as the distance from the viewpoint increases.

More specifically, when the beach object OB1 and the sea object OB3 are perspective-projected from the changed viewpoint, a beach image which is an image of the beach object OB1 is displayed in the area A shown in FIG. Then, in a region B shown in FIG. 72, a sea image which is an image related to the sea object OB3 is displayed. The ratio of the sizes of the areas A and B depends on the distance from the viewpoint.

The sizes and coordinates (specifically, Y coordinates) of the respective objects OB1 and OB3 are such that the area in which the image relating to the respective objects OB1 and OB3 is displayed is the same as the respective areas A and B when parallel projected. Is set to. As a result, an effect background image with a pseudo perspective is displayed.

Although the wave object OB2 is omitted for convenience of explanation, the same applies to the situation where the wave object OB2 is set.

A specific processing configuration relating to each image display will be described below.

First, the beach background calculation process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 73. The beach background calculation process is performed by the background calculation process (step S903) in the task process (FIG. 14) of the display CPU 131 when the currently set data table corresponds to the display of the beach background image. Executed.

In step S4201, the objects OB1 to OB4 required to display the beach background image are grasped.

Then, in step S4202, the coordinates and angles of the objects OB1 to OB4 are updated. Specifically, when the objects OB1 to OB4 are arranged in the world coordinate system, the objects OB1 to OB4 are arranged so as to be continuously arranged in the depth direction (direction away from the specific viewpoint PV1) and the objects OB1 to OB4 except the sky object OB4 are arranged. Each coordinate is set so as to be inclined at a predetermined angle with respect to the screen area PC12.

In the following step S4203, the address setting process of each texture is executed. Specifically, the addresses of the textures TD1 to TD4 attached to the objects OB1 to OB4 are set. Then, in step S4204, arithmetic processing for updating other parameters is performed.

In subsequent step S4205, perspective projection designation information that is information for specifying that each of the objects OB1 to OB4 is perspective projected is set. Then, in step S4206, the other background object is grasped, and in step S4207, the arithmetic processing for updating the parameter of the other background object is performed, and the main beach background arithmetic processing is ended.

When such processing is performed, in the rendering list output processing (step S806) performed thereafter, the objects OB1 to OB4 are set as the rendering targets, and various parameters applied to the objects OB1 to OB4. A drawing list in which is set is created. Further, perspective projection designation information is set in the drawing list. When the VDP 135 receives the drawing list, the VDP 135 arranges the objects OB1 to OB4 so that the objects OB1 to OB4 have the positional relationship as described above and performs perspective projection. As a result, an image with a sense of perspective is created.

Next, the background calculation process of the beach running performance will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The background calculation process of the beach running performance is executed by the background calculation process of step S903 in the task processing (FIG. 14) of the display CPU 131 when the currently set data table corresponds to the beach running performance. To be done.

First, in step S4301, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not the beach sprint production is being performed.

If the sandy beach dashing performance is not being performed, the process advances to step S4302 to determine whether it is the start timing of the sandy beach dashing production.

If it is not the start timing of the beach running performance, the present calculation processing is ended as it is, while if it is the start timing of the beach running performance, in step S4303 to step S4308, the initial setting for drawing the background image for performance is performed. Execute the process.

Specifically, first in step S4303, a process of grasping each of the objects OB1 to OB4 is executed.

Then, in step S4304, the process of adjusting the coordinates of each of the objects OB1 to OB4 is executed, and in step S4305, the process of adjusting the magnification applied to each of the objects OB1 to OB4 is executed. Specifically, for each of the objects OB1 to OB4, the coordinates and magnification corresponding to the effect background image are set. Specifically, when the objects OB1 to OB4 are projected in parallel, perspective projection is performed from another viewpoint PV2 in the coordinate system of the objects OB1 to OB4 when the parallel projected area displays a beach background image. In this case, the coordinates and magnification of each of the objects OB1 to OB4 are set so as to overlap the projection area in this case.

Then, in step S4306, another viewpoint PV2 is set as a viewpoint, and in step S4307, arithmetic processing related to initial setting of other parameters is executed. Then, in step S4308, parallel projection designation information is set. The parallel projection designation information is information for instructing the VDP 135 to project the objects OB1 to OB4 in parallel.

After that, in step S4309, other background objects are grasped, and in step S4310, arithmetic processing related to updating various parameters applied to the other background objects is executed, and this arithmetic processing ends. ..

When such a process is performed, each of the objects OB1 to OB4 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S806), and the respective objects OB1 to OB4 are set. Various parameters to be applied are set. The various parameters correspond to the case where the objects OB1 to OB4 are projected in parallel.

Further, parallel projection designation information is set in the drawing list. When the VDP 135 receives the drawing list, the VDP 135 grasps each of the objects OB1 to OB4, applies the parameters corresponding to the parallel projection to each of the objects OB1 to OB4, and parallelizes them based on the different viewpoint PV2. Project. As a result, a production background image viewed from a viewpoint (different viewpoint PV2) different from the viewpoint (specific viewpoint PV1) of the beach background image is created.

When the sandy beach running production is being performed, in steps S4311 to S4314, processing for scrolling the production background image is executed. Specifically, first, in step S4311, the objects OB1 to OB4 are grasped.

In subsequent step S4312, a process of updating the position of the viewpoint is executed. Specifically, the process of displacing the first displacement amount in the −X direction from the currently set viewpoint is executed.

After that, in step S4313, a calculation process for updating the parameters applied to each of the objects OB1 to OB4 is executed. Specifically, each of the objects OB1 to OB4 is moved from the current coordinates in the −X direction by a predetermined displacement amount. The predetermined displacement amount is set according to the distance between each of the objects OB1 to OB4 and the viewpoint within a range smaller than the displacement amount of the viewpoint in the −X direction.

Specifically, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 74(b), the larger the distance between the viewpoint and the objects OB1 to OB4 in the Z direction, the smaller the relative speed of the objects OB1 to OB4 with respect to the viewpoint. , The displacement amounts of the objects OB1 to OB4 are set. Specifically, as the distance between the viewpoint and the distance in the Z direction of each of the objects OB1 to OB4 increases, the difference between the displacement amount of each of the objects OB1 to OB4 and the first displacement amount decreases. The displacement amount is set. As a result, it appears that an object located closer to the viewpoint moves faster in the +X direction, and an object located farther from the viewpoint moves slower in the +X direction. Therefore, a pseudo perspective can be expressed.

Further, with respect to the wave object OB2, not only the displacement in the −X direction, but also the process of updating the coordinates of the Y coordinate and the Z coordinate is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69(b), the Y coordinate and the Z coordinate are set so that the wave object OB2 moves to the near side while maintaining the inclination angle. With this, it is possible to express how the waves are coming to the front side.

That is, the wave object OB2 is arranged with respect to the sand beach object OB1 so as to overlap with each other when viewed from the viewpoint (specifically, shifted in the Z direction), and the wave object OB2 is relatively displaced with respect to the sand beach object OB1. Will cause waves to be displayed so as to overlap the beach.

Then, when the displacement amount of the wave object OB2 from the initial position reaches a specific amount in advance, a process of maintaining the coordinates and updating the uniform α value so that the wave object OB2 gradually disappears is executed. .. Then, based on the fact that the uniform α value becomes a predetermined value (for example, the α value of perfect transmission), the wave object OB2 is again arranged at the initial position and a series of processing is executed. As a result, it is possible to repeatedly show how the waves hit and disappear, and it is possible to realize a realistic wave.

After that, parallel projection designation information is set in step S4314, the processes of steps S4309 and S4310 are executed, and the present calculation process is terminated.

When such a process is executed, each of the objects OB1 to OB4 necessary for displaying the background image is set as a drawing target in the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output process, and Parameter information applied to the objects OB1 to OB4 is set. The various parameters are set so that the viewpoint moves in the -X direction, and the objects OB1 to OB4 are arranged so that the relative speed to the viewpoint becomes smaller as the distance between the viewpoint and the objects OB1 to OB4 becomes larger. The amount of displacement of the coordinates of is set. As a result, the effect background image is displayed so as to scroll in the +X direction.

In addition, when the area to be projected becomes an area on the end side of each of the objects OB1 to OB4 due to the movement of the viewpoint, the viewpoint of each of the objects OB1 to OB4 currently being projected is changed. The same objects OB1 to OB4 are continuously set on the front side in the traveling direction. As a result, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the effect background image is interrupted due to the viewpoint moving at a speed faster than the objects OB1 to OB4.

Further, both ends of each of the textures TD1 to TD4 corresponding to the moving direction of the viewpoint, specifically, both ends in the X direction may be set so that the drawn patterns are continuous. As a result, the break of the object is hard to be grasped, and it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

Next, description will be made regarding the calculation processing for effect of the beach running effect using the flowchart of FIG. When the currently set data table corresponds to the beach running performance, the production processing for the beach running performance is executed in the production processing (step S904) in the task process (FIG. 14). Processing.

First, in step S4401, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not the beach sprint performance is being performed.

If the beach running performance is not in progress, the process advances to step S4402 to determine whether it is the start timing of the beach running performance based on the currently set data table.

If it is not the start timing of the sandy beach dashing effect, the present calculation processing is ended as it is, while if it is the start timing of the sandy beach dashing effect, the flow proceeds to step S4403 to grasp the symbol object of the dashing target. Then, in step S4404, arithmetic processing relating to the initial setting of various parameter information applied to the symbol object is executed. In this case, when the symbol object is projected in parallel, the coordinates of the symbol object are set so that the image relating to the symbol object overlaps the beach image. In detail, a pattern object is arranged between the beach object OB1 and the screen area PC12.

Then, in step S4405, the teaching object to be drawn this time is grasped. As described above, the teaching object is an object used when displaying an image that allows the player to teach the player the game situation, and specifically teaches what round the current round is. The object for performing the open/close operation and the object for indicating the number of times the open/close execution mode is continuously performed are set. In step S4405, these teaching objects are grasped.

Then, in step S4406, arithmetic processing relating to the initial setting of various parameter information applied to the teaching object is executed. In this case, the coordinates of the teaching object are set so that the teaching object is located closer to the viewpoint than the objects OB1 to OB4 used to generate the effect background image. Then, this calculation processing is ended.

When such processing is executed, the design object and the teaching object are set as the drawing targets in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S806), and The applicable parameters are set. These objects are arranged closer to the viewpoint than the objects OB1 to OB4 used to generate the background image for production. As a result, the parallel projection is performed on each of the objects, so that the design image and the teaching image are displayed so as to overlap with the effect background image.

If the sandy beach dash production is being performed, a process of grasping the symbol object of the dashing target is executed in step S4407. Then, in step S4408, a calculation process for updating the parameters applied to the symbol object is executed. Specifically, the coordinates of the symbol object are updated so that the symbol object moves along with the movement of the viewpoint in the −X direction. In this case, the displacement amount of the viewpoint and the displacement amount of the symbol object are set to be the same. As a result, the movement of the viewpoint and the movement of the symbol object can be synchronized, and the viewpoint can be made to follow the movement of the symbol image.

In subsequent steps S4409 and S4410, the updating process of the teaching object accompanying the movement of the viewpoint is executed. Specifically, first, in step S4409, the teaching object is grasped. Then, in step S4410, arithmetic processing for updating the parameters applied to the teaching object is executed. Specifically, the coordinates of the teaching object are updated so that the teaching object moves along with the movement of the viewpoint in the −X direction. In this case, the displacement amount of the viewpoint and the displacement amount of the teaching object are set to be the same. As a result, the movement of the viewpoint and the movement of the teaching object can be synchronized, and the teaching image can be constantly displayed.

In the above process, for convenience, the processes of steps S4403 to S4406 and the processes of steps S4407 to S4410 are displayed separately, but the process is not limited to this, and these processes may be shared. In this case, the image data to be set at each update timing is set in advance on the data table, and each time the update timing is reached, the various image data corresponding to the update timing is appropriately read out and the setting process related to drawing is performed. The configuration may be performed.

Next, the state of the beach background image and the beach sprint production will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface G on which the beach background image is displayed, and FIG. 76(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the beach sprinting effect.

As shown in FIG. 76(a), in the beach background image BP10, a first sand image BP11, a first wave image BP12, a first sea image BP13, and a first sky image BP14 are displayed in order from the front side. .. The beach background image BP10 is an image with a perspective, and specifically, for example, in the first sea image BP13, the wave interval and the wave width become smaller toward the back side (horizontal line).

In the beach running performance, as shown in FIG. 76(b), the second sand image BP21, the second wave image BP22, the second sea image BP23, and the second sky image BP24 are displayed in this order from the front side. An effect background image BP20 having a different viewpoint from the beach background image BP10 is displayed. In this case, the second sand image BP21→the second wave image BP22→the second sea image BP23→the second aerial image BP24 are displayed in the order of decreasing size, so that the image has a perspective.

Then, the pattern images CP1 to CP3 and the teaching images CP4 and CP5 are displayed so as to overlap the production background image BP20. Then, by moving the production background image BP20 in the right direction, which is the direction corresponding to the +X direction, the symbol images CP1 to CP3 appear to move toward the left direction, which is the direction corresponding to the −X direction. .. In this case, the moving speed becomes slower in the order of the second sand image BP21→the second wave image BP22→the second sea image BP23→the second sky image BP24. As a result, objects on the far side (farther from the viewpoint) seem to move more slowly, which creates a sense of perspective.

As described above, the objects OB1 to OB4 are arranged side by side in the depth direction, and as the textures to be attached to the objects OB1 to OB4, those corresponding to the image when viewed from the specific viewpoint PV1 are prepared, and these are prepared. In the configuration in which the beach background image BP10 is displayed by perspective projection, the objects OB1 to OB4 are projected in parallel when the effect background image BP20 based on the different viewpoint PV2 different from the specific viewpoint PV1 is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the shift in perspective consistency due to the change in viewpoint while making the textures used in common. Therefore, the amount of data can be reduced in that the textures can be shared.

Particularly, by arranging the objects OB1 to OB4, which are plate polygons, which are relatively simple objects, with an inclination with respect to the projection plane and performing perspective projection of these objects OB1 to OB4, a relatively small processing load is achieved. It is possible to generate a beach background image BP10 with a perspective. On the other hand, if the viewpoints are different, the deviation of the perspective degree based on the perspective projection becomes more noticeable.

On the other hand, when the production background image BP20 having different viewpoints is generated, the deviation can be suppressed by performing the parallel projection without generating the perspective.

In this case, the larger the distance between the viewpoint and each of the objects OB1 to OB4, the smaller the magnification of each of the objects OB1 to OB4 and the smaller the relative moving speed of each of the objects OB1 to OB4 with respect to the viewpoint. As a result, the image obtained by parallel projection can be viewed as an image with perspective.

In the above configuration, each of the objects OB1 to OB4 is a plate-shaped polygon, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, any of the objects OB1 to OB4 is a three-dimensional object set corresponding to an image to be displayed. It may be configured as a specific object of. In this case, a texture is provided corresponding to the specific object, and the texture is attached to the specific object. As a result, a change in the viewpoint can be dealt with for the image related to the specific object, but a change in the viewpoint cannot be dealt with for the other objects, which may cause a situation in which perspective consistency cannot be obtained. On the other hand, when the viewpoint changes, parallel projection is performed to reduce the shift between the two.

Further, in the above-mentioned configuration, the different viewpoint PV2 is a position obtained by moving the specific viewpoint PV1 in the −Y direction, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a position shifted in the Z direction, for example, and is arbitrary.

Further, although the matching of perspectives between the images of the objects OB1 to OB4 has been described, the invention is not limited to this. For example, the matching of an image of two-dimensional image data such as a backmost image and an image of one object. The same applies to sex. That is, even when one object and two-dimensional image data are combined to display one image, switching between perspective projection and parallel projection due to a change in viewpoint can be applied.

In the above configuration, the texture used to display the beach background image BP10 is used to display the production background image BP20, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the texture used to display a predetermined image. May be any configuration as long as it is used to display an image having a different viewpoint from the predetermined image, and the specific display content is arbitrary.

Further, in the above-mentioned configuration, the viewpoint is moved in the −X direction, but the invention is not limited to this, and the viewpoint may not be moved. In this case, each object OB1 to OB4 may be moved in the +X direction, and the amount of movement may be changed according to the distance from the viewpoint. Although the moving direction of the viewpoint is the −X direction, the moving direction is not limited to this and may be any direction.

In the above configuration, the coordinates and magnification of each object OB1 to OB4 are set so that the area when each object OB1 to OB4 is projected in parallel overlaps the area when each object OB1 to OB4 is perspectively projected. Not limited to The point is that the coordinates and magnification of each of the objects OB1 to OB4 may be adjusted so that a perspective image is generated in the image corresponding to the different viewpoint PV2.

Further, when the effect background image BP20 is displayed, the inclination angle of each of the objects OB1 to OB3 may be changed from the inclination angle when the beach background image BP10 is displayed, and the inclination angle of each of the objects OB1 to OB3. May be changed individually.

Further, the projection pattern for the teaching object and the pattern object, which are the drawing targets in the sandy beach dash production, may be either parallel projection or perspective projection. When the parallel projection is performed, the symbol images CP1 to CP3 and the teaching images CP4 and CP5 can be easily displayed, while when the perspective projection is performed, the images CP1 to CP5 can be stereoscopically displayed. ..

Further, the projection pattern of the teaching object may be set to parallel projection, and the projection pattern of the pattern object may be perspective projection. In this case, it is possible to stereoscopically display the pattern images CP1 to CP3 relating to the sandy beach dashing effect while displaying the teaching images CP4 and CP5 in an easy-to-see manner.

<Second Embodiment>
The present embodiment has a configuration for performing a distortion effect and a blink effect as display effects. The drawing process differs from that of the first embodiment in accordance with the distortion effect. The configuration for performing each effect will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will be omitted.

<Regarding the configuration for producing distortion>
A configuration for performing the distortion effect will be described.

The distortion effect is an effect in which a part of the background image is distorted when the variable display of the symbols is performed. Specifically, when a variable display of a symbol that scrolls in a specific direction is started in a situation where an image depicting an underwater state is displayed as a background image, a partial area of the background image, specifically, The area opposite to the traveling direction of the symbol is distorted with respect to the symbol. As a result, it is assumed that the player recognizes the distortion as refraction of light due to the flow formed when the pattern starts scrolling. Therefore, the scroll of the symbol in the water can be recognized in a realistic manner.

The configuration used in the distortion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 77. 77(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the refraction object OB10, FIGS. 77(b) and 77(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a state in which the refraction object OB10 is deformed, and FIG. 77(d) is. It is an explanatory view for explaining alpha data SKD1 for refraction applied to refraction object OB10.

As shown in FIG. 77(a), the refraction object OB10 is composed of a rectangular plate polygon. A plate polygon can be called an object having a small number of polygons, and is low-definition image data configured in a plane shape without unevenness in the three-dimensional direction (specifically, the Z direction in the local coordinate system).

The shape (size) of the refraction object OB10 is set so as to correspond to the strain region PE1 in which the strain is desired to be generated, and specifically, the strain region PE1 is covered when the conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system is performed. Is set to be able. Specifically, the shape of the refraction object OB10 is set such that the display area when the refraction object OB10 is projected in parallel is larger than the distortion area PE1. Therefore, when parallel projection is performed in a state where the refraction object OB10 is arranged so as to overlap the distortion region PE1, an image of the refraction object OB10 is displayed on the distortion region PE1. Becomes

In the refraction object OB10, the vertex coordinates are set in a grid pattern. Local three-dimensional coordinates are set to the vertex coordinates, and the Z coordinates (coordinates in the depth direction) of each vertex coordinate are set to be the same.

The vertex coordinates of the refraction object OB10 are set corresponding to the distortion region PE1, and specifically, the region formed by the vertex coordinates other than the vertex coordinates forming the outer edge of the refraction object OB10 is the distortion region PE1. It is set to be substantially the same.

The refraction object OB10 is configured to be deformable. Specifically, the Z coordinate of each vertex coordinate of the refraction object OB10 can be individually displaced, and the displacement of the Z coordinate causes the refraction object OB10 to be distorted.

A modification of the refraction object OB10 will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, plural types of deformation modes of the refraction object OB10 are set. The refraction object OB10 of the first modification and the refraction object OB10 of the second modification of the plurality of kinds of modifications will be described with reference to FIGS. 77(b) and 77(c). 77(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the refraction object OB10 of the first modification, and FIG. 77(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the refraction object OB10 of the second modification. For convenience of description, in the following description, the refraction object OB10 of the first modification is simply referred to as a first modification OB10a, and the refraction object OB10 of the second modification is simply referred to as a second modification OB10b.

As shown in FIGS. 77(b) and 77(c), each of the modified embodiments OB10a and OB10b is deformed so that unevenness is formed on the plate surface to which the texture is attached. Specifically, in each of the modified forms OB10a and OB10b, the Z coordinate of each vertex coordinate corresponding to the distortion region PE1 is displaced by a predetermined amount with reference to the Z coordinate of the vertex coordinate forming the outer edge portion of the refraction object OB10. It is transformed by doing. In detail, a distortion is generated so that one cycle of a sine wave having a Z component with the vertex coordinates of both ends in the X direction as fixed ends is formed and an arc having the vertex coordinates of both ends in the Y direction as a start point and an end point is formed. The Z coordinate of each vertex coordinate included in the area PE1 is displaced. Then, in each of the modified embodiments OB10a and OB10b, the phase of the sine wave is shifted by π.

A distortion image is represented by mapping the texture of a portion of the background image corresponding to the area in which the modified forms OB10a and OB10b are arranged, to each of the modified forms OB10a and OB10b. In this case, each time the predetermined update timing is reached, the refracting object OB10 is deformed alternately into the first modified embodiment OB10a and the second modified embodiment OB10b having different phases in the X direction, thereby proceeding in the X direction. A distorted image corresponding to the flow of water can be expressed. As a result, it is possible to visually recognize that a flow of water in the X direction is formed along with the scroll of the symbol in the X direction, and the scroll of the symbol and the distorted image can be appropriately associated with each other.

Further, in the distortion effect, the refraction α data SKD1 is used in order to make the distorted image displayed in the area in which the refraction object OB10 is arranged and the peripheral image of the area familiar. As described above, the α data is transparency information that is applied on a pixel-by-pixel basis in image data, and is stored in the memory module 133 in advance as image data.

As shown in FIG. 77(d), the size of the refraction α data SKD1 is set such that its outer shape matches the refraction object OB10 to which it is applied. The refraction α data SKD1 is divided into a plurality of regions in which different α values are set.

The areas for dividing the refraction α data SKD1 are formed so that the transparency on the edge side is higher than the transparency on the center side. More specifically, the refraction α data SKD1 is provided in the central region of the refraction α data SKD1, and surrounds the non-transmission area SKA0 in which the non-transmission information “1” is set and the non-transmission area SKA0. The first partial transmission area SKA1 provided with the partial transmission information (0<α1<1) and the first partial transmission area SKA1 are provided so as to surround the first partial transmission area SKA1 and have a transmittance higher than that of the first partial transmission area SKA1. It is divided into a second partial transmission area SKA2 in which high partial transmission information (0<α2<α1) is set.

By applying the refraction α data SKD1 to the refraction object OB10 (including the first modification OB10a and the second modification OB10b), the refraction α data for each pixel included in the refraction object OB10. The α value included in SKD1 is applied.

Further, when the distorted image is overlapped with the image overlapping on the back side of the display surface G, the α value determined by the refraction α data SKD1 and the refraction object OB10 are assigned to each of the dots related to the superimposition. Numerical information fusion (that is, blending) is performed based on the set uniform α value. Specifically, assuming that the α value set in the refraction α data SKD1 is an individual α value,
R: “R value of back side image”×(“1”−“individual α value”דuniform α value”)+“R value of distorted image”דindividual α value”דuniform α value”
G: "G value of back side image" x ("1"-"individual α value" x "uniform α value") + "G value of distorted image" x "individual α value" x "uniform α value"
B: “B value of the back side image”×(“1”−“individual α value”דuniform α value”)+“B value of the distorted image”דindividual α value”דuniform α value”
Is calculated.

By applying the refraction α data SKD1, the distorted image gradually becomes transparent from the central region toward the edge side. As a result, the edges of the distorted image become familiar with the background image, and the edges of the distorted image are less noticeable.

Further, the distorted image is displayed in a state in which the uniform α value is reflected. Specifically, when the uniform α value is small, the back side image is reflected rather than the distorted image. On the other hand, when the uniform α value is large, the distorted image is reflected more than the back side image.

A specific processing configuration of the distortion effect will be described.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the distortion effect calculation process executed by the display CPU 131. The distortion effect calculation process is executed when the currently set data table is the data table corresponding to the distortion effect in the effect calculation process of step S904 in the task process (FIG. 14).

First, in step S4501, it is determined whether or not the distortion effect is being executed based on the currently set data table.

If the distortion effect is not being executed, the process advances to step S4502 to determine whether or not it is the distortion effect start timing based on the currently set data table. Specifically, it is determined whether or not information that specifies the start timing of the distortion effect is set in the currently set data table. The start timing of the distortion effect is set to be the same as the variation start timing of the symbol. As a result, the distortion effect will be executed when the variation of the symbol is started.

If it is not the start timing, the present calculation processing is ended as it is, while if it is the start timing, processing relating to the initial setting of the refraction object OB10 is executed in steps S4503 to S4507. Specifically, first, in step S4503, the refraction object OB10 is grasped. Then, in step S4504, the coordinates of the refraction object OB10 are initialized.

The coordinates are preset on the data table. Specifically, a region on the side opposite to the scroll direction of the symbol image with respect to the symbol image is set as the distortion region PE1, and the coordinates of the refraction object OB10 are set so as to overlap the strain region PE1. ing. More specifically, when the refraction object OB10 is projected, the coordinates of the refraction object OB10 are set so that vertex coordinates other than the vertex coordinates that form the outer edge of the refraction object OB10 are included in the distortion region PE1. There is.

After that, in step S4505, "1" which is opaque information is set as a uniform α value. In a succeeding step S4506, calculation processing of other parameters applied to the refraction object OB10 is performed.

Then, in step S4507, the coordinate mapping data is initialized. The coordinate mapping data will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the coordinate mapping data. More specifically, FIG. 79(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first coordinate mapping data MD1, and FIG. 79(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second coordinate mapping data MD2.

The coordinate mapping data MD1 and MD2 are data used to determine the amount of displacement in the Z direction of the vertex coordinates of the refraction object OB10. In each coordinate mapping data MD1 and MD2, a displacement amount in the Z direction is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each vertex of the refraction object OB10. Specifically, in correspondence with the fact that only 10 vertices of the refraction object OB10 are set in a matrix in the X direction and 7 vertices in the Y direction, of the vertices forming the refraction object OB10, the top leftmost vertex. Z(a,b) (a:1-10, b:1-7) is set in a matrix with the amount of displacement in the Z direction applied to Z(1,1). For convenience of explanation, Z(a,b) set in the first coordinate mapping data MD1 is Z1(a,b) and Z2(a,b) set in the second coordinate mapping data MD2. It is assumed that Z(a,b) indicates both Z1(a,b) and Z2(a,b).

Z (a, b) is a displacement amount set in the Z direction based on the Z coordinate of each vertex forming the outer edge of the refraction object OB10. More specifically, Z(1,b), Z(10,b), Z(a,1), and Z(a,7) corresponding to the vertices forming the outer edge of the refraction object OB10 are “0”. Is set, and the other Z(x, y) (x: 2 to 9, y: 2 to 6) is set with the displacement amount corresponding to each of the modified forms OB10a and OB10b.

Specifically, Z1(x, y) is set so that the refraction object OB10 is deformed into the first modification OB10a. On the other hand, Z2(x, y) is set so that the refraction object OB10 is transformed into the second transformation mode OB10b.

In step S4507, a process of setting the address information of the first coordinate mapping data MD1 in the drawing list is executed as an initial setting. Thereby, the drawing list in which the address information of the first coordinate mapping data MD1 is set is created. Then, the VDP 135 acquires the first coordinate mapping data MD1 based on the address information, and displaces each vertex of the refraction object OB10 by the displacement amount of the Z coordinate corresponding to each vertex. , Processing for deforming the refraction object OB10 into the first modification OB10a.

In step S4507, the display CPU 131 executes a process for specifying which coordinate mapping data is currently set. Specifically, the work RAM 132 is provided with a specific storage area for storing information for specifying currently set coordinate mapping data. In step S4507, information corresponding to the first coordinate mapping data MD1 is set in the specific storage area.

After the process of step S4507 is executed, the refraction α data SKD1 is set in steps S4508 to S4510. Specifically, the refraction α data SKD1 is grasped in step S4508, and the coordinates of the refraction α data SKD1 are set to the same coordinates as the refraction object OB10 in step S4509. Then, in step S4510, the calculation processing of other parameters applied to the refraction α data SKD1 is performed.

Then, in step S4511, the other effect objects are grasped, and in step S4512, the calculation processing of the parameters applied to the effect objects is performed.

In subsequent step S4513, the distortion effect designation information for specifying that the distortion effect is performed in VDP 135 is set, and the present arithmetic processing is ended.

When this process is executed, at least the refraction object OB10 and the refraction α data SKD1 are set in the rendering list created in the subsequent rendering list output process (step S806). In this case, the refraction object OB10 and the refraction α data SKD1 are set to the same coordinates.

Further, in the drawing list, address information of the first coordinate mapping data MD1 and distortion effect designation information are set.

On the other hand, if the distortion effect is being executed (step S4501: YES), in step S4514, it is determined whether or not the transparency period is in progress based on the currently set data table. Specifically, in the data table corresponding to the distortion effect, information for specifying that the period is the transparent period is set. The transparency period is set to a period from a timing of a plurality of frames (for example, 10 frames) before the end timing of the distortion effect to the end timing of the distortion effect. In step S4514, it is determined whether the information is set in the currently set data table.

If it is not during the transparent period, the refraction object OB10 is grasped in step S4515, and the parameter calculation processing is executed in step S4516. In this case, the initially set various parameters are maintained.

Then, in step S4517, a process of updating the deformation of the refraction object OB10, that is, a process of updating the coordinate mapping data is executed. Specifically, the coordinate mapping data set in the previous processing cycle is grasped based on the information stored in the specific storage area. Then, the address of the coordinate mapping data different from the coordinate mapping data grasped in the previous processing time is set, and the information corresponding to the coordinate mapping data set this time is stored in the specific storage area. For example, when the first coordinate mapping data MD1 is set in the previous processing cycle, the second coordinate mapping data MD2 is set, and when the second coordinate mapping data MD2 is set in the previous processing cycle. The first coordinate mapping data MD1 is set.

Then, the processes of steps S4508 to S4513 are executed, and the present calculation process ends.

When the above processing is executed, a drawing list in which at least the refraction object OB10 and the refraction α data SKD1 are set is created. In this case, the parameters applied to the refraction object OB10 and the refraction α data SKD1 are maintained.

Further, in the drawing list created this time, an address of coordinate mapping data different from the coordinate mapping data set in the drawing list created last time is set, and distortion effect designation information is set.

If it is during the transparent period (step S4514: YES), the refraction object OB10 is grasped in step S4518. Then, in step S4519, the uniform α value is updated. Specifically, a process of subtracting the uniform α value by a predetermined value (for example, 0.1) is executed.

Then, in step S4520, other parameter calculation processing is executed, and in step S4521, coordinate mapping data update processing is executed. Then, the processes of steps S4508 to S4513 are executed, and the present calculation process is ended. Since these processes have already been described, description thereof will be omitted.

When the above process is executed, the drawing lists having different uniform α values applied to the refraction object OB10 are created. The uniform α value gradually decreases for each frame.

Here, the transparent period and the uniform subtraction value of the α value are set in association with each other. Specifically, the subtraction value and the transparency period are set so that the uniform α value becomes “0” at the end timing of the distortion effect. In detail, both are set so that the number of frames related to the transparent period=1/the subtracted value. As a result, the image attached to the refraction object OB10 gradually disappears, and completely disappears at the end timing of the distortion effect.

In the symbol calculation process (step S905) of the task process (FIG. 14), a process relating to the start of variable display of symbols is executed in synchronization with the start of distortion effect. Specifically, a process for scrolling each symbol image in a predetermined direction (left direction) is executed.

Next, the drawing processing performed by the VDP 135 in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The drawing process is a loop process that is periodically performed in a predetermined cycle, and specifically, is performed in a cycle shorter than the cycle (20 msec) in which the drawing list is created. In this case, the time required to execute the drawing process is set shorter than the reception interval of the drawing list. As a result, a new drawing list is not received while the drawing process is being performed.

Further, the time taken to execute the drawing process and the time taken to create the drawing list and receive the drawing list is set to be shorter than the image update interval. This prevents a situation in which drawing takes longer than the image update interval.

First, in step S4601, it is determined whether a new drawing list has been received. If a new drawing list has not been received, this processing is terminated as it is, while if a new drawing list has been received, in steps S4602 to S4608 the background drawing data (background image) ) Is created.

Specifically, first, in step S4602, background setting processing is executed. Then, the processes of steps S4603 to S4608 are executed on the backmost image and the object for the background that have been grasped in step S4602. As a result, the drawing data for the background is first created and written in the buffer for the background.

After that, by executing the processing of steps S4609 to S4616, drawing data for effects and symbols is created. Then, in step S4617, the drawing data combining process is executed, and the present drawing process is ended.

According to this configuration, the background image has been created before the process related to the creation of the rendering data for the effect and the drawing. This makes it possible to use the background image when executing the process related to the creation of the drawing data for the effect and the drawing.

Next, the distortion effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The distortion effect setting process is executed by the effect setting process in step S4609 of the drawing process (FIG. 80) when the distortion effect designation information is set in the drawing list.

First, in step S4701, the refraction object OB10 set in the drawing list is grasped.

After that, in step S4702, the coordinate mapping data to be applied this time is grasped based on the address information of the coordinate mapping data set in the drawing list. In subsequent step S4703, the refraction object OB10 is deformed using the coordinate mapping data acquired in step S4702.

Specifically, the displacement amount in the Z direction corresponding to each vertex forming the refraction object OB10 is grasped by referring to the coordinate mapping data. Then, the Z coordinate of each vertex in the local coordinate system is displaced by the grasped displacement amount in the Z direction. As a result, the refraction object OB10 is transformed into the first modification OB10a or the second modification OB10b.

Then, in step S4704, various parameters applied to the second modified embodiment OB10b are grasped. Then, in step S4705, the setting processing to the world coordinate system is executed for the first modified embodiment OB10a or the second modified embodiment OB10b, and the process proceeds to step S4706.

In step S4706, other effect objects are grasped, and in step S4707, parameters applied to the effect object are grasped. Then, in step S4708, the setting process to the world coordinate system is performed for the other effect objects, and the setting process ends.

By performing the setting process as described above, the first modification OB10a or the second modification OB10b formed by deforming the refraction object OB10 is arranged in the world coordinate system.

Next, the distortion effect texture mapping process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The distortion effect texture mapping process is executed by the color information setting process in step S4615 of the drawing process (FIG. 80) when the distortion effect designation information is set in the drawing list.

In the distortion effect texture mapping process, a process of using a part of the background image as a texture attached to the refraction object OB10 (specifically, one of the deformation modes OB10a and OB10b) is executed.

In step S4801, the background image set as the current drawing target is grasped. Specifically, the drawing data for the background written in the buffer for the background in step S4608 of the drawing process (FIG. 80) is grasped.

In subsequent step S4802, a process of creating a texture to be attached to refraction object OB10 is executed using the background image grasped in step S4801. Specifically, by trimming the grasped background image, image data of a portion of the background image corresponding to a region related to the refraction object OB10, specifically, a region onto which the refraction object OB10 is projected is displayed. Pull out. In this case, the image data is extracted so that the size of the image data is the same as the size of the refraction object OB10.

When trimming, the drawing data for the background written in the buffer for the background is not changed and is separately used in the buffer.

After that, in step S4803, the image data of the portion extracted in step S4802 is pasted as a texture onto the refraction object OB10 (first modified form OB10a or second modified form OB10b). In this case, the lap mapping method or the UV wrapping method is used.

After that, in step S4804, the textures to be pasted to other objects are grasped based on the drawing list, and in step S4805, the textures are pasted to each object, and this processing is ended.

With this configuration, the background image corresponding to the projection area of the refraction object OB10 is pasted onto the refraction object OB10. In this case, the refraction object OB10 is projected in the deformed state of the first modified embodiment OB10a or the second modified embodiment OB10b, so that the background image of the distorted area PE1 corresponding to the projection area of the refraction object OB10 is distorted. This makes it possible to represent a state in which a part of the background image is distorted without separately providing a texture corresponding to the distortion.

Here, as described above, the size of the texture attached to the refraction object OB10 and the size of the refraction object OB10 are set to be the same. As a result, as compared with the image quality of the image displayed in the other area, the deterioration of the image quality of the distorted image that may occur due to the deformation of the refraction object OB10 is less noticeable.

In the rendering process and the drawing data creation process for symbols in step S4616 of the drawing process (FIG. 80) when the distortion effect is executed, the drawing data is created by projecting by parallel projection. Accordingly, it is not necessary to set the size of the refraction object OB10 in consideration of the distance from the viewpoint, so that the size of the refraction object OB10 can be easily set.

However, the projection is not limited to parallel projection, and may be configured to perform perspective projection. In this case, when the refraction object OB10 is projected, the size of the refraction object OB10 and the refraction object OB10 are considered so that the projection region of the refraction object OB10 corresponds to the distortion region PE1. It is recommended that the coordinates of are set.

Next, the distortion effect fusion process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The distortion effect fusion process is executed in the drawing data combination process (step S4617) of the drawing process (FIG. 80) when the distortion effect designation information is set in the drawing list. For convenience of explanation, the unit area corresponding to the dots included in the region where the deformed refraction object OB10 is projected in the frame buffer 142 will be described as an object, and the unit area corresponding to the dots included in the other regions will be described. The description is omitted. Further, it is assumed that the first target dot is predetermined.

First, in step S4901, the numerical information of the target pixel corresponding to the current target dot among the dots included in the area in which the refraction object OB10 is projected is grasped based on the rendering data for rendering. The numerical information corresponds to the numerical information (denoted as “m”) of the distorted image.

Then, in step S4902, the individual α value corresponding to the current target dot is grasped based on the refraction α data SKD1, and in step S4903, it is applied to the refraction object OB10 based on the drawing list. Understand the uniform α value.

In the following step S4904, the numerical information of the target pixel corresponding to the current target dot in the background image is grasped based on the drawing data for the background. The numerical information corresponds to the numerical information (denoted as “n”) of the back side image.

Then, in step S4905, a fusion process (blending process) is executed based on the grasping result grasped by the processes of steps S4901 to S4904, and the fusion result is stored in each unit area in the frame buffer 142 at this time. Write to the unit area corresponding to the target dot.

In the fusion process, the arithmetic expression described above is used. That is, n*(1-“individual α value”דuniform α value”)+mדindividual α value”דuniform α value” is calculated.

In a succeeding step S4906, it is determined whether or not the fusion processing is completed for all the dots included in the projection area of the refraction object OB10. If not completed, a process of updating the target dot is executed in step S4907, and the process returns to step S4901. As a result, the fusion process is executed for the new target dot. If it has been completed, this fusion processing is terminated.

By performing the above processing, the distorted image and the background image are fused. That is, when the uniform α value is “1”, a distorted image that becomes transparent toward the outer edge is displayed. On the other hand, when the uniform α value is “0”, the background image is displayed as it is.

Next, the state of the distortion effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the distortion effect, FIG. 84(a) is an explanatory view for explaining an image before the distortion effect is started, and FIG. 84(b) is a first modified embodiment OB10a. FIG. 84(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a distorted image based on the second modified embodiment OB10b. In addition, in relation to the drawings, a part of the display surface G is shown, and only the two coral images CP12 are displayed as part of the design image CP11 to be distorted and the background image showing the undersea condition. Shows a plurality of individual images and the backmost image.

As shown in FIG. 84(a), before the distortion effect is started, the symbol image CP11 is stopped and displayed. In this case, coral is drawn in the distortion area PE1 on the display surface G, specifically, in the area (right side area) opposite to the scroll direction (left direction) of the symbol image CP11 with respect to the symbol image CP11. Two coral images CP12 are displayed side by side.

When the distortion effect is started, the symbol image CP11 scrolls to the left. In this case, as shown in FIG. 84( b ), in the distorted region PE1, the first distorted image CP15 in which the inflated expanded coral image CP13 and the contracted contracted coral image CP14 are drawn is displayed. In this case, the expanded coral image CP13 is displayed on the symbol image CP11 side, and the contracted coral image CP14 is displayed on the opposite side.

In the next frame with respect to the start timing of the distortion effect, as shown in FIG. 8C, in the distortion region PE1, the second distortion image in which the positional relationship between the expanded coral image CP13 and the contracted coral image CP14 is reversed. CP16 is displayed.

Then, the distorted images CP15 and CP16 are alternately displayed for each frame. As a result, it appears that the pattern image CP11 is fluctuating due to the fact that the underwater flow is formed in the region opposite to the traveling direction of the symbol image CP11.

Then, after the scroll (distortion effect) of the symbol image CP11 is started, based on the update of the predetermined number of frames, the strained area PE1 is gradually replaced with the expanded coral image CP13 and the contracted coral image CP14. , A coral image CP12 is displayed.

As described above, when the variable display of the pattern image CP11 is performed, the distortion images CP15 and CP16 are alternately displayed in the distortion region PE1 so that a flow is formed in the water by scrolling of the pattern image CP11 and the back side is displayed. The background can appear to shake. This makes it possible to more realistically represent the scrolling of symbols in the water.

In this case, each of the distorted images CP15 and CP16 was created by deforming the refraction object OB10 into the first modified form OB10a or the second modified form OB10b and pasting a part of the background image as a texture on these. Accordingly, it is not necessary to separately prepare a texture for expressing the distortion, so that it is possible to reduce the amount of data required to distort the image.

In addition, the drawing data of the background image is created before executing the process related to drawing the refraction object OB10, and the drawing data is used to create the texture to be pasted to the refraction object OB10. As a result, it is not necessary to prepare in advance a texture to be attached to the refraction object OB10, so that the amount of texture data can be further reduced.

Specifically, various background objects are arranged in the world coordinate system, and by projecting them, the drawing data to be distorted, that is, the two-dimensional image data for the background is acquired. After that, in a state where the refraction object OB10 is arranged and deformed, drawing data to be distorted is pasted and projected as a texture on the refraction object OB10. With this, the process related to the texture creation can be used as a part of the drawing process, so that the processing load can be reduced. In other words, the image created in the middle of the drawing process can be used as the texture.

Numerical information for three colors is stored as color information in each unit area (pixel) of the texture. Therefore, the amount of information is likely to be large as compared with the coordinate mapping data in which only the amount of displacement in the Z direction is set. In this regard, according to the above configuration, since the distorted images CP15 and CP16 can be displayed using only the coordinate mapping data having a relatively small amount of information, the textures associated with the distorted images CP15 and CP16 are separately provided. By comparison, the amount of data relating to the distortion effect can be reduced.

In addition, when the shape of the refraction object OB10 is set so that the display area when the refraction object OB10 is projected in parallel is larger than the distortion area PE1, and when the refraction object OB10 is deformed, the outer edge of the refraction object OB10 is set. The Z coordinate of the part is not changed. This makes it possible to prevent the boundary between the image relating to the refraction object OB10 and the other images from standing out.

Further, the refraction α data SKD1 is provided such that the distorted images CP15 and CP16 become transparent toward the outer edge portions of the distorted images CP15 and CP16. As a result, the boundary between the image relating to the refraction object OB10 and the other images can be more preferably made inconspicuous.

Then, when the distortion effect ends, the distortion images CP15 and CP16 are gradually made transparent. As a result, when the distorted images CP15 and CP16 change to the coral image CP12, the change can be made inconspicuous.

In the above configuration, the scene in which the pattern image CP11 starts the variable display is set as the scene in which the distortion is expressed, but the scene is not limited to this and is arbitrary. For example, it may be used to represent a shock wave generated when an object moves at high speed, or may be used when switching scenes or when switching the symbol image CP11 to another symbol image. In this case, the shape of the refraction object OB10 is set according to the region to be distorted (distortion region PE1).

Further, the present invention can be applied not only to the effect of expressing the distortion but also to the display effect of changing a part or the whole of the image. For example, a part of the image may be enlarged or reduced by changing the parameter applied to the refraction object OB10, or may be rotated. Further, a part of the image displayed on the display surface G may be made transparent by being compared with other areas.

Further, for example, a specific object capable of displaying the entire display surface G when projected is provided, and the drawing data of the background image stored in the background buffer is pasted on the specific object as it is. Then, each time the predetermined update timing is reached, the specific object is divided into a plurality of component objects, and the component objects are independently moved, so that the background image displayed on the display surface G is broken. It is possible to perform an effect of visually confirming that This makes it possible to suitably switch scenes and the like.

Further, according to the above configuration, the background image is trimmed so that the texture attached to the refraction object OB10 has the same size as that of the refraction object OB10. However, the present invention is not limited to this and, for example, a different size. The trimming may be performed so that In this case, the enlargement or reduction processing may be executed according to the size of the refraction object OB10. Thereby, the image attached to the tail of the refraction object OB10 is distorted by the enlargement or reduction processing, and thus the distorted image can be further distorted. However, in the case of the above configuration, the boundary between the distorted image and the other image is likely to be conspicuous. Therefore, the above configuration is preferable in consideration of the conspicuousness of the boundary.

Further, although the shape of the refraction object OB10 is set so that the display area when the refraction object OB10 is projected in parallel is larger than the distortion area PE1, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display area may be the distortion area PE1. The shape of the refraction object OB10 may be set so as to match. In this case, when the refraction object OB10 is deformed, the vertex coordinates forming the outer edge of the refraction object OB10 may be displaced.

Further, in the above-described configuration, the background image appears to fluctuate by alternately using the first coordinate mapping data MD1 and the second coordinate mapping data MD2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the distortion gradually increases. It may be configured to execute an effect that becomes smaller or smaller and an effect that combines these effects.

In the above configuration, the target of distortion is a part of the background image, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the entire background image may be distorted. In this case, a refraction object capable of covering the entire display surface G is provided, and the drawing data of the background image stored in the background buffer is pasted onto the refraction object as it is.

Further, the present invention is not limited to the background image, and may be configured to distort the pattern image, a predetermined character image, or all or part of the image itself displayed on the display surface G. In this case, before executing the process related to the drawing of the refraction object, the drawing data related to the image including the target to be distorted is created in advance, and in the process related to the drawing of the refraction object, based on the above drawing data. A texture to be pasted to the refracting object may be created and pasted.

Further, in the above configuration, the deformation of the refraction object OB10 is realized by using the coordinate mapping data MD1 and MD2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a four-dimensional function (x, y, z, t) is defined, The refraction object OB10 may be deformed by deriving the displacement amount of each vertex in the Z direction based on the four-dimensional function. In this case, it is possible to further reduce the amount of data related to the distortion effect. However, in view of the increase in the processing load of the VDP 135, the complication of the function due to the high-definition distortion, and the like, the configuration using the coordinate mapping data MD1 and MD2 is preferable.

In the above configuration, the refraction object OB10 is deformed by displacing the Z coordinate of each vertex coordinate so that the plate surface of the refraction object OB10 is uneven, but the present invention is not limited to this and, for example, X At least one of the coordinate and the Y coordinate may be displaced. In this case, it is advisable to set the XY coordinates of the vertices so that the vortices are formed by the vertices arranged in a grid. This makes it possible to represent a distorted image by attaching a texture corresponding to each vertex. However, from the viewpoint of processing load, it is better to use only the displacement in the Z direction.

In the above configuration, the drawing data for the background (two-dimensional image data) is first created, and then the drawing data for the effect and the design is created. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As in the above form, each of the background object, the effect object, and the symbol object may be arranged in the world coordinate system, and the drawing data may be created by projecting the object onto the object. In this case, the drawing process may be executed twice. Specifically, in the first time, each drawing data is created by arranging and projecting each object except the refraction object OB10, and in the second time, each object including the refraction object OB10 is arranged and projected to obtain each drawing data. To create. In this case, in the second drawing process, the texture to be attached to the refraction object OB10 is created using the background drawing data created in the first drawing process. This allows a part of the background image to be used as a texture. However, in the case of the above configuration, since it is necessary to perform the same processing in duplicate, wasteful processing increases, and there is a concern that the processing load will increase. From this point of view, the configuration in which the drawing data for the effect and the drawing are created after the drawing data for the background is first created is superior.

Alternatively, the image to be transformed may be updated. For example, the distortion area PE1 may be sequentially scrolled as the symbol image CP11 is scrolled. In this case, the coordinates of the refraction object OB10 are updated every predetermined update timing (for example, each frame), and the area to be trimmed in the trimming process (step S4802) in the distortion effect mapping process (FIG. 82) is set to the refraction object. It may be changed according to the coordinates of the OB 10. As a result, it is possible to favorably cope with the displacement of the strain region PE1 without increasing the amount of data.

Further, the background image may be displaced while fixing the distorted area PE1. Even in this case, the drawing data for the background relating to the background image is generated for each frame, and the drawing data for the background is used for each frame to generate the texture to be attached to the refraction object OB10. Therefore, the displaced background image can be distorted.

As the displacement of the background image, scrolling of the background image in a predetermined direction can be considered. The scrolling can be realized by moving an object forming the background image or moving a viewpoint.

Further, the configuration in which a part of the image is processed and the display effect is performed may be applied to the configuration related to the two-dimensional display. Specifically, a plurality of types of sprite data are stored in the memory module 133, and drawing data relating to a predetermined image is generated using the sprite data. Then, the drawing data may be stored in a temporary buffer provided in the frame buffer 142, a part of the drawing data may be extracted, and the extracted data may be treated as sprite data. Accordingly, it is possible to perform a display effect of enlarging or reducing a part of the image related to the drawing data, or moving the image in a predetermined direction.

Further, by superimposing the extracted data on another sprite data, it is possible to overwrite the image related to the extracted data.

Further, the texture to be attached to the refraction object OB10 was created by projecting, but the texture is not limited to this, and may be stored in the memory module 133 in advance, for example. However, if attention is paid to the increase in the amount of texture data, the configuration in which the texture is created by projection is preferable.

Further, the refraction object OB10 is a plate-shaped polygon, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a polygon having an arbitrary shape may be used. However, from the viewpoint of processing load, a plate-shaped polygon is preferable.

In the above configuration, the distortion is expressed by alternately switching the deformation mode of the refraction object OB10 between the first deformation mode OB10a and the second deformation mode OB10b, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, two refraction objects OB10 are used. May be provided, and each refraction object OB10 may be transformed into a first modified form OB10a and a second modified form OB10b, and the two may be connected at the short side portion. In this case, it is advisable to scroll the connected objects in a predetermined direction. Even in this case, the fluctuating image can be appropriately displayed.

<Regarding the structure for performing blinking>
Next, a configuration for performing a blink effect will be described.

The blink effect is an effect in which a predetermined character image blinks.

In the blinking effect, a base object OB21 and a base texture TD11 used to display a predetermined character image, and a partial object OB22 and a partial texture TD12 used to change the eye part are used. Each of these configurations will be described with reference to FIG. 85(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the base object OB21 and the partial object OB22, FIG. 85(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the base texture TD11, and FIG. 85(c) is a partial texture TD12. FIG. In order to explain the relationship between the base object OB21 and the partial object OB22, the base object OB21 and the partial object OB22 are shown in an overlapping manner and the partial object OB22 is shown by a dotted line in FIG. 85(a). Further, in order to explain the relationship between the base texture TD11 and the partial texture TD12, the outer shape of the partial texture TD12 is shown by a dotted line in FIG. 85(b).

As shown in FIG. 85(a), the base object OB21 is a one-unit object composed of a plurality of component objects, and by updating the parameters applied to each component object, the movement or change of the character in the 3D image can be achieved. Can be given.

In the base object OB21, the base texture TD11 is set as the texture to be attached to the head object OB31 corresponding to the head of the character. The base texture TD11 is image data in which a face is drawn, as shown in FIG. 85(b). The base texture TD11 is set as rectangular image data corresponding to the head object OB31. Specifically, the base texture TD11 is set corresponding to the image data when the three-dimensional head object OB31 is two-dimensionally developed, and the vertical and horizontal pixels are set to have the same shape as the developed image data. The number is set. By attaching the base texture TD11 to the head object OB31, a face is represented.

Regarding the hairstyle, a hairstyle object OB32 is provided separately from the head object OB31, and a hairstyle texture to be attached to the hairstyle object OB32 is provided. A hairstyle is expressed using these, and the head of the character is expressed by superimposing the hairstyle object OB32 and the head object OB31.

Further, although the base texture TD11 is set as the image data having a rectangular shape, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set as image data having a different shape according to the shape of the head object OB31.

The shape and size of the partial object OB22 are set so that when the partial object OB22 is projected, it is possible to cover the display area of the eyes of the base object OB21. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85A, the partial object OB22 is composed of a rectangular plate-shaped polygon having the same shape as the area where the eyes are displayed in the base object OB21. As a result, the base object OB21 is arranged in the world coordinate system, and the partial object OB22 is arranged between the viewpoint and the base object OB21 so as to overlap the area where the eyes are displayed in the base object OB21. When the parallel projection is performed in, the image of the partial object OB22 is displayed instead of the eyes of the base texture TD11. In this case, a character image having a different aspect of the eyes is displayed on the partial object OB22 by attaching a texture having a different aspect from the eyes of the base texture TD11.

A plurality of types (specifically, three types) of partial textures TD12 are provided as textures to be attached to the partial object OB22.

Explaining the partial texture TD12, the size of the partial texture TD12 is set to be the same as that of the partial object OB22. Specifically, the vertical and horizontal pixel numbers of the partial texture TD12 are set to be the same as the shape of the partial object OB22. It is set. Therefore, the partial texture TD12 is attached to the partial object OB22 without being deformed.

In this case, the number of pixels of the base texture TD11 is set corresponding to the size of the entire head object OB31, and the number of pixels of the partial texture TD12 is set corresponding to the eye part of the head object OB31. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 85B, the partial texture TD12 is smaller in size than the base texture TD11, and the image data has a smaller data amount.

In the partial texture TD12, the first partial texture TD21 (see FIG. 85(c-1)), which is the image data with the eyes open, and the image data in the intermediate state between the state with the eyes open and the state with the eyes closed. The second partial texture TD22 (see FIG. 85(c-2)) and the third partial texture TD23 with closed eyes (see FIG. 85(c-3)) are set. The first partial texture TD21 is a texture in which the same image as the eye portion of the base texture TD11 is drawn.

By sequentially switching the texture to be attached to the partial object OB22 from the first partial texture TD21→the second partial texture TD22→the third partial texture TD23→the second partial texture TD22→the first partial texture TD21 as one cycle, Can be expressed.

A specific processing configuration of the blink effect will be described.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the blink effect calculation process executed by the display CPU 131. The blink effect calculation process is started when the currently set data table corresponds to the blink effect in the effect calculation process in step S904 of the task process (FIG. 14).

First, in step S5001, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not the blinking effect is being performed.

If the blink effect is not being executed, the process advances to step S5002 to determine whether or not it is the start timing of the blink effect, based on the currently set data table.

If it is not the start timing of the blink effect, the present calculation processing is ended as it is, while if it is the start timing of the blink effect, the process proceeds to step S5003 to grasp the base object OB21. Then, in step S5004, address information of various textures to be attached to the base object OB21 including the base texture TD11 is set.

After that, in step S5005, arithmetic processing related to initial setting of other parameters applied to the base object OB21 is performed.

In a succeeding step S5006, the partial object OB22 is grasped. Then, in step S5007, the initial coordinates of the partial object OB22 are set. The initial coordinates are preset in the data table, and specifically, in the base object OB21 when projected (parallel projection) on the front side (viewpoint side) of the base object OB21 when converted to the world coordinate system. It is set to be arranged so as to overlap the area where the eyes are displayed.

Then, in step S5008, the address information of the partial texture TD12 is initialized. Specifically, the address information of the first partial texture TD21 is set. Then, in step S5009, arithmetic processing relating to the initial setting of other parameters is executed.

After that, in step S5010, the blinking effect designation information is set in the drawing list, and the present calculation process ends. The blink effect designation information is information used to specify that the VDP 135 executes the drawing process related to the blink effect.

When such a process is executed, the base object OB21 and the partial object OB22 are set as the drawing targets in the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output process, and the parameters corresponding to the respective objects OB21 and OB22 are set. Is set. In this case, each object OB21, so that the image of the eye of the partial object OB22 and the first partial texture TD21 is displayed so as to overlap the image of the eye of the head object OB31 and the base texture TD11 of the base object OB21 when projected. The coordinates of the OB22 are set. In addition, blink effect designation information is set in the drawing list.

On the other hand, when the blinking effect is being performed, the processing relating to the setting of the base object OB21 is executed in steps S5011 to S5013. Specifically, the base object OB21 is grasped in step S5011, and the addresses of various textures are set in step S5012. Then, in step S5013, calculation processing of other parameters is performed. In this case, a process of maintaining various parameters that have been initialized is executed.

After that, the processing relating to the setting of the partial object OB22 is executed in steps S5014 to S5018. Specifically, first, in step S5014, the partial object OB22 is grasped. Then, in step S5015, it is determined whether it is the update timing of the partial texture TD12 based on the currently set data table. Specifically, in the data table corresponding to the blink effect, information for specifying the update timing of the partial texture TD12 is set for each predetermined number of frames. In step S5015, it is determined whether the above information is set.

If it is not the update timing of the partial texture TD12, the process proceeds to step S5016, and the address information of the previous partial texture TD12 is set. Then, in step S5017, calculation processing of other parameters is executed, and in step S5010, blinking effect designation information is set, and this calculation processing ends.

When such a process is executed, in the subsequent drawing list output process, the same drawing list as the previously created drawing list is created.

On the other hand, if it is the update timing of the partial texture TD12, the flow advances to step S5018 to execute processing for setting address information of the next partial texture with respect to the previous partial texture. Specifically, the order of the partial textures TD21 to TD23 to be attached to the partial object OB22 is preset in the data table corresponding to the blink effect. Specifically, the first partial texture TD21→the second partial texture TD22→the third partial texture→the second partial texture TD22 is set as one cycle. In step S5018, based on the above cycle, the next partial texture is grasped with respect to the partial texture set in the previous drawing list, and the process of setting the address corresponding to the next partial texture is executed.

Then, the processing of step S5017 and step S5010 is executed, and the present arithmetic processing ends.

When such a process is executed, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output process is different from the previously created drawing list in the partial texture TD12 pasted to the partial object OB22. ..

When receiving the drawing list in which the blinking effect designation information is set, the VDP 135 sets the world coordinate system based on the coordinates set in each of the objects OB21 and OB22. Then, various textures including the base texture TD11 are mapped to the base object OB21, the partial texture TD12 set in the drawing list this time is mapped to the partial object OB22, and drawing data creation processing for effects and symbols is performed. At, the respective objects OB21 and OB22 are projected in parallel to create drawing data. As a result, a character image in which the eyes are replaced by the image of the partial texture TD12 is created.

In this case, since the partial texture TD12 different from the previous drawing list is set in the drawing list related to the update timing of the partial texture TD12, the display surface G is compared with the character image displayed by the previous processing. Then, the character images with different eyes are displayed.

Next, the state of the blink effect will be described with reference to FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the blink effect, and specifically, FIG. 87(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an image displayed on the display surface G at the start timing of the blink effect, FIG. (B) and FIG. 87(c) are explanatory views showing changes in the display mode of the character image CP22 in time series. For convenience of explanation, images other than the character image CP22 are omitted, but actually, a background image, a pattern image, and the like are displayed.

When the blink effect is started, as shown in FIG. 87(a), a character image CP22 having a base image CP21 created using various textures including the base object OB21 and the base texture TD11 is displayed. In this case, the first partial image CP23 created using the partial object OB22 and the first partial texture TD21 is displayed in the overlapping region PE2 (specifically, the eye region) in the base image CP21.

As described above, the image of the eye drawn on the first partial texture TD21 is the same as the image of the eye on the base image CP21, and thus the same image as the base image CP21 is actually displayed. Becomes

Then, based on the update timing of the partial texture TD12, as shown in FIG. 87(b), in the overlapping area PE2, the second part created using the partial object OB22 and the second partial texture TD22. The image CP24 is displayed.

Then, based on the next update timing, as shown in FIG. 87(c), in the overlapping area PE2, the third partial image CP25 created using the partial object OB22 and the third partial texture TD23. Is displayed.

As described above, by updating in the order of the first partial image CP23→the second partial image CP24→the third partial image CP25, a state in which the eyes are gradually closed is expressed.

After that, the second partial image CP24→the first partial image CP23 is displayed in the overlapping region PE2 each time the update timing comes.

That is, the character image CP22 is updated by repeatedly updating the images in the order of the first partial image CP23→the second partial image CP24→the third partial image CP25→the second partial image CP24→the first partial image CP23→.... Looks like blinking.

As described above, by arranging the partial object OB22 locally with respect to the eye part of the character image CP22 and updating the partial texture TD12 to be attached to the partial object OB22 at each predetermined update timing, The blink of the character image CP22 can be expressed. In this case, since the partial texture TD12 is a texture of a partial area of the base texture TD11, the amount of data is smaller than that of the base texture TD11. As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of data required to perform the blinking effect, as compared with a configuration in which a plurality of base textures TD11 are prepared.

That is, the base image CP21 is divided into a part to be changed and a part not to be changed, a texture corresponding to only the part to be changed is provided, and the motion of the character image using the texture and the base image CP21. Is configured to express. Thereby, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of textures related to the entire base image CP21, that is, a plurality of base textures TD11. Therefore, it is possible to change a part of the specific character image while reducing the amount of data.

In this case, for example, the head object OB31 is divided into an eye object corresponding to the eye part, a first object corresponding to the part below the eye, and a second object corresponding to the part above the eye. A configuration in which a blink is expressed by changing the texture attached to the eye object is also conceivable. However, in such a configuration, the number of objects to be drawn increases due to the division of the head object OB31, and the number of vertices to be grasped increases. Therefore, there is a concern that the processing load will increase.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to realize blinking with one head object OB31 and one partial object OB22 which is a plate-shaped polygon with a relatively small processing load related to drawing. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load required to perform the blink effect.

Although the blink has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention can be applied to the case where a part of one unit of the individual image is changed. Specifically, the partial objects may be arranged so as to overlap the area to be changed, and the partial texture corresponding to the changed partial image displayed in the area may be pasted to the partial object. For example, the present invention can be applied to the case of changing the mouth and the case of partially changing the pattern of clothes.

Further, when performing the blinking effect, the first partial texture TD21 that is the same as the eye image of the base image CP21 is prepared, and the first partial image CP23 is displayed using the first partial texture TD21. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the first partial texture TD21 may not be prepared. As a result, it is possible to suitably reduce the amount of data required for the blink effect. In this case, the data table corresponding to the blink effect is set with information for specifying that it is the period during which the base image CP21 is displayed as it is, and after execution of the process of step S5013, it is determined whether or not the period is during the period. Execute the judgment process. When it is determined in the determination process that the base image CP21 is being displayed as it is, the calculation process ends without performing the process (steps S5014 to S5017) related to the setting of the partial object OB22. .. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the period during which the base image CP21 is displayed as it is, it may be configured to execute the process related to the setting of the partial object OB22. This makes it possible to divert part of the base image CP21 and perform a blinking effect. However, if attention is paid to the fact that the processing load of the blinking effect calculation processing increases by the processing load related to the determination processing, it is better to prepare the first partial texture TD21 in advance.

In particular, in regular processing, it is generally necessary to design so that processing does not drop even when the maximum load is applied. Therefore, in the case of the above configuration, it is necessary to design so that the processing does not drop even when the determination processing and the processing related to the setting of the partial object OB22 are executed. On the other hand, in the case of the configuration in which the first partial texture TD21 is prepared, the above determination process is not necessary, and a margin can be provided for that amount. As a result, it is possible to achieve a balance between reducing the amount of texture data required for the blinking effect and suppressing the increase in the processing load due to the blinking effect.

Note that the second partial texture TD22 indicating the state of the intermediate mode of blinking is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a partial texture of an intermediate mode is created based on, for example, the first partial texture TD21 and the third partial texture TD23. It may be configured. In this case, it is not necessary to prepare image data related to the intermediate texture of the partial texture, so that the amount of data can be reduced. However, in consideration of the processing load for creating the intermediate texture of the intermediate texture, it is preferable to prepare the intermediate texture of the partial texture in advance.

In the above configuration, the partial object OB22 is provided, and the positional relationship between the base object OB21 and the partial object OB22 is set so that the partial object OB22 overlaps with the base object OB21. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The OB 22 may not be provided. In this case, the partial texture TD12 may be directly overwritten on the eye region of the head object OB31. Specifically, the UV coordinate of the partial texture TD12 is set in association with the vertex corresponding to the eye area of the head object OB31 to which the base texture TD11 is pasted, and the partial texture TD12 is pasted to the eye area. Execute the attaching process. However, since the partial object OB22 is a plate polygon, the number of vertices forming the partial object OB22 tends to be smaller than the number of vertices forming the eye region in the head object OB31. For this reason, the processing load related to mapping is likely to be lighter in the configuration in which the blinking effect is performed using the partial object OB22.

Further, a plurality of types of textures to be attached to the hairstyle object OB32 may be provided, and the textures to be attached to the hairstyle object OB32 may be switched according to the scene.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, you may change as follows. By the way, the configuration of the following different embodiment may be applied individually or in combination with the configuration of the above embodiment.

(1) A configuration in which the image data necessary for creating the drawing data is not read from the memory module 133 at the necessary timing but is read into the VRAM 134 in advance before the necessary timing. May be By performing such pre-reading, it is possible to preferably create drawing data. In particular, when the NAND flash memory is used as the memory module 133, the time required for reading tends to be longer than that of the NOR flash memory. Therefore, the above-described pre-reading configuration is applied to such a configuration. Then it is effective. In addition to or in place of the image data used in the VDP 135, the program or data used in the display CPU 131 may be read in advance.

(2) A rendering buffer into which rendering data for writing is written, and a buffer for symbols in which drawing data for symbols are written are separately provided, and when the final generation data is generated, it is used for the background. The drawing data written in the buffer, the drawing data written in the effect buffer, and the drawing data written in the drawing data may be combined. Instead of this, there is a buffer in which drawing data for the first effect is created and a buffer in which drawing data for the second effect is created, and the drawing data for the first effect is for the background. The drawing data may be combined so that it exists between the drawing data and the drawing data for the design, and the drawing data for the second effect exists on the foreground.

(3) The camera (viewpoint) is set individually for each image data set in the world coordinate system, but instead of this, a single image is set for all image data set in the world coordinate system. The configuration may be such that the cameras are commonly set.

(4) The image data arranged in the world coordinate system is configured to be projected in units of the background image, the effect image, and the pattern image, but may be configured to be collectively projected in the unit of the background image and the effect image. The effect images and the pattern images may be collectively projected, or all of them may be collectively projected.

(5) Hold information related to winning in the upper working opening 23 and hold information related to winning in the lower working opening 24 are stored separately, and the hold information related to winning in the lower working opening 24 is prioritized. A configuration in which the digestion is exhausted may be applied, or conversely, a configuration in which the reservation information related to winning in the upper operation port 23 is preferentially digested may be applied.

Further, in the above configuration, the plurality of operating ports are not arranged side by side in the vertical direction, but the first operating port corresponding to the upper operating port 23 and the second operating port corresponding to the lower operating port 24 are provided on the left and right. The structure may be arranged in parallel, or both of these working ports may be arranged obliquely in parallel. Furthermore, depending on the operation mode of the firing handle 41, both operation ports may be arranged apart from each other so that only the first operation port or only the second operation port can be won.

Further, in the above-mentioned configuration, the main display portion 33 displays the first display area for displaying the result of the judgment of the holding information acquired based on the winning of the upper working opening 23 and the winning of the lower working opening 24. It is also possible to provide a second display area for displaying the result of the determination of whether or not the held information is held. In this case, the variable information of the pattern is displayed in the first display area based on the fact that the hold information acquired based on the winning of the upper working opening 23 is the target of the hit determination or the hit determination. Is started and the stop result corresponding to the win/fail judgment is displayed, and the variation display for one game is ended. In addition, based on the fact that the hold information acquired based on the winning of the lower working opening 24 is the target of the hit determination or the hit determination is performed, the variable display of the pattern is displayed in the second display area. At the same time as the start, the result of stop corresponding to the win/no judgment is displayed, and the variation display of the one game is ended.

(6) Depending on whether the hold information related to winning on the upper working opening 23 is the target of the winning/disabling judgment, or the holding information related to winning on the lower working opening 24 is the target of the winning/failing judgment. The profits obtained may be different. Further, in the configuration in which a plurality of operating ports are provided as in each of the above-described embodiments, the number of operating ports is not limited to two and may be three or more. Further, the configuration may be such that only one operating port is provided.

(7) Instead of the configuration in which the display control devices 70 and 130 are controlled by the sound emission control device 60 based on the command output from the main control device 50, based on the command output from the main control device 50, The display control devices 70 and 130 may control the sound emission control device 60. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 60 and the display control devices 70 and 130 are separately provided, both control devices may be provided as one control device. May be integrated in the main controller 50, or both functions of both controllers may be integrated in the main controller 50. The configuration of the command output from the main control device 50 to the sound emission control device 60 is also arbitrary.

(8) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a big hit is generated, a pachinko machine provided with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball.

In addition, a game machine that is not a ball-ball type, for example, is equipped with a plurality of reels as a plurality of revolving bodies provided with a plurality of types of symbols in the circumferential direction, starts the rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating the start lever, and stops. After the reel is stopped by operating the switch, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window, a slot that gives the player benefits such as payout of medals The present invention can be applied to a machine. In this case, the present invention can be applied to various controls of the slot machine, and in a configuration including a display device such as a liquid crystal display device in addition to the reels, the present invention can be applied to control related to image display in the display control device. Can be applied.

In addition, a pachinko machine and a slot machine that include a take-in device and start rotation of a reel by operating a start lever after a predetermined number of game balls stored in a storage section have been taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine in which

<Regarding invention groups extracted from the above-described embodiment>
The features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in brackets or the like.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display portion (display surface G),
When an image is displayed on the display unit using the generation data (drawing data) generated by the data generation unit (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152), and a predetermined update timing is reached. Display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP 135) for updating the content of the image,
Equipped with
In the gaming machine, the data generating means generates the generated data based on using image data and applying parameter data that determines a display mode of an image based on the image data,
The data generating means,
Derivation means for deriving the parameter data to be applied when displaying an image group including a plurality of individual images on the display unit (function of executing the processing of steps S2204, S2208 and S2212 in VDP135, or step S2305 in VDP135). , Step S2310, step S2317),
Based on using the specific image data in a state where the parameter data derived by the deriving unit is applied to the specific image data (particle dispersion object PC17), the generated data for displaying the image group on the display unit is displayed. Image group means that enables generation (a function of executing the processing of steps S2206, S2210 and S2214 in the VDP 135, or a function of executing the processing of steps S2307, S2313 and S2319 in the VDP 135),
Equipped with
The deriving unit determines the first parameter data (for example, the first key data KD1) to be applied when displaying the image group at the first update timing and the second update timing that is later than the first update timing. By using the second parameter data (for example, the second key data KD2) that is applied when the image group is displayed with the image group, the image group is displayed at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing. A gaming machine provided with a specific derivation means for deriving specific parameter data applied when displaying (a function of executing the process of step S2208 in the VDP 135 or a function of executing the process of step S2310 in the VDP 135). .

According to the characteristic A1, by displaying the image group including the plurality of individual images, the display content can be complicated and the player's interest in the image displayed on the display unit can be increased. Become.

In this case, since the specific parameter data at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing is derived using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, the specific parameter data It is possible to reduce the data capacity in that it is not necessary to store in advance, and it is possible to ensure continuity with respect to each of the first parameter data and the second parameter data.

Furthermore, the parameter data for displaying a plurality of individual images included in the image group at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing is the first parameter data and the second parameter as the specific parameter data. It is collectively derived using data and. As a result, parameter data to be referred to when deriving the parameter data corresponds to the same update timing among the plurality of individual images included in the image group. Therefore, the processing load in deriving the specific parameter data can be reduced.

Feature A2. The image group includes a first individual image (for example, a single particle image PT1) and a second individual image (for example, a single particle image PT2),
The first parameter data includes parameter data applied when displaying the first individual image and parameter data applied when displaying the second individual image,
The second parameter data includes parameter data applied when displaying the first individual image and parameter data applied when displaying the second individual image,
The specific derivation means applies the parameter data applied when displaying the first individual image and the second individual image using the first parameter data and the second parameter data. The game machine according to Feature A1, wherein the specific parameter data including the parameter data to be derived is derived.

According to the characteristic A2, each of the first parameter data, the second parameter data, and the specific parameter data has parameter data corresponding to each of the first individual image and the second individual image included in the image group. Become. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the parameter data for displaying the plurality of individual images included in the image group at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing is collectively derived as the specific parameter data, When the display mode of the first individual image and the second individual image is changed with the progress of, it is possible to make the changing mode correspond to each individual image.

Features A3. The specific deriving means derives the specific parameter data by blending the first parameter data and the second parameter data at a predetermined ratio. A game according to the feature A1 or A2. Machine.

According to the characteristic A3, it is possible to derive the specific parameter data while using the first parameter data and the second parameter data as they are.

Features A4. The image group includes a first individual image and a second individual image,
The first parameter data includes parameter data applied when displaying the first individual image and parameter data applied when displaying the second individual image,
The second parameter data includes parameter data applied when displaying the first individual image and parameter data applied when displaying the second individual image,
The specific derivation means,
A first specific parameter data applied when the first individual image is displayed and the second individual image applied by using the first parameter data and the second parameter data; 2 is for deriving the specific parameter data including the specific parameter data,
And, when deriving the specific parameter data at a specific update timing, the predetermined ratio when deriving the first specific parameter data and the predetermined ratio when deriving the second specific parameter data. The gaming machine according to feature A3, wherein and are the same.

According to the characteristic A4, each of the first parameter data, the second parameter data, and the specific parameter data has parameter data corresponding to each of the first individual image and the second individual image included in the image group. Become. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the parameter data for displaying the plurality of individual images included in the image group at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing is collectively derived as the specific parameter data, When the display mode of the first individual image and the second individual image is changed with the progress of, it is possible to make the changing mode correspond to each individual image.

Further, in the configuration for deriving the specific parameter data so as to include each parameter data corresponding to each individual image as described above, a predetermined ratio used when deriving the first specific parameter data corresponding to the first individual image, The predetermined ratio used when deriving the second specific parameter data corresponding to the second individual image is the same. As a result, it becomes possible to commonly use the information of a predetermined ratio, and the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the predetermined ratio is different.

Features A5. Between the first update timing and the second update timing, there are a plurality of update timings for changing the display mode of the image group,
The specific derivation means is configured to set the first parameter data and the second parameter at each of a plurality of update timings at which the display mode of the image group is changed between the first update timing and the second update timing. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the specific parameter data is derived using data.

According to the characteristic A5, instead of using the same specific parameter data at each of the plurality of update timings included between the first update timing and the second update timing, the specific parameter data is individually provided at each update timing. Is derived, it is possible to derive the parameter data such that the first parameter data gradually approaches the second parameter data. As a result, the player can visually recognize the display mode of the image group as a series.

Further, since the parameter data used at each of the plurality of update timings is derived by using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, the data capacity is larger than that of the configuration in which the parameter data is stored in advance. Can be reduced. Furthermore, since the plurality of parameter data are all derived using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, the type of parameter data to be referred to when deriving the plurality of parameter data is changed. No need arises. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

Features A6. The specific derivation means derives the specific parameter data by blending the first parameter data and the second parameter data at a predetermined ratio,
The data generation means determines a predetermined ratio in the case of blending the first parameter data and the second parameter data at each of the plurality of update timings, a ratio determination means (processing of step S2109 in the display CPU 131). Or a function of executing the process of step S2309 in the VDP 135),
The ratio determining means determines the change amount of the predetermined ratio when one update timing is changed to the next update timing in the plurality of update timings, and when the next update timing is further changed from the next update timing. The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein the determination is made so that the amount of change in the predetermined ratio is the same.

According to the characteristic A6, at each of the plurality of update timings between the first update timing and the second update timing, it is only necessary to change the predetermined ratio with a constant change amount, so the predetermined ratio is changed. The above configuration can be simplified.

Features A7. A drawing instruction means (display CPU 131) for outputting drawing instruction information (drawing list) including at least information for specifying image data and parameter data applied to the image data is necessary to display an image at one update timing. ,
The display control means causes an image to be displayed according to the information instructed by the drawing instructing means,
The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, wherein the display control means includes the specific derivation means.

According to the characteristic A7, since it is not necessary to derive the specific parameter data on the drawing instruction means side, the processing load of the drawing instruction means can be reduced.

Feature A8. Any one of features A1 to A7, wherein the first parameter data, the second parameter data, and the specific parameter data include coordinate information for determining a position at which the image group is displayed. Gaming machine described in.

According to the characteristic A8, it is possible to display an image in which the position of each individual image included in the image group is changing while exhibiting the excellent effect described above.

Feature A9. The coordinate information corresponding to the specific parameter data is the position of each individual image included in the image group on a virtual straight line connecting the position determined by the first parameter data and the position determined by the second parameter data. The gaming machine according to Feature A8, which is coordinate information to be set.

According to the characteristic A9, when the image group is displayed as if it is moving from the position determined by the first parameter data to the position determined by the second parameter data, the image group is moved on the straight line connecting these two positions. Since it is only necessary to derive the specific parameter data, it is possible to reduce the processing load when deriving the specific parameter data using the first parameter data and the second parameter data.

Feature A10. The game according to any one of features A1 to A9, wherein the deriving unit derives the first parameter data and the second parameter data by reading them from a storage unit (memory module 133). Machine.

According to the characteristic A10, it is only necessary to read and use the first parameter data at the first update timing, and to read and use the second parameter data at the second update timing, which reduces the processing load at those update timings. Be done. On the other hand, at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing, the specific parameter data only has to be derived using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, so that only the parameter data is stored. The amount of data to store can be reduced. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to perform display using the image group while balancing both the data capacity and the processing load.

Features A11. The data generating unit arranges image data of an object, which is three-dimensional information, in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing the processes of steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. Viewpoint setting means (a function of executing the processing of step S1006 in the VDP 135) for setting the image data of the object on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and based on the data projected on the projection plane. And a setting unit for drawing (a function of executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135) for generating the generated data,
The specific image data corresponds to image data of an object, and each of the plurality of individual images included in the image group corresponds to each vertex data of the image data of the object. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A10.

According to the characteristic A11, in the configuration that enables realistic image display using three-dimensional information, one object may be arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space when displaying the image group, so that the processing load is reduced. However, it becomes possible to display the image group.

Feature A12. The arranging means draws drawing instruction information (drawing list) including at least information for specifying image data required to display an image at one update timing and parameter data to be applied to the image data. ), the image data is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space in accordance with the information instructed by the drawing instruction information, whereby generation data corresponding to the drawing instruction information can be generated. Is to
The drawing instruction means, when displaying the image group, includes use instruction information of the specific image data in the drawing instruction information,
When the drawing instruction information includes use instruction information of the specific image data, the arranging unit arranges the specific image data in the virtual three-dimensional space to generate the generated data for displaying the image group. The gaming machine according to feature A11, which enables generation.

According to the characteristic A12, when the image group is displayed, the drawing instruction means only needs to include the use instruction information for one object in the drawing instruction information, so that the processing load required for setting the drawing instruction information can be reduced. At the same time, the data capacity of the drawing instruction information can be reduced.

Feature A13. Arrangement means for arranging image data of an object, which is three-dimensional information, in the virtual three-dimensional space (function of executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. (The function of executing the process of step S1006 in the VDP 135) and the image data of the object are projected on the projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and the generated data (drawing data is drawn based on the data projected on the projection plane). ) For generating the drawing (the function of executing the processing of step S1010 to step S1012 in the VDP 135), and the generated data generated by the data generating means (the display CPU 131, the geometry calculation unit 151, and the rendering unit 152). Storage means (frame buffer 142) for storing;
Display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP135) for outputting and displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display means (symbol display device 31),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The data generation unit derives parameter data to be applied when displaying an image group including a plurality of individual images on the display unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S2204, S2208, and S2212 in the VDP 135). Or step S2305, step S2310, step S2317) in the VDP 135,
The arranging means uses the specific image data in a state in which the parameter data derived by the deriving means is applied to the specific image data (particle dispersion object PC17), and the image group is displayed on the display unit. Image group means capable of generating generated data to be displayed (function of executing the processing of step S2206, step S2210 and step S2214 in VDP135, or function of executing the processing of step S2307, step S2313 and step S2319 in VDP135) When,
Equipped with
The deriving unit determines the first parameter data (for example, the first key data KD1) to be applied when displaying the image group at the first update timing and the second update timing that is later than the first update timing. By using the second parameter data (for example, the second key data KD2) that is applied when the image group is displayed with the image group, the image group is displayed at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing. A gaming machine provided with a specific derivation means for deriving specific parameter data applied when displaying (a function of executing the process of step S2208 in the VDP 135 or a function of executing the process of step S2310 in the VDP 135). .

According to the feature A13, it is possible to display a realistic image using three-dimensional information, and it is possible to complicate the display content by displaying an image group including a plurality of individual images. Therefore, the player's interest in the image displayed on the display unit can be increased.

In this case, since the specific parameter data at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing is derived using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, the specific parameter data It is possible to reduce the data capacity in that it is not necessary to store in advance, and it is possible to ensure continuity with respect to each of the first parameter data and the second parameter data.

Furthermore, the parameter data for displaying a plurality of individual images included in the image group at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing is the first parameter data and the second parameter as the specific parameter data. It is collectively derived using data and. As a result, parameter data to be referred to when deriving the parameter data corresponds to the same update timing among the plurality of individual images included in the image group. Therefore, the processing load in deriving the specific parameter data can be reduced.

Features A14. Arrangement means for arranging the image data of the object, which is three-dimensional information, in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and viewpoint setting means for setting the viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. (The function of executing the process of step S1006 in the VDP 135) and the image data of the object are projected on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and generated data is generated based on the data projected on the projection plane. The generation data (drawing data) generated by the data generation unit (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152) having a setting unit for drawing (a function of executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135). Storage means (frame buffer 142) for storing;
Display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP135) for outputting and displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display means (symbol display device 31),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means is configured to simultaneously display an image group including a plurality of individual images by using specific generated data,
In the image data arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space by the arranging means to display the image group, each of the plurality of individual images included in the image group is specified to be associated with each vertex data. A game machine characterized by being image data of an object (particle-dispersion object PC 17).

According to the feature A14, it is possible to display a realistic image using three-dimensional information. In this case, when displaying the image group, since one object may be arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, it is possible to display the image group while reducing the processing load.

Feature A15. The arranging means draws drawing instruction information (drawing list) including at least information for specifying image data required to display an image at one update timing and parameter data to be applied to the image data. ), the image data is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space in accordance with the information instructed by the drawing instruction information, whereby generation data corresponding to the drawing instruction information can be generated. Is to
The drawing instruction means, when displaying the image group, includes use instruction information of image data of the specific object in the drawing instruction information,
When the drawing instruction information includes use instruction information of image data of the specific object, the arrangement unit displays the image group by arranging the image data of the specific object in the virtual three-dimensional space. The gaming machine according to feature A14, characterized in that it enables generation of generated data.

According to the characteristic A15, when the image group is displayed, the drawing instruction means only needs to include the use instruction information for one object in the drawing instruction information. Therefore, the processing load required for setting the drawing instruction information can be reduced. At the same time, the data capacity of the drawing instruction information can be reduced.

The invention of the characteristic group A is effective for the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. As these game machines, those provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In the gaming machine, a memory in which image data is stored in advance is installed, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device by using the image data read from the memory. Becomes

The case in which an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been done. Further, by reading the image data, generated data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is generated in the storage means such as the VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display unit.

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon that is three-dimensional image data is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture that is two-dimensional image data such as a character or a pattern is attached to the polygon. Generated data is generated by projecting a polygon to which a texture is attached onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the generated data, so that a stereoscopic image is displayed.

Here, by making the display direction of the individual images complicated or by displaying a plurality of individual images at the same time, it is considered possible to increase the player's interest in the images displayed on the display unit. However, when such an image is displayed, it is not preferable that the processing load extremely increases or the data capacity extremely increases.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably performing a display effect while suppressing a processing load.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Arrangement means for arranging image data of an object, which is three-dimensional information, in the virtual three-dimensional space (function of executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. (The function of executing the process of step S1006 in the VDP 135) and the image data of the object are projected on the projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and the generated data (drawing data is drawn based on the data projected on the projection plane). ) For generating the drawing (the function of executing the processing of step S1010 to step S1012 in the VDP 135), and the generated data generated by the data generating means (the display CPU 131, the geometry calculation unit 151, and the rendering unit 152). Storage means (frame buffer 142) for storing;
An image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage unit is displayed on the display unit (symbol display device 31), and the content of the image is updated at a predetermined update timing (of the VDP 135). Display circuit 155),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The image data of the object to be arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space by the arrangement means has data capable of defining a plurality of surfaces, and the three-dimensional shape is formed by the plurality of surface data (surface data SD). The image data of the multi-sided object (sea surface object PC19) capable of defining
The data generating means,
When the image data of the polyhedral object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space so as to display the polyhedral image corresponding to the image data of the polyhedral object over a plurality of update timings, the display mode of the polyhedral image is changed. Arrangement mode changing means for changing the arrangement mode of at least a part of the plurality of surface data in the virtual three-dimensional space (function of executing arithmetic processing for sea surface display in the display CPU 131, sea surface display in the VDP 135) Function that executes the setting process of
At least one of the multi-plane images is obtained by changing the color information applied to the plane data whose layout mode has been changed by the layout mode changing unit in the plane data unit according to the layout mode of the plane data. Display color changing means (a function of executing color information setting processing for sea surface display in the VDP 135) capable of displaying an image in which the display color of the partial area is different between a plurality of update timings,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature B1, the arrangement mode of at least a part of the plurality of surface data is changed, and the color information applied to the surface data whose arrangement mode is changed is changed according to the change of the arrangement mode. To be done. As a result, the display effect can be complicated, and the player's interest in the display effect can be increased.

Further, the change of the color information is performed in the unit of surface data according to the arrangement mode of the surface data. As a result, it is possible to set the color information according to the arrangement mode of the surface data without storing a large number of textures in advance corresponding to the pattern in which the color information is changed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the display effect while suppressing an increase in the data capacity.

It should be noted that the configuration that “the arrangement mode changing unit changes at least one of the orientation, the shape, and the size of at least a part of the plurality of surface data when changing the arrangement mode” is the above-mentioned configuration. included.

Feature B2. The arrangement mode changing means changes the arrangement mode of a part of the surface data among the plurality of surface data, and makes the arrangement mode of another surface data correspond to the change of the arrangement mode for the partial surface data. (A function for executing normal line parameter setting processing in the VDP 135) The gaming machine described in the characteristic B1.

According to the feature B2, it is possible to individually control the arrangement mode of the surface data while preventing the continuity between the respective surface data from being lost.

Feature B3. The arrangement mode changing unit changes a predetermined parameter that is at least one of orientation, shape, and size for discontinuous surface data (applicable surface data SD1) in which corresponding areas in the multi-plane image are not continuous with each other. And means for associating the predetermined parameter of the surface data (buffer surface data SD2) in which the corresponding area in the multi-plane image is continuous with the area corresponding to the non-continuous surface data, to the non-continuous surface data The gaming machine described in the feature B1 or B2, which is provided with (a function of executing a normal parameter setting process in the VDP 135).

According to the feature B3, it is possible to individually control the arrangement mode of the surface data while preventing the continuity between the surface data from being lost. In particular, the target for which the arrangement mode is positively changed is discontinuous surface data, and for surface data continuous to the discontinuous surface data, such separation is performed by associating with the discontinuous surface data. Compared with the configuration in which the arrangement mode is changed without performing the arrangement, the processing load required for the adjustment for ensuring the continuity between the pieces of surface data can be reduced.

In addition, as a more specific configuration of the above feature B3,
"Each surface data is defined by a plurality of vertex data, and a plurality of predetermined surface data share some vertex data mutually,
The arrangement mode changing unit changes a predetermined parameter, which is at least one of orientation, shape, and size, of the surface data (surface data SD1 to be applied) that does not share the vertex data with each other, and changes them. A means for associating the predetermined parameter of the surface data (buffer surface data SD2) sharing the vertex data with the target surface data with the target surface data to be changed (normal parameter setting processing in the VDP 135). It has a function to execute.”
The configuration is conceivable.

Feature B4. Each of the surface data is defined by a plurality of vertex data, and further, the predetermined plurality of surface data share some vertex data with each other,
The arrangement mode changing unit changes at least one of the orientation, shape and size of each surface data by individually changing the coordinates of each vertex data. A gaming machine described in B2.

According to the feature B4, it is possible to change at least one of the orientation, shape, and size of the plurality of surface data by changing the coordinates of one vertex data. By controlling the parameters in units of vertex data instead of controlling them in units of face data in this way, even if the processing configuration for ensuring continuity between face data is not set, It is possible to individually control the arrangement mode.

Feature B5. The arrangement mode changing means,
Data for reading individual control data (first normal map data ND1 and second normal map data ND2) capable of individually changing each arrangement mode of the plurality of surface data from the storage unit (memory module 133) Reading means (a function of executing step S2503 in the VDP 135);
Application changing means for changing the mode of applying the individual control data to the image data of the multifaceted object among the plurality of update timings (function of executing the processing of steps S2506, S2507, S2511, and S2512 in the VDP 135) )When,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B4, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the feature B5, in the configuration in which the arrangement mode of the plane data is changed by using the previously stored individual control data, the display state of the multi-plane image is changed between the plurality of update timings while using the individual control data. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described while balancing both the data capacity and the processing load.

Feature B6. The individual control data has a plurality of unit control data (unit normal data UND), and these unit control data are applied to the surface data or data defining the surface data,
The application changing unit changes the correspondence between the target data to which the unit control data is applied in the image data of the multi-faced object and the unit control data in accordance with the switching of the update timing (in the VDP 135). The gaming machine according to feature B5, which is provided with a function of executing the processes of steps S2506, S2507, S2511, and S2512.

According to the feature B6, the display mode of the multiface image is changed between a plurality of update timings by switching the correspondence between the target data to which the unit control data is applied and the unit control data. It is possible to reduce the processing load in the configuration in which the display mode of the multifaceted image is changed while using the.

Feature B7. The application changing unit reflects a plurality of contents of the unit control data to one piece of data to which the unit control data is applied in the image data of the multifaceted object (steps S2506 and S2507 in the VDP 135). , A function of executing the processing of step S2511 and step S2512) is provided, the gaming machine according to the characteristic B5 or B6.

According to the feature B7, in the configuration in which the arrangement mode is changed with reference to the unit control data, the changed arrangement mode can be diversified.

Feature B8. The individual control data has a plurality of unit control data (unit normal data UND), and these unit control data are applied to the surface data or data defining the surface data,
The data reading means reads a plurality of the individual control data from the storage means,
The application changing means,
A plurality of applying means for reflecting the contents of each unit control data of the plurality of individual control data to one piece of data to which the unit control data is applied in the image data of the multifaceted object (step S2507 and step in VDP135) Function for executing the processing of S2512),
In the image data of the multi-sided object, the correspondence between the target data to which the unit control data is applied and the unit control data is changed along with the switching of update timing, and the change in the correspondence is changed to the plurality of individual control data. A corresponding relationship changing unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S2506 and S2511 in the VDP 135) for each of
The gaming machine according to the feature B5 or B6, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the feature B8, it becomes possible to change the arrangement mode in a complicated manner while facilitating the design of the individual control data at the game machine designing stage.

Feature B9. The arrangement mode changing means,
A first changing unit (a function of executing arithmetic processing for displaying the sea level in the display CPU 131, a function of executing steps S2504 and S2509 in the VDP 135) that collectively changes the arrangement mode of a group of data including the plurality of surface data. ,
Second changing means (steps S2506, S2507, S2511 and step S2512 of VDP135) for individually changing the arrangement manner of each surface data included in the group of data whose arrangement manner is changed by the first changing means. Function to execute)
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B8, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature B9, it is possible to change the arrangement mode in a unit of surface data in a complicated manner while changing the arrangement mode along a large flow.

In addition, as a more specific configuration that produces such an operation effect, "the type of arrangement mode changed by the first changing unit is at least one of position, orientation, and size, and the second change It is conceivable that the type of arrangement mode changed by the means includes at least a part of the type of arrangement target changed by the first changing means.

Further, the configuration is such that "the image data of the multi-sided object includes a plurality of the one group of data, and the first changing unit individually changes the arrangement mode of the plurality of one group of data". Conceivable.

Feature B10. The display color changing means,
Classification specifying means for specifying whether or not the color information to be applied to the surface data is included in a predetermined classification according to the layout mode changed by the layout mode changing means (steps S2702 to S2702-VDP135) Function to execute S2705),
Color information to be applied to the surface data identified as being included in the predetermined segment by the segment identification means is selected from a plurality of stages of color information based on a parameter of a type different from the arrangement mode. Selection means (function of executing steps S2706 and S2707 in the VDP 135),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B9, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature B10, while changing the color information according to the arrangement mode, the color information is determined based on the parameter different from the arrangement mode, so that the color information can be set in a complicated manner. This makes it possible to realize a realistic image display.

Feature B11. The arrangement mode changing means changes at least the direction of the surface data,
The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, wherein the display color changing unit changes color information applied to the surface data based on an angle of the surface data with respect to the viewpoint. ..

According to the feature B11, it is possible to set the color information according to the orientation of the surface, and it is possible to realistically display the multifaceted image.

Feature B12. The display color changing means,
According to the orientation of the surface data changed by the arrangement mode changing means, a section specifying means (step S2702 in VDP135) for specifying whether or not the color information applied to the surface data is included in a predetermined section. A function of executing step S2705),
Color information selection for selecting color information to be applied to the surface data identified as being included in the predetermined segment by the segment identification means from a plurality of levels of color information based on a parameter of a type different from the orientation. Means (function of executing steps S2706 and S2707 in the VDP 135),
A gaming machine according to feature B11, which is provided with.

According to the characteristic B12, while changing the color information according to the orientation of the surface, the color information is determined based on the parameter different from the orientation of the surface, so that the color information can be set in a complicated manner. As a result, it becomes possible to display a multi-faced image realistically.

Feature B13. The color information selecting unit applies color information to the surface data identified as included in the predetermined segment by the segment identifying unit, based on a distance in a predetermined direction from the viewpoint, in a plurality of stages of color information. The gaming machine according to feature B12, which is selected from the inside.

According to the feature B13, since the color information changes not only according to the orientation of the surface but also according to the position of the surface, it is possible to display the multi-faced image realistically.

The invention of the characteristic group B is effective for the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. As these game machines, those provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In the gaming machine, a memory in which image data is stored in advance is installed, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device by using the image data read from the memory. Becomes

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When the display is performed, an object that is three-dimensional image data is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture that is two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns is attached to the object. Generated data is generated by projecting the object to which the texture is pasted onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the generated data, so that a stereoscopic image is displayed.

Here, in order to increase the player's interest in the display effect, it is preferable to further improve the display effect. On the other hand, in order to further improve the display effect, it is not preferable that the data capacity extremely increases.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display portion (display surface G),
When an image is displayed on the display unit using the generation data (drawing data) generated by the data generation unit (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152), and a predetermined update timing is reached. Display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP 135) for updating the content of the image,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display mode of the image on the display unit includes a mode in which a plurality of individual images are displayed so that the player recognizes that the plurality of individual images are displayed in a positional relationship shifted in the depth direction of the display unit. ,
The data generating means is an individual image displayed so as to be recognized by the player as being present on the front side in the depth direction with respect to a predetermined reference position in the depth direction, and the back side in the depth direction. The target individual image, which is at least one of the individual images displayed so as to be recognized by the player as being present in the outline, is more detailed than the image recognized by the player as being present in the reference position. A game machine provided with a blurring setting means (a function of executing adjustment processing for focus effect in the VDP 135) that causes a line to be displayed in a blurred state by making the line unclear.

According to the characteristic C1, it is possible to perform a display effect as if the reference position is in focus, and it is possible to perform a display effect with a sense of depth.

Feature C2. The data generating unit is configured to generate the generated data based on setting image data, and further set the image data while applying a depth parameter corresponding to a display position in the depth direction. Based on the configuration, the player recognizes that the plurality of individual images are displayed in a positional relationship shifted in the depth direction,
The generated data has a large number of unit data in which color information is set,
The blur setting means,
Parameter deriving means for deriving the depth parameter for each piece of data that corresponds to the image data set in the setting storage means and that causes the unit data (steps S3101 to S3107 in the VDP 135 are executed. Function)
By executing the blurring generation process on the data whose depth parameter does not correspond to the reference parameter corresponding to the reference position, blurring is performed so that the image portion corresponding to the data is displayed in a blurred state. Means (function of executing steps S3110 to S3115 in the VDP 135),
The gaming machine described in the feature C1, which is provided with.

According to the characteristic C2, since it is not necessary to store the image data for making the blurred state in advance, it is possible to perform the display in the blurred state while reducing the data capacity. Further, since the depth parameter is derived for each piece of data that causes each unit data, it is possible to finely control the display in a blurred state.

Feature C3. As the display effect in the display means, a blurring display effect in which the display in the blurred state is performed over a plurality of update timings is included,
The gaming machine according to Feature C2, wherein the parameter deriving unit derives the depth parameter at each of one update timing and one update timing of the blurred display effect. .

According to the characteristic C3, it is possible to change the display in a blurred state according to the progress of the display effect.

Feature C4. The data generating unit arranges image data of an object, which is three-dimensional information, in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. Viewpoint setting means (a function of executing the process of step S1006 in the VDP 135) for setting the image data of the object on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and the two-dimensional information projected on the projection plane. And a drawing setting means (function of executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135) for generating generated data that is two-dimensional information based on the data of
The parameter deriving unit derives the depth parameter for each unit data included in the data of the two-dimensional information after projection.
The game machine according to the feature C2 or C3, wherein the blurring execution means executes the blurring generation process on the data of the two-dimensional information after projection by using the depth parameter. .

According to the characteristic C4, since the derivation of the depth parameter and the blurring generation process are performed not on the data of the three-dimensional information but on the data of the two-dimensional information, the processing load is reduced. However, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects.

Feature C5. As the blurring generation processing, the blurring executing unit blends the color information of the unit data included in the two-dimensional information data after projection with the color information of the surrounding unit data (steps S3206 and S3212 in the VDP 135). And the function of executing step S3217), the gaming machine according to feature C4.

According to the characteristic C5, since the blending process is executed when the blurring occurs, the blurred state can be displayed according to the type of the image displayed in the blurred display effect. Therefore, it is possible to preferably display the blurred state. In this case, since the blending process is performed not for the three-dimensional information data but for the two-dimensional information data, the blurred display is performed while reducing the processing load. Can be suitably performed.

Feature C6. The data generating unit arranges image data of an object, which is three-dimensional information, in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. Viewpoint setting means (a function of executing the process of step S1006 in the VDP 135) for setting the image data of the object on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and the two-dimensional information projected on the projection plane. And a drawing setting means (function of executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135) for generating generated data that is two-dimensional information based on the data of
The blur setting unit is configured to display the target individual image in a blurred state by executing a blur generation process on the two-dimensional information data after projection. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C5.

According to the characteristic C6, the blurring generation process is performed not on the data of the three-dimensional information but on the data of the two-dimensional information, and thus the processing load is reduced and It becomes possible to exert an excellent effect.

Feature C7. When performing the display in the blurred state, the blur setting unit exists in a position displaced in the depth direction with respect to the reference position for the special images (teaching individual images CH15 and CH16). The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C6, wherein the gaming machine is excluded from the display target in the blurred state even if it is displayed so as to be recognized by the player.

According to the characteristic C7, when performing the display in the blurred state, the display in the uniformly blurred state is applied to the individual image displayed so as to be present at the position displaced from the reference position. Attempting to do so may make it difficult for the player to recognize the information to be recognized. On the other hand, the special image is excluded from the display target in the blurred state regardless of whether or not the special image is displayed at the reference position. It is possible to realize the display in a blurred state while suppressing the occurrence of.

The special image includes a teaching image used for teaching the player the game situation.

Feature C8. The gaming machine according to Feature C7, wherein the special image is an image displayed so as to be recognized by a player as being present on the front side in the depth direction with respect to the reference position.

According to the characteristic C8, in the configuration in which the special image is excluded from the display target in the blurred state, the player can easily recognize that the special image is intentionally excluded. Therefore, it is possible to exclude the special image from the display target in the blurred state without giving an uncomfortable feeling to the display effect in the blurred state.

Feature C9. An operation receiving means (production operation device 48) for receiving an operation by a player is provided,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the blurring setting unit changes the reference position based on a player's operation on the operation receiving unit.

According to the characteristic C9, it is possible to suppress the uniformization of the display effect in the blurred state and increase the attention degree to the display effect.

Feature C10. The blurring setting means does not display the blurred state during a predetermined first display period (game time), and the processing load of the processing excluding the processing required to display the blurred state is the first display. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9, characterized in that the blurred state is displayed in a second display period (round game) lower than the period.

According to the characteristic C10, it is possible to prevent the processing load of the update timing from being extremely increased when displaying the blurred state.

Feature C11. The data generating means is for generating the generated data based on setting image data,
The blur setting unit blends at least a part of color information determined by the image data with surrounding color information so that the target individual image is displayed in a blurred state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C10.

According to the characteristic C11, since the blending process is executed when the blurring occurs, it is possible to display the blurred state according to the type of the image displayed in the display effect of the blurred state. Therefore, it is possible to preferably display the blurred state.

Feature C12. The data generating unit is configured to generate the generated data based on setting image data, and further set the image data while applying a depth parameter corresponding to a display position in the depth direction. Based on the configuration, the player recognizes that the plurality of individual images are displayed in a positional relationship shifted in the depth direction,
The blur setting unit performs blur generation processing on image data whose depth parameter does not correspond to a reference parameter corresponding to the reference position, thereby blurring the target individual image corresponding to the image data. To be displayed in the state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C11, wherein the reference parameter has a predetermined parameter range so that the reference position corresponds to a predetermined range in the depth direction.

According to the characteristic C12, it is possible to display a blurred state with the depth of field widened to some extent. Therefore, it is possible to suitably display the blurred state.

Feature C13. The blurring setting means is present at a position farther in the depth direction than the image recognized by the player as being at a position away from the reference position in the depth direction by a predetermined distance. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C12, characterized in that the image recognized by the player is displayed more in the blurred state.

According to the characteristic C13, it is possible to more realistically display a blurred state.

Feature C14. Arrangement means for arranging image data of an object, which is three-dimensional information, in the virtual three-dimensional space (function of executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. (The function of executing the process of step S1006 in the VDP 135) and the image data of the object are projected on the projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and the generated data (drawing data is drawn based on the data projected on the projection plane). ) For generating the drawing (the function of executing the processing of step S1010 to step S1012 in the VDP 135), and the generated data generated by the data generating means (the display CPU 131, the geometry calculation unit 151, and the rendering unit 152). Storage means (frame buffer 142) for storing;
Display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP135) for outputting and displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display means (symbol display device 31),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display mode of the image on the display unit includes a mode in which a plurality of individual images are displayed so that the player recognizes that the plurality of individual images are displayed in a positional relationship shifted in the depth direction of the display unit. ,
The data generating means is an individual image displayed so as to be recognized by the player as being present on the front side in the depth direction with respect to a predetermined reference position in the depth direction, and the back side in the depth direction. The target individual image, which is at least one of the individual images displayed so as to be recognized by the player as being present in the outline, is more detailed than the image recognized by the player as being present in the reference position. A game machine provided with a blurring setting means (a function of executing adjustment processing for focus effect in the VDP 135) that causes a line to be displayed in a blurred state by making the line unclear.

According to the characteristic C14, it is possible to perform a display effect as if the reference position is in focus, and it is possible to perform a display effect with a sense of depth.

The invention of the characteristic group C is effective for the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. As these game machines, those provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In the gaming machine, a memory in which image data is stored in advance is installed, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device by using the image data read from the memory. Becomes

The case in which an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been done. Further, by reading the image data, generated data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is generated in the storage means such as the VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display unit.

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When the display is performed, an object that is three-dimensional image data is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture that is two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns is attached to the object. Drawing data is created by projecting the object with the texture pasted onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, so that a stereoscopic image is displayed.

Here, in order to increase the attention of the player to the display effect, it is preferable to perform more realistic image display, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display portion (display surface G),
When an image is displayed on the display unit using the generation data (drawing data) generated by the data generation unit (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152), and a predetermined update timing is reached. Display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP 135) for updating the content of the image,
Equipped with
In the gaming machine, the data generating means generates the generated data based on using image data and applying parameter data that determines a display mode of an image based on the image data,
The generated data has a large number of unit data in which color information is set,
The data generation means derives aggregate data (normal map data ND1, ND2, blur map data) to be used for each generation unit data that causes each of the unit data, and the aggregate data derivation means (step in VDP135). A function of executing S2503, a function of executing steps S3101 to S3107 in the VDP 135), and applying each unit parameter data included in the aggregate data derived by the aggregate data deriving means to each of the generating unit data. By generating the generated data and changing at least one of the method of applying the collective data and the content of the collective data to be applied to generate the generated data in which the same type of individual images are displayed in different modes. A gaming machine characterized by being something that

According to the feature D1, since each unit parameter data group is treated as aggregate data, simplification of processing regarding data handling is achieved. In addition, by changing at least one of the method of applying the collective data and the content of the collective data to be applied, the generated data is generated so that the individual images of the same type are displayed in different modes. It is possible to diversify the display effect while suppressing the amount of image data stored in advance.

Feature D2. The aggregate data deriving unit derives the aggregate data by reading the aggregate data (first normal map data ND1 and second normal map data ND2) from the storage unit (memory module 133). The gaming machine described in Characteristic D1.

According to the feature D2, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while reducing the processing load.

Feature D3. The data generating unit arranges image data of an object, which is three-dimensional information, in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. Viewpoint setting means (a function of executing the process of step S1006 in the VDP 135) for setting the image data of the object on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and the two-dimensional information projected on the projection plane. And a drawing setting means (function of executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135) for generating generated data that is two-dimensional information based on the data of
The aggregate data (first normal map data ND1 and second normal map data ND2) derived by the aggregate data deriving unit is applied to image data of the object arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space. The gaming machine described in the feature D1 or D2.

According to the feature D3, since the arrangement mode of the image data of the three-dimensional information can be changed by using the aggregate data, it is possible to perform a more complicated image display while realizing a realistic image display. Becomes In this case, when the complicated image display is performed, since the set data is used as described above, it is possible to balance both the data capacity and the processing load.

Feature D4. The aggregate data deriving unit derives the aggregate data (blurring map data) by specifying each unit parameter data (Z value) corresponding to the set state in the state where the image data is set. Is something
Features D1 to D3, characterized in that the data generation means generates the generated data based on applying the derived aggregate data to data generated from the image data. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the characteristic D4, since it is not necessary to store the aggregated data in advance, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while reducing the data capacity.

Feature D5. The feature D4 is characterized in that the aggregate data deriving unit derives the aggregate data corresponding to each of the generated data in a situation where the generated data is generated using the aggregate data. Amusement machine.

According to the feature D5, different set data can be used at each update timing, and the display effect can be diversified. Further, even in this case, since the collective data is not stored in advance but is created each time, it is possible to diversify the display effect while reducing the data capacity.

Feature D6. The data generating unit arranges image data of an object, which is three-dimensional information, in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. Viewpoint setting means (a function of executing the process of step S1006 in the VDP 135) for setting the image data of the object on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and the two-dimensional information projected on the projection plane. And a drawing setting means (function of executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135) for generating generated data that is two-dimensional information based on the data of
The aggregate data deriving unit derives the aggregate data (blurring map data) by specifying each unit parameter data (Z value) according to the arrangement mode of the image data of the object by the arranging unit. The gaming machine described in the feature D4 or D5.

According to the characteristic D6, in the configuration in which the realistic image display is realized by using the image data of the three-dimensional information, the aggregate data is created according to the data setting mode that enables the realistic image display. , It is possible to prevent the use of aggregate data from adversely affecting the realistic image display.

Feature D7. The data generating unit arranges image data of an object, which is three-dimensional information, in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. Viewpoint setting means (a function of executing the process of step S1006 in the VDP 135) for setting the image data of the object on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and the two-dimensional information projected on the projection plane. And a drawing setting means (function of executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135) for generating generated data that is two-dimensional information based on the data of
The set data (blurring map data) derived by the set data deriving unit is applied to the data of the two-dimensional information after the projection, according to any one of features D1 to D6. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic D7, the aggregate data is configured not to be applied to the data of the three-dimensional information but to the data of the two-dimensional information. Therefore, while reducing the processing load, It becomes possible to exert such an excellent effect.

Feature D8. The data generating means changes the mode of applying the unit parameter data of the aggregate data to each of the generating unit data among a plurality of update timings, and displays the same type of individual image. A generation executing unit that generates the generated data corresponding to the changing (a function of executing steps S2506, S2507, S2511, and S2512 of the VDP 135, a function of executing steps S1010 to S1012) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D7.

According to the feature D8, it is possible to change the display mode of the same type of individual image between a plurality of update timings while using a single set data. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described while balancing both the data capacity and the processing load.

Feature D9. The generation executing means changes the correspondence between the unit parameter data and the generation unit data in accordance with the switching of the update timing (corresponding to the VDP135, step S2506, step S2507, step S2511 and step). The game machine according to Feature D8, which is provided with a function of executing the process of S2512.

According to the feature D9, the display mode of the image is changed between the plurality of update timings by switching the correspondence between the unit parameter data and the unit data for generation. Therefore, the image is displayed while using the collective data. In the configuration in which the mode is changed, the processing load can be reduced.

Feature D10. The generation executing means applies a plurality of applying means (steps S2506 and S2507 in the VDP 135) for reflecting the contents of the plurality of unit parameter data to one piece of data to which the unit parameter data is applied in each of the generating unit data. , A function of executing the processing of step S2511 and step S2512) is provided, the gaming machine according to the characteristic D8 or D9.

According to the characteristic D10, in the configuration in which the display mode is changed while referring to the unit parameter data, the display mode to be changed can be diversified.

Feature D11. The aggregate data deriving means derives a plurality of the aggregate data,
The generation executing means is
A plurality of applying means (steps S2507 and S2512 in the VDP 135) for reflecting the contents of the unit parameter data of each of the plurality of set data to one piece of data to which the unit parameter data is applied in each of the generation unit data. Function that executes the processing of
In each of the generation unit data, the correspondence between the target data to which the unit parameter data is applied and the unit parameter data is changed along with the switching of the update timing, and the change in the correspondence is changed among the plurality of set data. Correspondence changing means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2506 and S2511 in the VDP 135) for each,
A gaming machine described in Feature D8, which is characterized by including:

According to the feature D11, it is possible to change the display mode in a complicated manner while facilitating the design of the aggregate data at the game machine designing stage.

Feature D12. Arrangement means for arranging image data of an object, which is three-dimensional information, in the virtual three-dimensional space (function of executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. (The function of executing the process of step S1006 in the VDP 135) and the image data of the object are projected on the projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and the generated data (drawing data is drawn based on the data projected on the projection plane). ) For generating the drawing (the function of executing the processing of step S1010 to step S1012 in the VDP 135), and the generated data generated by the data generating means (the display CPU 131, the geometry calculation unit 151, and the rendering unit 152). Storage means (frame buffer 142) for storing;
Display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP135) for outputting and displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display means (symbol display device 31),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The generated data has a large number of unit data in which color information is set,
The data generation means derives aggregate data (normal map data ND1, ND2, blur map data) to be used for each generation unit data that causes each of the unit data, and the aggregate data derivation means (step in VDP135). A function of executing S2503, a function of executing steps S3101 to S3107 in the VDP 135), and applying each unit parameter data included in the aggregate data derived by the aggregate data deriving means to each of the generating unit data. By generating the generated data and changing at least one of the method of applying the collective data and the content of the collective data to be applied to generate the generated data in which the same type of individual images are displayed in different modes. A gaming machine characterized by being something that

According to the characteristic D12, since each unit parameter data group is treated as aggregate data, simplification of processing regarding data handling can be achieved. In addition, by changing at least one of the method of applying the collective data and the content of the collective data to be applied, the generated data is generated so that the individual images of the same type are displayed in different modes. It is possible to diversify the display effect while suppressing the amount of image data stored in advance.

The invention of the characteristic group D is effective for the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. As these game machines, those provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In the gaming machine, a memory in which image data is stored in advance is installed, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device by using the image data read from the memory. Becomes

The case in which an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been done. Further, by reading the image data, generated data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is generated in the storage means such as the VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display unit.

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When the display is performed, an object that is three-dimensional image data is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture that is two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns is attached to the object. Drawing data is created by projecting the object with the texture pasted onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, so that a stereoscopic image is displayed.

Here, in order to increase the player's interest in the display effect, it is preferable to further improve the display effect. On the other hand, in order to further improve the display effect, it is not preferable that the data capacity extremely increases.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Arrangement means for arranging image data of an object, which is three-dimensional information, in the virtual three-dimensional space (function of executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. (The function of executing the process of step S1006 in the VDP 135) and the image data of the object are projected on the projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and the generated data (drawing data is drawn based on the data projected on the projection plane). ) For generating the drawing (the function of executing the processing of step S1010 to step S1012 in the VDP 135), and the generated data generated by the data generating means (the display CPU 131, the geometry calculation unit 151, and the rendering unit 152). Storage means (frame buffer 142) for storing;
An image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage unit is displayed on the display unit (symbol display device 31), and the content of the image is updated at a predetermined update timing (of the VDP 135). Display circuit 155),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The data generation unit includes a texture setting unit (a function for executing a texture mapping process for a special character in VDP) that sets texture image data for the image data of the object,
Predetermined object data (special object PC20) used when displaying a predetermined individual image (special character) is included as the image data of the object, and further set to the predetermined object data as the image data of the texture. Predetermined texture data (first partial textures PC21 to PC23, second partial textures PC24 to PC27) are included.
The predetermined texture data is
First texture data (first partial textures PC21 to PC23) set for the first part data (body part BP) of the predetermined object data;
Second texture data (second partial textures PC24 to PC27) set for the second part data (attached parts AP1 to AP4) of the predetermined object data;
Is included,
The texture setting means,
First setting means (a function of executing steps S3401 to S3403 in the VDP 135) for changing the type of the first texture data set for the first part data;
When setting the second texture data for the second part data, a second setting unit (steps S3405 to S3409 in the VDP 135, which changes the setting positional relationship of the second texture data with respect to the second part data, is used). Function to execute)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic E1, when changing the appearance of the predetermined individual image, the type of the texture data to be set is not changed collectively, but the type of the first texture data that is a part of the texture data is changed. For the second texture data, which is another part of the texture data, the setting positional relationship with respect to the second part data is changed. As a result, the appearance of a part of the predetermined individual image is changed in a complicated manner, while the other part is reduced in data volume instead of reducing the complexity of the appearance change. Therefore, it is possible to change the appearance of the predetermined individual image as described above while balancing the data capacity and the processing load.

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the proportion occupied by the second part data in the predetermined individual image is smaller than the proportion occupied by the first part data.

According to the characteristic E2, the area in which the set positional relationship is changed instead of the type of texture data is less changed when the appearance is changed than the area in which the type is changed instead of the set positional relationship of the texture data. However, since the former area is smaller, it is possible for the player to recognize that the appearance of the entire predetermined individual image has changed significantly.

Feature E3. In the area occupied by the first part data in the predetermined individual image corresponding to the predetermined object data, there is an image portion (eye or mouth pattern portion) whose relative position to the specific outer edge portion does not change in the predetermined individual image. The gaming machine described in the feature E1 or E2.

According to the feature E3, the image portion that is not preferable when the relative position changes is set as the first texture data, so that it is possible to suitably change the appearance of the area including the image portion.

Feature E4. The second texture data is characterized in that the color information set in one boundary portion has continuity with the color information set in the opposite boundary portion. The gaming machine according to any one of E3.

According to the characteristic E4, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a pattern boundary in the predetermined individual image when the setting positional relationship of the second texture data is changed.

Feature E5. There are a plurality of combinations of the second part data and the second texture data,
Features E1 to E4, wherein the second setting means changes the setting positional relationship of the other second texture data when changing the setting positional relationship of one of the second texture data. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the characteristic E5, in a configuration in which a plurality of second texture data are present, the processing load required for setting the second texture data can be reduced.

The invention of the characteristic group E is effective for the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. As these game machines, those provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In the gaming machine, a memory in which image data is stored in advance is installed, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device by using the image data read from the memory. Becomes

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When the display is performed, an object that is three-dimensional image data is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture that is two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns is attached to the object. Generated data is generated by projecting the object to which the texture is pasted onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the generated data, so that a stereoscopic image is displayed.

Here, in order to increase the player's interest in the display effect, it is preferable to further improve the display effect. On the other hand, in order to further improve the display effect, it is not preferable that the data capacity extremely increases.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display portion (display surface G),
Display storage means (memory module 133) that stores image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 131, VDP 135) for displaying an image on the display section using the image data stored in the display storage means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means stores compressed moving image data used to reproduce a moving image,
The display control means,
A developing means (a movie decoder) for developing any one of the moving image data in the developing area and creating still image data for a plurality of update timings for the image corresponding to the moving image data;
By using the still image data for the plurality of update timings expanded by the expanding means in the order defined in the moving image data, one moving image corresponding to the moving image data is acquired for the plurality of update timings. Display effect executing means for executing a display effect to be displayed for the period (a function of executing a calculation process for a round effect in the display CPU 131, a function of executing a setting process for a round effect and a round effect mapping process in the VDP 135). When,
Equipped with
The display effect executing means is configured to execute a display effect of a plurality of types of display patterns by using the one moving image by inserting a predetermined image in a part of a specific period of the effect period of the display effect. A gaming machine characterized by being played.

According to the feature F1, the display effect of a plurality of types of display patterns is executed by using one moving image, so that the amount of data required for the display effect is reduced as compared with the configuration in which moving image data is prepared for each display effect. Can be planned. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data amount while diversifying the display effect.

Feature F2. The display storage means stores predetermined image data (inserted image data IPD0) that is image data used to display the predetermined image and has a smaller data amount than the moving image data.
The gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein the display effect executing means is capable of displaying the predetermined image using the predetermined image data in the specific period.

According to the feature F2, the predetermined image is displayed using the predetermined image data. The predetermined image data is set to have a smaller data amount than the moving image data. Accordingly, it is possible to diversify the display effect with a small amount of data, as compared with the configuration in which the moving image data is prepared for each display effect.

In addition, the configuration in which the predetermined image is displayed using the predetermined image data is more advantageous than the configuration in which the predetermined image is created and displayed, because the process related to the creation of the predetermined image need not be executed. The processing load associated with displaying a predetermined image tends to be light. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load required to display a predetermined image while reducing the data amount related to the display effect, and it is possible to balance the reduction in the data amount and the processing load.

Feature F3. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, wherein the display effect executing means displays the predetermined image instead of the image related to the one moving image in the specific period.

According to the feature F3, there are cases where an image related to a moving image is displayed and a case where a predetermined image is displayed during a specific period. Accordingly, it is possible to use the display of the image related to one moving image as one of the display patterns of the display effect. Therefore, the display effect can be diversified with a small amount of data.

As a specific configuration of this feature, it is conceivable that "the display effect executing means overwrites the image related to the one moving image with the predetermined image in the specific period". According to this configuration, it is possible to display a predetermined image instead of the image related to one moving image without performing any special process in the processing related to the moving image display.

Feature F4. It is characterized in that the display effect executing means creates a composite image by superimposing the image related to the first moving image and the predetermined image in the specific period, and displays the composite image. The gaming machine described in the feature F1 or the feature F2.

According to the feature F4, a composite image of an image related to one moving image and a predetermined image is displayed, and thus an image different from the image related to the one moving image is displayed using the image related to the one moving image. be able to.

In particular, due to the characteristics of moving image data, the moving image data must hold continuous data at each update timing. In this respect, according to this feature, since the composite image is configured to be created using the continuous data, the continuous data can be appropriately used, and the data amount related to the entire display effect can be reduced. It can be suitably performed.

Further, according to the relationship with the feature F2, the display area of the predetermined image can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the image display is performed only with the predetermined image, so that the data amount of the predetermined image data is reduced. be able to. As a result, the amount of data required to display a predetermined image can be reduced.

Feature F5. Arrangement means for arranging the image data of the object in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the setting process for round effect in the VDP135), and viewpoint setting means for setting the viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (camera coordinate system in the VDP135) And a function of executing a conversion process to generate the generated data using projection data created by projecting the image data on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and a direction in which the viewpoint faces. When a plurality of the image data are lined up in the drawing, a setting unit for drawing that preferentially reflects in the generated data the part on the side where the distance from the viewpoint is small in the direction in which the viewpoint is facing ( The VDP135 has a function of executing a rendering data creation process for rendering, and a storage unit (frame buffer 142) for storing the generated data (drawing data) generated by
The display control means displays an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display unit,
The display storage means stores predetermined image data (inserted image data IPD0) that is image data used to display the predetermined image and has a smaller data amount than the moving image data.
The objects include
A first object (moving object) to which still image data generated from the moving image data is pasted as a texture;
A second object (insertion object) to which the predetermined image data is pasted as a texture;
Is included,
The arranging means arranges the respective objects such that the distance from the viewpoint in the direction in which the viewpoint is facing is smaller in the second object than in the first object in the specific period. The gaming machine described in the characteristic F3 or the characteristic F4.

According to the feature F5, the still image data generated from the moving image data is attached as a texture to the first object, and the still image data is updated each time the update timing is reached. Is displayed. Further, a predetermined image is displayed by pasting the predetermined image data as a texture on the second object. In this case, since the second object related to the predetermined image is arranged in front of the first object related to the one moving image, the predetermined image is overlapped with the image related to the one moving image by the hidden surface removal configuration. Is displayed. Thereby, by using the hidden surface removal configuration for displaying a three-dimensional image, a predetermined image is displayed instead of the image related to one moving image, or the image related to one moving image and the predetermined image are combined. It can be done.

Feature F6. The gaming machine according to Feature F5, wherein each of the objects is a plate-like object to which the texture is attached on at least one surface.

According to the feature F6, it is possible to reduce the processing load by using a plate-shaped object having a relatively small processing load as a target to which each image data is attached.

Feature F7. The moving image data includes first unit moving image data (first round moving image data RMD0a) and second unit moving image data (second round moving image data RMD0b) divided in a predetermined unit. Cage,
The display effect executing means displays the moving image based on the first unit moving image data, and then displays the moving image based on the second unit moving image data based on the elapse of the specific period, thereby displaying the moving image based on the first unit moving image data. To display a video,
The game machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, wherein the display effect executing means displays the predetermined image over the specific period.

According to the feature F7, one moving image is displayed using at least the first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data, instead of using a single moving image data. Thereby, for example, it is possible to execute the expanding process for the first unit moving image data at the start of the moving image display, and then execute the expanding process for the second unit moving image data. Becomes In this case, it is possible to suppress the local increase in the processing load at the time of starting the moving image display, as compared with the configuration in which the development of both moving image data is collectively performed.

In such a configuration, the predetermined image is displayed for a predetermined period provided between the moving image display using the first unit moving image data and the moving image display using the second unit moving image data. As a result, the moving image display related to each of the divided moving image data is continuously displayed via the predetermined image, and the player can recognize it as one moving image.

Further, according to this configuration, it is not necessary to simultaneously perform the process related to the moving image display and the process related to the predetermined image display. This can reduce the processing load related to image display.

Feature F8. The game machine according to any one of features F1 to F7, wherein the display effect executing means is capable of changing the predetermined image to be displayed during the specific period.

According to the feature F8, it is possible to recognize different display effects by changing the predetermined image displayed in the specific period each time the display effect is executed. This makes it possible to further diversify the display pattern of the display effect.

In addition, as a specific configuration of this feature, for example, "the display storage means stores a plurality of types of predetermined image data having different display contents, and the display effect executing means stores the plurality of types of predetermined image data. A selection means for selecting any one of the predetermined image data, and using the predetermined image data selected by the selection means, displaying an image corresponding to the predetermined image data selected by the selection means in the specific period. Is possible.

Feature F9. The display effect executing means is configured to cause the moving image to be repeatedly displayed a plurality of times when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, and the moving image display for a predetermined number of times of the plurality of moving image displays. In the specific period, the first predetermined image is displayed as the predetermined image, and the second predetermined image different from the first predetermined image in the specific period in the moving image display of the number of times different from the predetermined number of moving image display. The gaming machine according to feature F8, characterized in that is displayed.

According to the feature F9, moving image display may be repeatedly executed. In this case, since the predetermined image to be displayed is different between the moving image display of the predetermined number of times and the moving image display of the number of times different from the predetermined number of times, display effects having different variations are executed as a whole. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the degree of attention to the display effect due to the repeated display effect.

Feature F10. Based on a predetermined lottery trigger, a determination unit that determines whether or not to shift the game state to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player (a function of executing the win/loss determination process in the main controller 50),
When the determination result of the determination means is a transition correspondence result corresponding to transition of the game state to the specific game state, transition means for transitioning to the specific game state (game state transition process in main controller 50) Function to execute)
Equipped with
In the specific game state, a specific unit game that is started at a predetermined timing of the specific game state and continues until a predetermined ending condition is satisfied is repeated a plurality of times,
The display effect execution means is executed each time the specific unit game is performed, and displays the different predetermined image according to the number of times the specific unit game is executed in one specific game state. The game machine according to feature F8 or feature F9, which is characterized in that

According to the characteristic F10, the specific unit game is repeated a plurality of times during the specific game state. In this case, a display effect using one moving image is executed every time a specific unit game is played. As a result, by repeatedly executing the display effect, the player can understand that the specific unit game is repeatedly played.

In this case, when the same display effect is executed, the player's attention to the display effect is reduced. However, if the configuration is such that a completely different display effect is executed, an inconvenience of increasing the amount of data may occur.

On the other hand, according to this feature, by changing the predetermined image according to the number of times of execution of the specific unit game, a variation of one moving image data is used in the specific game state in which the specific unit game is repeatedly performed. Different display effects can be executed, and the above inconvenience can be avoided.

The above feature group F is effective for the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is known one provided with a display device having a display portion, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit by using the image data read from the memory.

Further, a configuration including moving image data as image data is also known. Since the amount of moving image data is larger than that of still image data, it is stored in a compressed state in a memory for image data. When reproducing a moving image related to the compressed moving image data, the decoder is used to expand the moving image data in a predetermined memory area into a plurality of still image data, and the plurality of still image data are updated. It is necessary to use them in a predetermined order at each timing.

Here, in order to diversify the display effect, it may be desired to reproduce a plurality of types of moving images. In this case, it is conceivable to provide a plurality of types of moving image data, decode any one of the plurality of types of moving image data, and reproduce a moving image related to the moving image data. However, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the amount of moving image data will increase.

<Feature G group>
Features G1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display portion (display surface G),
Display storage means (memory module 133) that stores image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 131, VDP 135) for displaying an image on the display section using the image data stored in the display storage means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means stores compressed moving image data used to reproduce a moving image,
The display control means,
A developing means (a movie decoder) for developing any one of the moving image data in the developing area and creating still image data for a plurality of update timings for the image corresponding to the moving image data;
By using the still image data corresponding to the plurality of update timings expanded by the expanding means in the order defined in the moving image data, the moving image of the image corresponding to the moving image data can be acquired by the plurality of update timings. A moving image display executing means (a function for executing a moving image setting process in the VDP 135) for displaying over the display period of
Equipped with
The moving image data is divided into a plurality of unit moving image data according to a mode of a moving image displayed by the moving image data,
The moving image display execution means displays a series of moving images by sequentially displaying moving images of the unit moving image data in a predetermined order,
Each of the unit moving image data is compressed such that a data amount assigned to each of the unit moving image data is different depending on a mode of each moving image displayed by the unit moving image data. A gaming machine to do.

According to the feature G1, a series of moving image display is performed by sequentially using each unit moving image data instead of using a single moving image data. As a result, for example, at the start of the above-described series of moving image displays, it is possible to execute the expanding process for one unit moving image data and then execute the expanding process for other unit moving image data. It will be possible. In this case, it is possible to suppress a local increase in the processing load when the series of moving image displays is started, as compared with the configuration in which the expansion of both unit moving image data is performed collectively.

In such a configuration, the amount of data assigned to each unit moving image data differs depending on the mode of the moving image displayed by each unit moving image data. Accordingly, the image quality can be adjusted according to the mode of the moving image, so that the image quality can be efficiently adjusted.

Features G2. The display period includes a first section and a second section in which the aspect of the moving image is different,
The unit moving image data includes
First unit moving image data (first round moving image data RMD0a) corresponding to the first section;
Second unit moving image data (second round moving image data RMD0b) corresponding to the second section,
Is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data are set so that the data amounts for performing image display per unit period are different.

According to the feature G2, the amount of data for displaying an image of each unit moving image data per unit period is made different, so that the deterioration of the image quality of the moving image displayed by each unit moving image data is suppressed and the moving image is reduced. It is possible to reduce the data amount of the entire image data.

Features G3. The first section and the second section are a large change section and a small change section in which the amount of change in the image between the update timings is relatively large and small,
The gaming machine according to feature G2, wherein the first unit moving image data is set to have a larger data amount for displaying an image per unit period than the second unit moving image data.

According to the characteristic G3, since a relatively large amount of data is assigned to the first unit moving image data corresponding to a large change section in which the amount of image change is relatively large, block noise, mosquito noise, etc. occur. Hard to do.

On the other hand, for the second unit moving image data corresponding to the small change section in which the amount of image change is relatively small, a relatively small amount of data is allocated, so the data amount of the second unit moving image data should be reduced. Can be planned.

Features G4. The first section and the second section are a high-definition section and a low-definition section in which the definition of the image related to the still image data is relatively high and low,
The feature G2 or feature G3 is characterized in that the first unit moving image data is set to have a larger data amount for displaying an image per unit period than the second unit moving image data. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic G4, since a relatively large amount of data is assigned to the first unit moving image data corresponding to the high-definition section in which the image has a relatively high definition, block noise, mosquito noise, etc. occur. Hard to do.

On the other hand, a relatively small amount of data is assigned to the second unit moving image data corresponding to the low-definition section in which the image is relatively fine, so the data amount of the second unit moving image data should be reduced. Can be planned.

Features G5. The gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G4, wherein the intervals of the update timing are set to be the same regardless of each section.

According to the feature G5, since the update timing interval is set to be the same regardless of each section, compared with the configuration in which the update timing interval is changed according to each section, only the processing for the change is performed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display of moving images, and it is possible to reduce the program capacity by the amount of the program that executes the processing related to the change.

Even in this case, by adjusting the amount of data for displaying an image per unit period, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the image quality and compress the entire amount of moving image data to a predetermined amount. it can.

Features G6. The display storage means stores predetermined image data (inserted image data IPD0) corresponding to a predetermined image,
The display control means,
Predetermined image display execution means for displaying the predetermined image on the display unit using the predetermined image data (function of the display CPU 131 to execute the processing of steps S3510 to S3516, step S3704 to step S3707, step S3804 of VDP135). It is possible to display the moving image and the predetermined image at the same time by providing both the moving image display execution unit and the predetermined image display execution unit at the same time by providing the function of executing the process of step S3807). The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G5.

According to the feature G6, it is possible to diversify the display mode of the image by combining the moving image and the predetermined image.

In this case, in order to display the moving image and the predetermined image at the same time, it is necessary to execute a process relating to display control of both the moving image display and the predetermined image display. Therefore, there is a concern that the processing load will increase.

On the other hand, according to the relationship with the feature G5, the processing load during the display of the moving image can be reduced by the processing load related to the change of the update timing interval. As a result, it is possible to suppress processing omission when displaying both a moving image and a predetermined image at the same time.

Features G7. The display storage means stores predetermined image data (inserted image data IPD0) corresponding to a predetermined image,
When the moving image display executing means displays a moving image of a predetermined unit moving image data among the plurality of unit moving image data, a predetermined period has elapsed from the moving image display of the predetermined unit moving image data. Based on that, it is to display a moving image with subsequent unit moving image data,
The display control means,
A means for displaying the predetermined image on the display unit by using the predetermined image data for the predetermined period (a function of executing steps S3912 to S3915 in the display CPU 131). The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5.

According to the feature G7, the predetermined image is displayed for a predetermined period provided between the moving image display using the predetermined unit moving image data and the subsequent moving image display using the unit moving image data. As a result, the moving image display related to the divided unit moving image data is continuously displayed via the predetermined image, and the player can recognize as a series of moving images.

Further, according to this configuration, it is not necessary to simultaneously perform the process related to the moving image display and the process related to the predetermined image display. This can reduce the processing load related to image display.

The above feature G group is effective for the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is known one provided with a display device having a display portion, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit by using the image data read from the memory.

Further, a configuration including moving image data as image data is also known. Since the amount of moving image data is larger than that of still image data, it is stored in a compressed state in a memory for image data. When reproducing a moving image related to the compressed moving image data, the decoder is used to expand the moving image data in a predetermined memory area into a plurality of still image data, and the plurality of still image data are updated. It is necessary to use them in a predetermined order at each timing.

Here, there are cases where it is necessary to compress the data amount of the moving image data so as to be a predetermined set amount due to the relationship between the storage capacity of the image data memory and other image data. In this case, depending on the compression mode of the moving image data, the image quality of the moving image using the moving image data may be deteriorated, and the degree of attention to the moving image may be reduced.

<Feature H group>
Features H1. An image data storage unit (memory module 133) that stores various image data including image data of an object and image data of a texture attached to the object, and an arrangement unit (VDP135) that arranges the object in a virtual three-dimensional space. In step S4602, step S4609, and step S4610) and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (conversion processing to the camera coordinate system and conversion processing to the view coordinate system in the VDP135). A function to execute), a pasting unit for pasting the texture onto the object (a function to execute a color information setting process in the VDP 135), and the texture to a projection plane set based on the viewpoint. Setting means for projecting an object and generating generated data (drawing data) based on the data projected on the projection plane (function of creating a drawing list in the display CPU 131 and function of executing a drawing process in the VDP 135) A storage unit (frame buffer 142) for storing the generated data generated by the data generation unit (display CPU 131 and VDP 135) having
A display control unit (display CPU 131 and display CPU 131 and a display CPU 131 that causes the display unit (display surface G) to display an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage unit and to update the content of the image at a predetermined update timing. VDP135),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The object includes a transformation target object (refraction object OB10) set as a transformation target,
The data generation means distorts at least a part of the image by deforming the deformation target object (a function of performing distortion effect calculation processing in the display CPU 131, and various processing for distortion effect in the VDP 135). A game machine characterized by having a function of executing.

According to the feature H1, it is possible to distort at least a part of the image displayed on the display unit by deforming the deformation target object. This eliminates the need to prepare a dedicated texture to distort the image. Therefore, the distortion of the image can be expressed relatively easily while suppressing an increase in the amount of data.

Features H2. The feature H1 is characterized in that the distortion forming unit transforms the transformation target object by individually updating at least a part of coordinates of respective vertices forming the transformation target object. Amusement machine.

According to the feature H2, the coordinates of at least some of the vertices of the vertices forming the transformation target object are updated, so that the individual image based on the transformation target object can be visually recognized as being distorted.

In addition, "coordinate mapping data for designating coordinates at each vertex forming the transformation target object is provided, and the coordinate mapping data is set in plural types with different designated coordinates. The distortion forming means updates the coordinates of each vertex by referring to the coordinate mapping data, and updates the referenced coordinate mapping data each time a predetermined update timing is reached, whereby the deformation target object It is to transform the object so that it fluctuates." According to this configuration, it is possible to represent the fluctuation of the image, and to set the coordinates of each vertex of the transformation target object individually as compared with the configuration in which the calculation formula of each coordinate is given and the calculation formula is used. It is possible to reduce the processing load required for.

Features H3. Feature H2 is characterized in that the distortion forming means does not change the coordinates of the vertices of the outer edge of the individual image based on the transformation target object among the vertices forming the transformation target object. Amusement machine.

According to the feature H3, the coordinates of the vertices related to the outer edge of the individual image based on the transformation target object are not changed, so that the boundary between the individual image based on the transformation object and the image around it is less noticeable. This makes it possible to distort a part of the image while making the two familiar.

Features H4. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein the transformation target object is a plate-like object having a plane set in correspondence with an image to be distorted.

According to the characteristic H4, the deformation target object can be easily deformed by using a relatively simple plate-shaped object as the deformation target object. This can reduce the processing load for causing distortion.

Features H5. The distortion forming means arranges the deformation target object closer to the viewpoint than a predetermined object for displaying a predetermined image, and outputs image data corresponding to the predetermined image to the deformation target object as the texture. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, which is characterized by being attached as.

According to the feature H5, the predetermined image is distorted by deforming the deformation target object. This makes it possible to standardize the processing in that it is not necessary to make the processing for a predetermined object different between the case of distorting and the case of not distorting.

Further, since it is possible to correspond to the case of distorting and the case of not distorting depending on whether or not the object to be deformed is arranged, it is possible to relatively easily switch between the case of distorting and the case of not distorting. ..

Features H6. The arranging unit includes a unit (a function of executing the process of step S4602 in the VDP 135) for arranging the predetermined object among the plurality of objects set as display targets,
The drawing setting means projects the predetermined object and generates predetermined generation data corresponding to an image including the predetermined image based on the data projected on the projection plane (processing of step S4608 in VDP135). Function to execute)
The data generation unit generates texture to be attached to the transformation target object by extracting image data corresponding to the predetermined image included in the predetermined generation data (steps S4801 and S4802 in the VDP 135). Function to execute the process of
The distortion forming unit arranges at least the deformation target object in the virtual three-dimensional space, pastes the texture generated by the texture generation unit onto the deformation target object, and further projects the deformation target object. Accordingly, the gaming machine according to Feature H5, which distorts the predetermined image.

According to the feature H6, the predetermined generation data is generated by performing the first projection on the predetermined object, and the texture to be attached to the transformation target object is generated using the predetermined generation data. Then, a predetermined image can be distorted by performing the second projection on the transformation target object to which the texture is attached. This makes it possible to reduce the data amount in that it is not necessary to previously store the texture to be attached to the transformation target object.

Further, since the texture attached to the transformation target object is configured to be generated by projecting a predetermined object, the image related to the texture is actually displayed using the predetermined object. It can resemble a given image. As a result, the image based on the transformation target object and the images around it can be made to fit.

Features H7. The predetermined image is configured to be updated every time the update timing is reached,
The predetermined generation data is generated each time the update timing is reached,
The texture generating means generates a texture to be attached to the deformation target object at each update timing, using the predetermined generation data generated at the update timing. The gaming machine described in H6.

According to the feature H7, the predetermined generation data is generated each time the update timing is reached, and the texture to be attached to the transformation target object is generated. Thereby, even when the predetermined image is updated, the updated predetermined image can be distorted.

A specific configuration of “the predetermined image is configured to be updated at the update timing” is, for example, “the placement unit is configured to update the predetermined object at the update timing”. By updating the coordinates at which the position is arranged, the predetermined image is scrolled in a predetermined direction", or "the viewpoint is moved in a predetermined direction each time the update timing is reached". Conceivable.

Features H8. The distortion forming means arranges the deformation target object in the virtual three-dimensional space, attaches a corresponding texture to the deformation target object, and further projects the deformation target object to generate the predetermined image. Is to create distortion generation data (drawing data for effects and designs) corresponding to a distorted distorted image,
The data generating means is provided with a synthesizing means (function of executing the process of step S4617 in the VDP 135) that synthesizes the predetermined generated data and the distortion generated data to generate one generated data. The gaming machine according to feature H6 or feature H7.

According to the feature H8, the process of generating the predetermined generation data relating to the predetermined image and the process of generating the distortion generation data are separated, and the two are combined to generate one generation data. The process of generating a texture to be attached to the transformation target object can be used as the process of generating one generation data. This can reduce the processing load.

Further, according to the above feature, it is possible to reduce the number of objects that are overlapped in two projections. As a result, the processing load caused by the overlapping arrangement and the overlapping projection can be reduced.

Features H9. The data generation unit generates the generated data based on applying various parameter information that determines a display mode of an image by the object to the object,
In the various parameter information, individual reflection value information (individual α) for determining the degree of the color information of the texture pasted to the object on the display unit for each predetermined unit area (pixel). Value) is included,
The distortion forming unit adjusts the individual reflection value information applied to the transformation target object so that the color information of the individual image based on the transformation target object is less likely to be reflected toward the outer edge of the individual image. The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H8, characterized in that

According to the characteristic H9, the color information regarding the individual image is less likely to be reflected as the outer edge of the individual image based on the transformation target object is approached. As a result, an image that is more familiar with other areas is displayed closer to the outer edge side of the individual image based on the transformation target object. Therefore, the boundary between the region where the distorted image is displayed and the other region can be made inconspicuous.

Feature H10. The data generation unit generates the generated data based on applying various parameter information that determines a display mode of an image by the object to the object,
The various parameter information includes reflection value information (uniform α value) that determines the degree of reflecting the color information of the texture pasted to the object on the display unit,
The distortion forming unit gradually adjusts the reflection value information applied to the deformation target object to gradually prevent the color information of the individual image based on the deformation target object from being reflected ( The game machine according to any one of features H1 to H9, which is provided with a function of executing the process of step S4519 in the display CPU 131.

According to the characteristic H10, the image expressing the distortion gradually disappears, so that the process of disappearing the distortion is less noticeable. As a result, it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling given to the player when the distortion disappears.

Feature H11. The game machine according to any one of features H1 to H10, wherein the image to be distorted is a part of a background image displayed on the entire display unit.

Since the background image is displayed on the entire display unit, the amount of image data is likely to be large compared to the individual image displayed on a part of the display unit. Therefore, if a plurality of types of background image data are prepared in order to distort a part of the background image, the data amount tends to increase.

On the other hand, according to this feature, a part of the background image can be distorted without preparing a plurality of types of background image data, so that the amount of data can be appropriately reduced.

The above characteristic H group is effective for the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. As these game machines, those provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In the gaming machine, a memory in which image data is stored in advance is installed, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device by using the image data read from the memory. Becomes

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon that is three-dimensional image data is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture that is two-dimensional image data such as a character or a pattern is attached to the polygon. Generated data is generated by projecting a polygon to which a texture is attached onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the generated data, so that a stereoscopic image is displayed.

Here, in order to increase the degree of attention to the game, an effect that more realistically represents the image displayed on the display unit may be performed. As the effect, for example, there is an effect that expresses distortion of the space based on refraction of light. In this case, for example, if the reflection degree of the refraction of light is calculated, the processing load may increase. On the other hand, if the image data reflecting the refraction of light is stored in advance, there is a concern that the amount of data will increase.

<Feature group I>
Feature I1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display portion (display surface G),
An image is displayed on the display unit using the generated data (drawing data) generated by the data generating means (the function of creating the drawing list in the display CPU 131 and the function of executing the drawing processing in the VDP 135), and the image is predetermined. Display control means (display CPU 131 and VDP 135) for updating the content of the image at the update timing,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The data generation means generates predetermined first generation data (background drawing data) using a plurality of types of image data, and uses at least the first generation data to generate a predetermined first generation data different from the first generation data. 2 generation data (rendering and design drawing data, or 1 drawing data) is generated,
The display control means displays an image on the display unit using at least the second generated data.

According to the characteristic I1, the first generation data is generated, and the second generation data is generated by using the generated first generation data. Thus, by displaying the image using the second generation data, it is possible to display the image using the image related to the first generation data. Therefore, the display effect can be diversified and the amount of data can be reduced in that it is not necessary to store the first generated data in advance.

Feature I2. The game machine according to feature I1, wherein the data generation means processes at least a part of the first generation data and generates the second generation data by using the processed data. ..

According to the characteristic I2, at least a part of the first generation data is processed to generate the second generation data. As a result, it is possible to diversify the variation of the displayed image as compared with the configuration in which the first generated data is used as it is.

Feature I3. The data generation unit generates the first generation data related to the target image so that a display effect in which a predetermined target image changes over a plurality of update timings is performed, and at least the first generation data is generated. The gaming machine according to feature I2, wherein a part of the game data can be processed to generate the second generation data corresponding to the transition of the target image.

According to the characteristic I3, it is possible to execute the display effect in which the target image changes over a plurality of update timings by using the first generation data and the second generation data. As a result, it is possible to diversify the display effect and to reduce the data amount in that it is not necessary to prepare the image data corresponding to the transition at each update timing.

Feature I4. The data generation unit combines the first generation data and the second generation data to generate the generation data corresponding to the update timing of 1 (a function of executing the process of step S4617 in the VDP 135). ) Is provided, the gaming machine described in the feature I1 or the feature I2.

According to the characteristic I4, since the generated data corresponding to the update timing of 1 is generated by combining the first generated data and the second generated data, the first generated data used for the second generated data is generated. Can be diverted to the processing for generating the generated data. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load when generating the generated data while generating the first generated data at the update timing of 1.

Feature I5. The data generating means,
Arranging means for arranging the object in the virtual three-dimensional space (function of executing the processing of steps S4602, S4609, and S4610 in the VDP 135);
Viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (function of performing conversion processing to the camera coordinate system and conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system in the VDP 135);
A pasting unit for pasting a texture onto the object (a function for executing a color information setting process in the VDP 135);
Drawing setting means for projecting the object on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint and generating the generated data based on the data projected on the projection plane (function of executing various kinds of drawing data generation processing in the VDP 135) )When,
Equipped with
The object includes a specific object (refraction object OB10) used when the second generation data is generated,
The second generation data is generated by arranging at least the specific object and projecting the specific object.
The pasting unit uses at least a part of the first generation data as a texture to be pasted to the specific object (refraction object OB10) when generating the second generation data. The gaming machine according to any one of I1 to I4.

According to the feature I5, at least a part of the first generation data is used as the texture attached to the specific object. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data in that it is not necessary to previously store the texture to be attached to the specific object.

Feature I6. The data generating means,
First arranging means (a function of executing the process of step S4602 in the VDP 135) for arranging a predetermined object among a plurality of objects to be displayed in the virtual three-dimensional space,
Viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (function of performing conversion processing to the camera coordinate system and conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system in the VDP 135);
A pasting means for pasting a texture to at least the predetermined object (a function for executing a color information setting process in the VDP 135);
A first projecting the predetermined object placed by the first placing means on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and generating the first generation data based on the data projected on the projection plane. 1 drawing setting means (function of executing the processing of step S4608 in the VDP 135),
Texture generation means for generating a texture to be attached to a predetermined specific object (refraction object OB10) using the first generation data (a function for executing the processing of steps S4801 and S4802 in the VDP 135);
Second arranging means for arranging at least the specific object in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing steps S4609 and S4610 in the VDP 135);
Second drawing for projecting an object placed by the second placement means onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint and generating the second generation data based on the data projected on the projection plane Setting means (function of executing the process of step S4616 in the VDP 135),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, wherein the pasting unit is for pasting the texture generated by the texture generating unit onto the specific object.

According to the feature I6, the first generation data is generated by performing the first projection on the predetermined object, and the texture to be attached to the specific object is generated using the first generation data. Then, the second generation data can be generated by performing the second projection on the specific object to which the texture is pasted. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data in that it is not necessary to previously store the texture to be pasted to the specific object.

Further, since the texture attached to the specific object is configured to be generated by projecting a predetermined object, the image related to the texture is actually displayed using the predetermined object. You can resemble the image of. As a result, the image based on the predetermined object and the surrounding images can be made to fit together.

Further, since the texture to be attached to the specific object can be generated by the same processing as the processing for generating the second generation data, the processing can be diverted.

Features I7. The specific object is a transformation target object set as a transformation target,
The arranging unit arranges the deformation target object so as to overlap the object for displaying the change target image set as the change target from the viewpoint side (function of arranging the refraction object OB10 in the VDP 135). Equipped with
The data generation unit includes a changing unit (a function for displaying the distorted images CP15 and CP16 in the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135) that changes the change target image by deforming the deformation target object. The gaming machine described in Feature I5 or Feature I6.

According to the feature I7, the change target image can be changed without storing the texture to be attached to the deformation target object.

Feature I8. The game according to Feature I7, wherein the changing unit deforms the deformation target object by individually updating at least a part of the coordinates of each vertex forming the deformation target object. Machine.

According to the feature I8, the coordinates of at least some of the vertices of the vertices forming the transformation target object are updated, so that the individual image based on the transformation target object can be changed.

In addition, "coordinate mapping data for designating coordinates at each vertex forming the transformation target object is provided, and the coordinate mapping data is set in plural types with different designated coordinates. The changing means updates the coordinates of each vertex by referring to the coordinate mapping data, and updates the referenced coordinate mapping data every time a predetermined update timing is reached, so that the transformation target object It is something that deforms so that it fluctuates." According to this configuration, it is possible to represent the fluctuation of the image, and to set the coordinates of each vertex of the transformation target object individually as compared with the configuration in which the calculation formula of each coordinate is given and the calculation formula is used. It is possible to reduce the processing load required for.

Feature I9. A game according to Feature I8, wherein the changing unit does not change the coordinates of the vertices of the outer edge of the individual image based on the transformation target object among the vertices of the transformation target object. Machine.

According to the feature I9, the coordinates of the vertices related to the outer edge of the individual image based on the transformation target object are not changed, so that the boundary between the individual image based on the transformation object and the image around it is less noticeable. This makes it possible to change the change target image while making the two familiar.

Feature I10. The game machine according to any one of features I7 to I9, wherein the transformation target object is a plate-like object having a plane set corresponding to the change target image.

According to the feature I10, the deformation target object can be easily deformed by using a relatively simple plate-shaped object as the deformation target object. As a result, the processing load for changing the change target image can be reduced.

Feature I11. The changing means deforms the deformation target object to distort the change target image (a function of performing distortion effect calculation processing in the display CPU 131, and various processing for distortion effect in the VDP 135). (A function) The gaming machine according to any one of features I7 to I10.

According to the characteristic I11, the distortion of the image can be expressed by the deformation of the deformation target object.

Feature I12. The data generation unit generates the generated data based on applying various parameter information that determines a display mode of an image by the object to the object,
In the various parameter information, individual reflection value information (individual α) for determining the degree of the color information of the texture pasted to the object on the display unit for each predetermined unit area (pixel). Value) is included,
The changing unit adjusts the individual reflection value information applied to the transformation target object, so that the color information of the individual image based on the transformation target object is less likely to be reflected toward the outer edge of the individual image. The gaming machine according to any one of the features I7 to I11, characterized in that

According to the feature I12, the color information about the individual image is less likely to be reflected as the outer edge of the individual image based on the transformation target object is approached. As a result, an image that is more familiar with other areas is displayed closer to the outer edge side of the individual image based on the transformation target object. Therefore, the boundary between the area in which the changed image is displayed and the other area can be made inconspicuous.

Feature I13. The data generation unit generates the generated data based on applying various parameter information that determines a display mode of an image by the object to the object,
The various parameter information includes reflection value information (uniform α value) that determines the degree of reflecting the color information of the texture pasted to the object on the display unit,
The changing means gradually adjusts the reflection value information applied to the transformation target object to gradually reflect the color information of the individual image based on the transformation target object (display). The game machine according to any one of features I7 to I12, which is provided with a function of executing the processing of step S4519 in the CPU 131.

According to the characteristic I13, the image based on the transformation target object gradually disappears, so that the process of disappearing the image is not noticeable. As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort when the image based on the transformation target object disappears.

Feature I14. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I13, wherein the first generation data is image data related to a background image displayed on the entire display unit.

Since the background image is displayed on the entire display unit, the amount of image data is likely to be large compared to the individual image displayed on a part of the display unit. Therefore, if a plurality of types of background image data are prepared to process a part of the background image, the amount of data tends to increase.

On the other hand, according to this feature, since it is possible to perform an effect using a part of the background image without preparing a plurality of types of background image data, it is possible to suitably reduce the data amount.

The above characteristic group I is effective for the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. As these game machines, those provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In the gaming machine, a memory in which image data is stored in advance is installed, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device by using the image data read from the memory. Becomes

The case in which an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been done. Further, by reading the image data, generated data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is generated in the storage means such as the VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display unit.

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon that is three-dimensional image data is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture that is two-dimensional image data such as a character or a pattern is attached to the polygon. Generated data is generated by projecting a polygon to which a texture is attached onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the generated data, so that a stereoscopic image is displayed.

Here, in order to increase the attention to the display effect, it is conceivable to diversify the display effect. However, if a plurality of image data is provided in order to diversify the display effect, there is a concern that the data amount will increase.

<Feature J group>
Features J1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display portion (display surface G),
An image is displayed on the display unit using the generated data (drawing data) generated by the data generating means (the function of creating the drawing list in the display CPU 131 and the function of executing the drawing processing in the VDP 135), and the image is predetermined. Display control means (display CPU 131 and VDP 135) for updating the content of the image at the update timing,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The data generation unit uses the specific image data to identify the change target part (distortion region PE1, overlay region PE2) that is a part of the specific individual image (background image, character image CP22) displayed on the display unit. It is provided with a changing means (a function of displaying the distorted images CP15 and CP16 in the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135 and a function of displaying the partial images CP23 to CP25) by changing the specific individual image. A gaming machine.

According to the feature J1, the specific individual image can be changed by changing the change target image by using the specific image data. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the display effect. In this case, since the specific image data is for changing the change target portion, it is possible to reduce the data amount of the specific image data as compared with the image data corresponding to the entire specific individual image. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the increase in the data amount due to the diversification while diversifying the display effect.

Features J2. The data generation unit includes a unit (function of executing the process of step S4608 in the VDP 135) that generates predetermined generation data corresponding to the specific individual image,
The game machine according to feature J1, wherein the changing means is configured to display an image based on the specific image data in place of the image related to the predetermined generation data at the change target portion.

According to the feature J2, the specific individual image is changed by displaying the image based on the specific image data instead of the image related to the predetermined generation data in the change target site. As a result, it is possible to easily change the change target portion, as compared with the configuration in which the image related to the predetermined generation data and the image related to the specific image data are combined.

Features J3. The data generating means,
Arranging means for arranging the object in the virtual three-dimensional space (function of executing the processing of steps S4602, S4609, and S4610 in the VDP 135);
Viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (function of performing conversion processing to the camera coordinate system and conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system in the VDP 135);
A pasting unit for pasting a texture to the object (a function of executing the processes of steps S4607 and S4615 in the VDP 135);
Drawing setting means for projecting the object on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint and generating the generated data based on the data projected on the projection plane (steps S4608, S4616, and S4617 in the VDP 135). Function to execute processing),
Equipped with
The object includes a specific object which is used to display the specific individual image and in which the change target part is set,
The specific image data is a specific texture set corresponding to the change target portion,
The game machine according to feature J1 or feature J2, wherein the changing means changes the image displayed on the change target portion using the specific texture.

According to the feature J3, it is possible to change the image displayed on the change target site using the specific texture. In this case, since the specific texture is set corresponding to the change target portion, the data amount of the specific texture is likely to be smaller than that in the configuration in which the texture for the entire specific object is prepared. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data.

Features J4. The object includes a plate-like object formed corresponding to the change target portion,
The changing means arranges the specific object and the plate-shaped object so that the plate-shaped object overlaps the change target part from the viewpoint side, and pastes the specific texture on the plate-shaped object. According to the feature J3, the image of the change target portion is changed to an image corresponding to the specific texture.

According to the feature J4, since the plate-shaped object is a polygon having relatively few vertices, the number of vertices of the plate-shaped object is likely to be smaller than the number of vertices corresponding to the change target site in the specific object. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load of attaching the specific texture as compared with the configuration of attaching the specific texture to the change target part of the specific object.

Further, since the case of changing and the case of not changing can be corresponded depending on whether or not the plate-like object is arranged, it is possible to relatively easily switch between the case of changing and the case of not changing.

Features J5. There are multiple types of specific textures,
The changing means uses a plurality of types of specific textures in a predetermined order each time a predetermined update timing is reached, so that a series of operations is performed in the change target part. The game machine according to feature J4.

According to the feature J5, a series of operations is performed at the change target site by using the specific texture to be used in a predetermined order. In this case, since the data amount of one specific texture is smaller than the data amount of the texture of the entire specific object, the data amount related to a series of operations can be significantly reduced. As a result, it is possible to display images related to the series of operations with a small amount of data.

Features J6. The data generating means,
Arranging means for arranging the object in the virtual three-dimensional space (function of executing the processing of steps S4602, S4609, and S4610 in the VDP 135);
Viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (function of performing conversion processing to the camera coordinate system and conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system in the VDP 135);
A pasting unit for pasting a texture to the object (a function of executing the processes of steps S4607 and S4615 in the VDP 135);
Drawing setting means for projecting the object on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint and generating the generated data based on the data projected on the projection plane (steps S4608, S4616, and S4617 in the VDP 135). Function to execute processing),
Equipped with
The object includes a specific object which is used to display the specific individual image and in which the change target part is set,
The specific image data is a transformation target object set as a transformation target,
The changing means arranges the specific object and the deformation target object so that the deformation target object overlaps the change target part from the viewpoint side, and deforms the deformation target object to change the change target part. The game machine according to the feature J1 or the feature J2, characterized in that the image displayed on the screen is changed.

According to the feature J6, by arranging the deformation target object so as to overlap the change target portion and deforming the deformation target object, the individual image based on the deformation target object changes, and the image displayed on the change target portion is changed. It will change. This makes it possible to reduce the data amount in that it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of textures as image data for changing the image.

Features J7. The game according to the feature J6, wherein the changing unit deforms the deformation target object by individually updating at least a part of coordinates of each vertex forming the deformation target object. Machine.

According to the feature J7, the coordinates of at least some of the vertices of the vertices forming the transformation target object are updated, so that the individual image based on the transformation target object can be changed.

In addition, "coordinate mapping data for designating coordinates at each vertex forming the transformation target object is provided, and the coordinate mapping data is set in plural types with different designated coordinates. The changing means updates the coordinates of each vertex by referring to the coordinate mapping data, and updates the referenced coordinate mapping data every time a predetermined update timing is reached, so that the transformation target object It is something that deforms so that it fluctuates." According to this configuration, it is possible to represent the fluctuation of the image, and to set the coordinates of each vertex of the transformation target object individually as compared with the configuration in which the calculation formula of each coordinate is given and the calculation formula is used. It is possible to reduce the processing load required for.

Features J8. The game according to Feature J7, wherein the changing unit does not change the coordinates of the vertices of the outer edge of the individual image based on the transformation target object among the vertices of the transformation target object. Machine.

According to the feature J8, since the coordinates of the vertices related to the outer edge of the individual image based on the transformation target object are not changed, the boundary between the image related to the change target portion and the surrounding images is less noticeable. This makes it possible to change the image of the part to be changed while making the two familiar.

Features J9. The game machine according to any one of features J6 to J8, wherein the transformation target object is a plate-like object having a plane set corresponding to the change target portion.

According to the feature J9, the deformation target object can be easily deformed by using a relatively simple plate-shaped object as the deformation target object. As a result, the processing load for changing the change target part can be reduced.

Features J10. The changing unit deforms the deformation target object to distort the image of the change target portion (a function of executing a distortion effect calculation process in the display CPU 131, and various processes for distortion effect in the VDP 135). The game machine according to any one of features J6 to J9.

According to the feature J10, the distortion of the image can be expressed by deforming the deformation target object.

Feature J11. The changing means arranges the transformation target object closer to the viewpoint than the specific object, and pastes image data corresponding to an image displayed at the transformation target site on the transformation target object as the texture. The gaming machine according to any one of features J6 to J10.

According to the feature J11, the image of the change target part is changed by deforming the deformation target object. This makes it possible to standardize the processing in that it is not necessary to make the processing for a predetermined object different between the case of changing and the case of not changing.

Further, since the case of changing the object and the case of not changing the object can be corresponded to each other depending on whether or not the deformation target object is arranged, it is possible to relatively easily switch between the case of changing and the case of not changing.

Features J12. The arranging unit includes a unit (a function of executing the process of step S4602 in the VDP 135) for arranging the specific object among the plurality of objects set as display targets,
The drawing setting means projects the specific object and generates predetermined generation data corresponding to an image including the specific individual image based on the data projected on the projection plane (processing of step S4608 in VDP135). Function to execute)
The data generation unit extracts the image data corresponding to the change target portion of the specific individual image included in the predetermined generation data to generate a texture to be attached to the deformation target object (in the VDP 135). Function for executing the processing of step S4801 and step S4802),
The changing means arranges at least the deformation target object in the virtual three-dimensional space, attaches the texture generated by the texture generation means to the deformation target object, and further projects the deformation target object. According to the feature J11, the game machine changes the image of the change target portion.

According to the feature J12, the predetermined generation data is generated by performing the first projection on the specific object, and the texture to be attached to the transformation target object is generated using the predetermined generation data. Then, by performing the second projection on the deformation target object to which the texture is pasted, the image related to the change target portion can be changed. This makes it possible to reduce the data amount in that it is not necessary to previously store the texture to be attached to the transformation target object.

In addition, since the texture attached to the transformation target object is configured to be generated by projecting the specific object, the image related to the texture can be displayed in a predetermined manner by actually using the specific object. It can be similar to the image. As a result, the image based on the transformation target object and the images around it can be made to fit.

Furthermore, since the process of generating the texture to be attached to the specific object and the process of changing the image of the change target portion are common, the processing configurations of both can be made common. ..

Features J13. The specific individual image is configured to be updated every time the update timing is reached,
The predetermined generation data is generated each time the update timing is reached,
The texture generating means generates a texture to be attached to the deformation target object at each update timing, using the predetermined generation data generated at the update timing. The game machine described in J12.

According to the feature J13, the predetermined generation data is generated each time the update timing is reached, and the texture to be attached to the transformation target object is generated. Thus, even when the specific individual image is updated, the updated specific individual image can be changed.

Note that, as a specific configuration of “the specific individual image is configured to be able to be updated at the update timing”, for example, “the arranging unit is configured to set the specific object to be updated at the update timing”. A configuration in which the specific individual image is scrolled in a predetermined direction by updating the arranged coordinates", a configuration in which "the viewpoint is moved in a predetermined direction each time the update timing is reached", and the like are considered. Be done.

Features J14. The changing unit arranges the transformation target object in the virtual three-dimensional space, pastes a corresponding texture on the transformation target object, and further projects the transformation target object to change the transformation target site. It creates change generation data that the image changes,
The data generating unit is provided with a synthesizing unit (a function of executing the process of step S4617 in the VDP 135) that synthesizes the predetermined generated data and the change generated data to generate one generated data. The gaming machine according to feature J12 or feature J13.

According to the feature J14, the process of generating the predetermined generation data corresponding to the image including the specific individual image and the process of generating the change generation data are divided, and the two are combined to generate one generation data. Thus, the process of generating the texture to be attached to the transformation target object can be used as the process of generating one generation data. This can reduce the processing load.

Further, according to the above feature, it is possible to reduce the number of objects that are overlapped in two projections. As a result, the processing load caused by the overlapping arrangement and the overlapping projection can be reduced.

Features J15. The data generating means is for generating the generated data based on applying various parameter information that determines a display mode of an image by the image data to the image data,
The various parameter information includes individual reflection value information (individual α value) that determines the degree of reflecting the color information of the image data on the display unit for each predetermined unit area (pixel),
The changing unit adjusts the individual reflection value information applied to the specific image data so that the color information related to the image based on the specific image data becomes less likely to be reflected toward the outer edge of the image. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J14, which is characterized by being:

According to the feature J15, the color information about the image is less likely to be reflected as the outer edge of the image based on the specific image data is approached. As a result, an image that is more familiar with other areas is displayed closer to the outer edge side of the image based on the specific image data. Therefore, the boundary between the image of the part to be changed and the images of other regions can be made inconspicuous.

Features J16. The data generating means is for generating the generated data based on applying various parameter information that determines a display mode of an image by the image data to the image data,
The various parameter information includes reflection value information (uniform α value) that determines the degree when the color information of the image data is reflected on the display unit,
The changing unit gradually adjusts the reflection value information applied to the specific image data to gradually reflect the color information of the specific image data (display CPU 131 in step S4519). The game machine according to any one of features J1 to J15, which is provided with a function of executing processing.

According to the feature J16, the image based on the specific image data displayed on the change target portion gradually disappears, so that the process of disappearing the changed image is less noticeable. As a result, it is possible to reduce a feeling of strangeness given to the player when the change image disappears.

Features J17. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J16, wherein the specific individual image is a part of a background image displayed on the display unit.

Since the background image is displayed on the entire display unit, the amount of image data is likely to be large compared to the individual image displayed on a part of the display unit. Therefore, if a plurality of types of background image data are prepared in order to change a part of the background image, the data amount tends to increase.

On the other hand, according to this feature, a part of the background image can be changed without preparing a plurality of types of background image data, so that the amount of data can be appropriately reduced.

The above feature J group is effective for the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. As these game machines, those provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In the gaming machine, a memory in which image data is stored in advance is installed, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device by using the image data read from the memory. Becomes

The case in which an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been done. Further, by reading the image data, generated data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is generated in the storage means such as the VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display unit.

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon that is three-dimensional image data is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture that is two-dimensional image data such as a character or a pattern is attached to the polygon. Generated data is generated by projecting a polygon to which a texture is attached onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the generated data, so that a stereoscopic image is displayed.

Here, it is considered that the display effect can be diversified by performing the display effect by changing a part of the image displayed on the display unit. However, if the image data of the entire display unit is provided in order to perform the display effect, there is a concern that the amount of data will increase.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. Arrangement means for arranging an object that is three-dimensional information in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP135) and viewpoint setting means (in the VDP135) for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. A function of executing the processes of steps S1005 and S1006), a sticking unit for sticking a texture to the object (a function of executing a color information setting process in the VDP 135), and a projection plane set based on the viewpoint. Projecting means for projecting the object on (a function for executing the processing of steps S1010 and S1011 in the VDP 135), and a drawing setting means for generating generation data (drawing data) based on the data projected on the projection plane ( A storage unit (frame buffer 142) for storing the generated data generated by the data generation unit (display CPU 131, VDP 135) having the function of executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135);
A display control unit (VDP135) for displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage unit on the display unit (display surface G), and for updating the content of the image at a predetermined update timing. ,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The objects include predetermined objects (each object OB1 to OB4) used when the predetermined first predetermined image (sand beach background image BP10) is displayed on the display unit, and the texture includes the Textures to be pasted to a predetermined object, which include predetermined textures (each texture TD1 to TD4) corresponding to an image when the predetermined object is viewed from a predetermined specific viewpoint,
The projection means includes perspective projection and parallel projection as a projection pattern for projecting the object onto the projection plane,
The data generating means,
First generation means for generating generation data corresponding to the first predetermined image by using the predetermined object and the predetermined texture by setting the viewpoint to the specific viewpoint and the projection pattern to the perspective projection (A function of the display CPU 131 to execute a beach background calculation process and a function of the VDP 135 to execute a drawing process),
A second predetermined image different from the first predetermined image using the predetermined object and the predetermined texture by changing the viewpoint from the specific viewpoint to a predetermined change viewpoint and setting the projection pattern to the parallel projection. Second generation means for generating generation data corresponding to (a function of executing a background arithmetic process of a beach sprinting effect in the display CPU 131 and a function of executing a drawing process in the VDP 135),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature K1, the viewpoint is set to the specific viewpoint, the perspective projection is set as the projection pattern, and the predetermined texture is attached to the predetermined object, so that the predetermined object is not complicated and the first predetermined image is displayed. Can be an image with perspective.

In such a configuration, the predetermined texture corresponds to an image when the predetermined object is viewed from the specific viewpoint, and thus when the viewpoint is changed from the specific viewpoint to the changed viewpoint, an image displayed by the predetermined object and the predetermined texture, The perspective does not match that of the image. Therefore, the second predetermined image becomes an unnatural image, which may give the player uncomfortable feeling.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the second predetermined image is generated by performing perspective projection without considering the depth, so that the image displayed between the predetermined object and the predetermined texture and another image is It is possible to match the perspective in This makes it possible to display two different predetermined images while using the same texture. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the display effect while suppressing an increase in the amount of data.

Features K2. Arrangement means for arranging an object that is three-dimensional information in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP135) and viewpoint setting means (in the VDP135) for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. A function of executing the processes of steps S1005 and S1006), a sticking unit for sticking a texture to the object (a function of executing a color information setting process in the VDP 135), and a projection plane set based on the viewpoint. Projecting means for projecting the object on (a function for executing the processing of steps S1010 and S1011 in the VDP 135), and a drawing setting means for generating generation data (drawing data) based on the data projected on the projection plane ( A storage unit (frame buffer 142) for storing the generated data generated by the data generation unit (display CPU 131, VDP 135) having the function of executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135);
A display control unit (VDP135) for displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage unit on the display unit (display surface G), and for updating the content of the image at a predetermined update timing. ,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The objects include a plurality of predetermined objects (each object OB1 to OB4) used when displaying a predetermined first predetermined image (sand beach background image BP10) on the display unit, and the texture further includes A plurality of predetermined textures (each texture TD1 to TD4) which are textures to be pasted to each of the predetermined objects and which correspond to an image when the predetermined objects are viewed from a predetermined specific viewpoint. And
The projection means includes perspective projection and parallel projection as a projection pattern for projecting the object onto the projection plane,
The data generating means,
A first generation of generation data corresponding to the first predetermined image using the predetermined objects and the predetermined textures by setting the viewpoint to the specific viewpoint and the projection pattern to the perspective projection. Generating means (a function of executing arithmetic processing for the beach background in the display CPU 131 and a function of executing drawing processing in the VDP 135);
By changing the viewpoint from the specific viewpoint to a predetermined change viewpoint and setting the projection pattern to the parallel projection, a second image different from the first predetermined image by using the predetermined objects and the predetermined textures A second generation unit (a function of executing a background arithmetic process of a beach running performance in the display CPU 131 and a function of executing a drawing process in the VDP 135) that generates generated data corresponding to a predetermined image (background image for production BP20);
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature K2, the perspective projection is set as the projection pattern, each predetermined object is arranged at a different position in the depth direction, and each predetermined texture is attached to each predetermined object, thereby making each predetermined object complicated. The first predetermined image can be an image with perspective.

In such a configuration, since each predetermined texture corresponds to an image when each predetermined object is viewed from a specific viewpoint, when the viewpoint is changed from the specific viewpoint to the changed viewpoint, a certain predetermined object and a predetermined texture corresponding to it are used. The sense of perspective will not match between the displayed image and the image displayed by the other predetermined object and the predetermined texture corresponding thereto. Therefore, the second predetermined image becomes an unnatural image, which may give the player uncomfortable feeling.

On the other hand, according to this feature, since the second predetermined image is generated by performing perspective projection without considering the depth, it is possible to achieve the perspective matching between the two. This makes it possible to display two different predetermined images while using the same texture. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the display effect while suppressing an increase in the amount of data.

Features K3. The second generation unit is configured to generate the generated data so that the second predetermined image moves by moving the respective images displayed using the predetermined objects in the same direction. The gaming machine according to feature K2.

According to the characteristic K3, the second predetermined image can be moved by moving the respective images displayed using the respective predetermined objects in the same direction, and the display effect can be diversified. On the other hand, if the images are moved in the same direction, the inconsistency in perspective between the images becomes conspicuous, and the display effect of moving the second predetermined image tends to be uncomfortable.

On the other hand, according to the feature K2, since the generated data corresponding to the second predetermined image is generated by performing the parallel projection, the above-mentioned inconsistency can be made inconspicuous. Can be suitably performed.

Features K4. The data generation means generates the generated data based on applying parameter information that determines a display mode of an image by the object to the object,
The parameter information includes magnification information of the object,
A feature K2, wherein the second generation unit sets the magnification information applied to each predetermined object to be smaller as the distance between the change viewpoint and each of the predetermined objects is larger. A gaming machine according to feature K3.

According to the characteristic K4, the image of the predetermined object located farther from the change viewpoint is displayed smaller. As a result, a pseudo perspective is generated, so that an image with perspective can be expressed in parallel projection.

Features K5. The data generation means generates the generated data based on applying parameter information that determines a display mode of an image by the object to the object,
The parameter information includes magnification information of the object,
The magnification information and the coordinates of each of the predetermined objects are set so that the area on which the predetermined objects are projected when the predetermined objects are projected in parallel is the same as the area when the predetermined objects are perspectively projected. The gaming machine described in the characteristic K2 or the characteristic K3.

According to the feature K5, the image obtained by projecting each predetermined object in parallel can be made to resemble the image obtained by perspectively projecting each predetermined object. As a result, the image obtained by parallel projection can be viewed as if it is an image with perspective that is obtained by perspective projection.

Features K6. The second generation unit includes at least a moving unit (a function of executing the process of step S4313 in the display CPU 131) that moves each of the predetermined objects at a predetermined speed,
The moving speed of each of the predetermined objects is set such that the relative speed of each of the predetermined objects with respect to the change viewpoint decreases as the distance between the change viewpoint and each of the predetermined objects increases. The gaming machine according to any one of K2 to K5.

According to the characteristic K6, a predetermined object having a larger distance from the change viewpoint is seen to move slowly, and a predetermined object having a smaller distance from the change viewpoint is seen to move faster. This makes it possible to generate a pseudo perspective in a configuration in which parallel projection is performed.

Features K7. Each of the predetermined objects is a plate-like object,
The plate-shaped objects are arranged side by side in the depth direction of the specific viewpoint in a state of being inclined with respect to the projection plane,
Any one of the characteristics K2 to K6 characterized in that the texture attached to each of the predetermined objects is set in correspondence with the inclination so as to correspond to the image viewed from the specific viewpoint. Gaming machine described in.

According to the characteristic K7, it is possible to generate a perspective image using a relatively simple plate-shaped object by performing perspective projection, and thus it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display of the image. On the other hand, the shift in perspective between the individual images due to the change of the viewpoint is easily noticeable.

On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned feature K2, the parallel projection makes it possible to suppress the shift in perspective due to the change in the viewpoint.

The above characteristic K group is effective for the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. As these game machines, those provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In the gaming machine, a memory in which image data is stored in advance is installed, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device by using the image data read from the memory. Becomes

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon that is three-dimensional image data is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture that is two-dimensional image data such as a character or a pattern is attached to the polygon. Generated data is generated by projecting a polygon to which a texture is attached onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the generated data, so that a stereoscopic image is displayed.

Here, in order to increase the player's interest in the display effects, it is preferable to diversify the display effects. On the other hand, in order to diversify the display effect, it is not preferable to extremely increase the data amount.

Below, the basic configuration of various game machines to which the above respective features can be applied is shown.

Pachinko gaming machine: operating means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each game component arranged in the area, and gives a bonus to the player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of each of the game components.

Rotating type gaming machine such as slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started by the operation of the start operation means, and caused by the operation of the stop operation means Then, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped, and a gaming machine that gives a privilege to the player according to the stopped patterns.

10... Pachinko machine, 31... Design display device, 48... Performance operation device, 131... Display CPU, 133... Memory module, 135... VDP, 142... Frame buffer, 151... Geometry calculation section, 152... Rendering section, 155... Display circuit, AP1 to AP4... Attached parts part, BP... Main body parts part, CH15... Individual image for teaching, CH16... Individual image for teaching, KD1... First key data, KD2... Second key data, ND1... No. 1 normal map data, ND2... second normal map data, PC17... particle dispersion object, PC19... sea surface object, PC20... special object, PC21-PC23... first partial texture, PC24-PC27... second partial texture , PT1... Single particle image, PT2... Single particle image, SD... Surface data, SD1... Applicable surface data, SD2... Buffer surface data, RMD0... Round moving image data, IPD0... Inserted image data, IP1... No. 1 inserted character image, IP2... second inserted character image, RMD0a... first round moving image data, RMD0b... second round moving image data, OB1... sand beach object, OB2... wave object, OB3... sea object, OB4... sky object , TD1... beach texture, TD2... wave texture, TD3... sea texture, TD4... sky texture, PV1... specific viewpoint, PV2... another viewpoint, BP10... sand beach background image, BP20... staging background image, OB10... refraction object, SKD1... Refraction α data, MD1... First coordinate mapping data, MD2... Second coordinate mapping data, CP13... Expanded coral image, CP14... Shrinkage coral image, CP15... First strain image, CP16... Second strain image, PE1 ... Distorted area, OB21... Base object, OB22... Partial object, OB31... Head object, TD11... Base texture, TD12... Partial texture, TD21 to TD23... First to third partial texture, CP21... Base image, CP23 to CP25 ...First to third partial images, PE2... Superposed area.

Claims (2)

Display means having a display part;
Display storage means for storing image data in advance,
Display control means for displaying an image on the display section using image data stored in the display storage means;
A winning means for opening the game ball so that it can be accepted when the game state is advantageous to the player
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means stores compressed moving image data used to reproduce a moving image,
The display control means,
Expanding means for expanding any of the moving image data in the expansion area to create still image data,
By using the still image data expanded by the expanding means, display effect executing means for executing a display effect of displaying a moving image of an image corresponding to the moving image data for a predetermined display period,
Equipped with
The display effect executing means,
A first means capable of executing a specific effect by displaying a predetermined insertion image on the display unit;
Second means capable of displaying, on the display unit, a moving image based on the first moving image data displayed before the specific effect by the first means and a moving image based on the second moving image data displayed after the specific effect. When,
Equipped with
By the first means and the second means is capable of executing a series of display effect corresponding to one round game to be executed by an open state the winning unit,
The data amount assigned to the first moving image data is compressed so as to be larger than the data amount assigned to the second moving image data,
A gaming machine, wherein the inserted image can be displayed so as to overlap with a moving image based on the second moving image data. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising an operating unit for performing a shooting operation for shooting a game ball.

Images